


-Β 734 ope 





UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA. 


GIFT -OF 


| 
| 
gta Roan ον ῳ i), Paes qe: 


Class 


ἢ 


I) Ὁ 7 ws 





A STUDY 


OF THE 


Case Construction of Words of Time 
Ἵν" 
ae" 


Y 
yall fein go BRN Pxu.D. 
Πρ ΤΑ κι 212. 


A THESIS PRESENTED TO THE FACULTY OF THE GRADUATE SCHOOL OF YALE UNIVERSITY 


IN CANDIDACY FOR THE DEGREE OF DOCTOR OF PHILOSOPHY 


PUBLISHED BY THE AUTHOR 
NEW HAVEN; CONN. 


1904 





ΒΥ 


LESTER DORMAN BROWN, 


UNIVERSITY. 


ates eseleatey : 
Sosa ph Δ Bare Sa fl 


- PUBLISHED BY THE AUTHOR 
NEW HAVEN, CONN. : 


ρος 


Lei. 


: 


40) iB tad, 


aap 


ie pes 


κι 






















ἡ ΠΝ Ἷ ἱ αν - ; ΠῚ : 
We gy ‘THE TUTTLE, MOREHOUSE ἃ TAYLOR COMPANY ¢ 
} pray eA 
χυτὰ } 
Tel : ¥ > 
Py ι 


Ww 


PREFACE. 


The texts used in the compilation of the material for this 
thesis were the Ameis-Hentze editions of the Iliad (1894-96) 
and the Odyssey (1880-90), the Herodotus of Dietsch 
revised by Kallenberg (1894-99), the Thucydides of Hude 
(1901), the Anabasis of Gemoll (1899), and the Hellenica 
of Keller (1901). | 

The writer wishes to express his gratitude for the valuable 
criticism and suggestions of Prof. E. P. Morris, Prof. 
T. D. Goodell, and Prof. E. Washburn Hopkins. Grateful 
acknowledgment is also due Prof. Goodell for reading the 


proof. 
Is) Da Bat 


New Haven, Conn., 
April, 1904. 


Digitized by the Internet Archive 
in 2008 with funding from 
Microsoft Corporation 


https://archive.org/details/studyofcaseconst00browrich 





Words whose primary meaning is that of time make up 
a small percentage of the whole number of words contained 
in any language. Of this class the nouns are still fewer in 
number and may easily be enumerated, day, night, month, 
etc. The aim of the writer is to study this small range of 
common though important words as they are found in Greek 
for the purpose of discovering as far as possible the factors 
that determine the meaning of their case construction. The 
term, case construction, as used here will exclude the subject 
nominative, the subject and object accusative, the dative 
with a comparative, the genitive of measure,* a simple limit- 
ing genitive and the like; that is, the topics under considera- 
tion will be the so-called temporal constructions in the geni- 
tive, dative and accusative. The material for this work, 
amounting to some 3100 cases, of which about 600 have been 
discarded as not serving the end in view, has been gathered 
from the Iliad and the Odyssey, Herodotus, Xenophon’s 
Anabasis and Hellenica, and Thucydides. The collections 
from the Iliad and the Odyssey, Herodotus, the Anabasis 
and the Hellenica are, it is hoped, complete, as they were 
made from a personal reading of the text; that from Thucy- 
dides has been taken from M. H. N. von Essen’s Index 
Thucydideus (Berlin, 1887). 

The following is a list of the nouns of a temporal signifi- 
cation found in the above mentioned sources: ἡμέρα (ἦμαρ), 
νύξ (εὐφρόνη), μήν, ἔτος, ἐνιαυτός, λυκάβας, ἔαρ, θέρος, ὀπώρα, μετό- 
πωρον, φθινόπωρον, χειμών, ὄρθρος, περίορθρος, ἕως, μεσημβρία, δείλη, 
ἑσπέρα, cpa, χρόνος. This list does not exhaust the words to 
be discussed in dealing with this subject, but contains all 
those nouns whose predominate element is that of time, 
and in which the investigation will center. All other words 


*In its original form this thesis contained an appendix dealing 
with the dative with a comparative and the genitive of measure. 


aE, tea 


and expressions which must necessarily be examined will 
be given in their proper place. 

These nouns of time do not differ from any other class 
of nouns in the manner of expressing their relation to 
other words, but employ the same means; those’ that are 
most concerned in the present investigation are inflectional 
endings and single words, of which prepositions and adverbs, 
especially the former, are most important for the work in 
hand. Hence we may say that the relations of such substan- 
tives to other words in a sentence are indicated with or with- 
out the aid of a preposition or adverb. This in fact is the 
first characteristic that will be noticed in reviewing any 
mixed collection of material of this particular sort. And 
so it is that such a mass of data naturally falls into these 
two divisions, one of which contains all instances of relation 
expressed by means of inflectional endings, the other, those 
that employ a preposition or adverb for that purpose.* It 
will readily be granted that these two sections must be 
examined separately, thus forming two distinct parts to this 
study. Yet the examination must not stop here. These 
divisions must be carefully compared with the purpose of 
learning what it is that demands a preposition for the expres- 
sion of the relation, and what distinction, if any, there is 
between the forms of expression of which a preposition is 
the relating element and those that apparently rely upon an 
inflectional ending to perform that service. 

The section to be considered will be the one marked by 
the absence of preposition and adverb, the mass of cases 
which do not employ a word to make clear their relation to 
other words in the sentence. 

In the examination of such a quantity of material the first 
question that confronts one is the manner of classification. 

* This thesis as originally submitted contained a chapter dealing 
with this second division, which by reason of its length has been 
omitted in the published form with the exception of a brief state- 


ment of the method employed and of the observations made on 
concluding the study. (See Appendix.) 


rae eek 


Shall it be according to function or according to form? 
Though the latter method has been chosen unreservedly 
in preference to the former, there is no good reason in this 
case for recounting the respective merits and defects of 
each and showing how immeasurably superior for scientific 
investigation is that based on a formal distinction. In 
applying this general method of classification to the present 
material a number of different groupings may be made, 
grounded on more or less minute distinctions. Divisions 
may be made on the basis of the presence or absence of 
adjectival modifiers, on the basis of the meaning of the sub- 
stantive, of the meaning of the modifier, according to the 
inflectional ending, according to the number of the substan- 
tive, the meaning of the verb upon which the temporal 
expression depends. From a marking off into separate 
classes according to any one of these formal characteristics 
some result of more or less importance is obtained. Though 
only two or three of these differences in form will be made 
the basis of a primary classification, yet the others will be 
utilized in forming subordinate ones. 

The first primary classification to be made has for its mark 
of differentiation the presence or absence of adjectival modi- 
fiers. This has been chosen as the first because of its sim- 
plicity, though apparently at first sight productive of no 
result. 

Used without modifiers: ἡμέρα, νύξ, ἐνιαυτός, θέρος, ὀπώρα, 
χειμών, ἠώς, μεσημβρία, δείλη, ἑσπέρα, ὄρθρος, ὥρα, χρόνος. 

Used with modifiers : ἡμέρα, νύξ, μήν, ἔτος, ἐνιαυτός, λυκάβας, 
ἔαρ, θέρος, χειμών, ἠώς, μεσημβρία, δείλη, ἑσπέρα, ὄρθρος, ὥρα, χρόνος. 

As the lists stand at present the inference on the one 
hand would be that ἔτος, λυκάβας, μήν and ἔαρ were not used 
without a modifying word. This is doubtless true for 
ἔτος, since whenever the thought was to be expressed by a 
word for year in the singular number unmodified, ἐνιαυτός 
was always used. In the case of the second word, though 
used but twice in Homer, Od. 14 161, 19 306, the situa- 


iN . “RRB 


tion seems to have been the same as with ἐνιαυτός (cf. Ap. 
Rh. 1 198 μένων λυκάβαντα). The same may probably be 
said of μήν (cf. Od. 14 244). And likewise for ἔαρ there is 
nothing to prevent its being used alone, as it belongs to 
the same class as the words for summer and winter, which 
were often so used (cf. Hes. Op. 462). On the other hand 
ὀπώρα does not appear to be used with a modifier. But 
one is not justified in coming to such a conclusion, because 
of the very small number of cases found and because it is 
a word denoting one of the seasons, which very frequently 
appear in the modified form. Thus far nothing is gained 
from this classification. But a closer examination of the 
words used without modifiers reveals a marked difference 
in the case of some of them. 

In every instance of ἐνιαυτός and χρόνος so used the num- 
ber of the noun and the context show there is an implied 
modifier, with the first the cardinal numeral, one,* with 
the second some word of measure more or less definite 
according to the context. These are as explicitly under- 
stood as though actually written. This is illustrated in 
the following examples. ἀλλὰ ζῶν αἰκισθεὶς ἐνιαυτόν. An. II 
6 29. οὔπω δ᾽ ἐνιαυτὸν ὄντος ἐν τῇ βασιλείᾳ ᾿Αγησιλάου. Hell. III 
34. cf. Od. 1 288, Thuc. I 109 4, 137 4, IV 118 τὸ, 118 12, 
VII 28 3, Hell. VI 4 34. 


ἀλλ᾽ ἤδη μοι ἀνιάζουσιν ἑταῖροι 
ἐν Τύλῳ ἠγαθέῃ, σὺ δέ με χρόνον ἐνθάδ᾽ Epvxers.—Od. 4 598-9. 


ἐπισχὼν χρόνον ἐς ἀγορῆς κου μάλιστα πληθώρην πρόσοδον ἐποιέετο. 
Hdt. VII 223. cf. 1175, VI 129, IX 49, Thuc. IV 73 4. 
Another word possessing this same peculiarity is ἡμέρα. 
But it differs from those above in that it has two meanings, 
“daytime,” the period of light, and “day,” equivalent to 
twenty-four hours. Whenever it has the latter significa- 
tion and is unmodified, the number and the context give 
abundant evidence that the meaning is “one day.” In 
the following passages the two meanings of the word may 


* The same statement would be true of μήν. cf. Od. 14 244. 


rma: jaa 


be distinguished, and it may also be seen that when signi- 
fying “‘day’”’ the meaning is always the same as piav ἡμέραν. 
ws δὲ ἅπαξ ἤρξατο, ἔρρει αὐτῷ νύκτα τε Kal ἡμέραν τὸ αἷμα, καὶ πάντα 
ποιοῦντες οὐκ ἐδύναντο σχεῖν τὸ ῥεῦμα πρὶν ἐλιποψύχησε. Hell. V 
4 58. wore οὕτω γ᾽ ἐχόντων οὐκ οἶδα ὅ τι ἄν τις χρήσαιτο αὐτοῖς εἴτε 
νυκτὸς δέοι εἴτε καὶ ἡμέρας. An. ΠΠΠ1 40. καὶ ἡμέρας μὲν ἀδύνατα 
ἐδόκει εἶναι λαθεῖν προσελθόντας τε καὶ ἀναβάντας. Thuc. VII 43 2. 
διὸ ἔμειναν ἡμέραν ἐν τῷ πεδίῳ. An. I 2 21. οἱ δὲ ἐκλείψειν μὲν οὐκ 
ἔφασαν, σπείσασθαι δὲ σφίσιν ἐκέλευον ἡμέραν τοὺς νεκροὺς ἀνελέσθαι. 
6 δὲ ἐσπείσατο δύο. Thuc.1V 114 2. cf. VIII 103 2, V 591. 

An examination of the above justifies one in concluding 
that the words for “day,” “year,” “time,” and in all proba- 
bility “month” when unmodified are always equivalent to 
“one day,” “one year,” etc. In fact one cannot conceive 
of these words employed without a modifier in one of the 
temporal constructions without having this additional ele- 
ment implied. That the words for “night time,’ “summer,” 
“winter,” afternoon,” etc., are regularly used without such 
an implied modifier is too well known to call for any illus- 
trations. 

With this fresh light a new classification may be made 
which is more satisfactory. Thus in one class will be placed 
the words which may be used absolutely without any modi- 
fiers, and in the other those that are used with modifiers 
expressed or implied. 

Words used absolutely without a modifier: ἡμέρα, “ day- 
time,”’ νύξ, ἔαρ (see p. 4), θέρος, ὀπώρα, χειμών, ἠώς, μεσημβρία, 
δείλη, ἑσπέρα, ὄρθρος, ὥρα. 

Words used with a modifier expressed or implied: ἡμέρα, 
“day” or “daytime,” νύξ, μήν, ἔτος, ἐνιαυτός, λυκάβας, ἔαρ, 
θέρος, ὀπώρα (see p. 4), χειμών, ἠώς, μεσημβρία, δείλη, ἑσπέρα, 
ὄρθρος, ὥρα, χρόνος. 

Thus finally we find ourselves in a better position to 
answer the question touching the result of the classification 
according to the presence or absence of modifiers. In the 
first place, it is seen that all those words which are found 
to be used absolutely without modifiers may be used with 


ee ae 


them, and what is more important, they all have the meaning 
either of a time of day or a time of year, a season; thus they 
practically belong to one class, at most to two, the members 
of which bear a like relation to the wholes of which they 
are the respective parts. In the second place, there are 
found on the side of those words which are used with modi- 
fiers either expressed or implied some that are quite excluded 
from the other class. They have the meaning of “day” 
equivalent to twenty-four hours, “month,” “year” and 
“time.” That this is the case is due to the meanings of the 
various words. Daytime, night time, summer, winter, etc., 
without any defining word may in a loose way give the time 
of an action or even under certain conditions may give the 
time of duration. But day, month, year cannot give the 
time of an action without some word to tell what day or 
month, nor can they indicate how long an action continued 
without some word of measure expressed or implied, or 
some particularizing word. 

A question following naturally upon the above is whether 
this classification shows any other peculiarity in addition to 
the one given. It would be supposed that where there is 
such a well defined line of cleavage in meaning, on the one 
hand the words for the time of day and season of the year, 
on the other those for day, month, year and time, there 
should also be found some other difference as distinct. The 
existence of such a difference may be sought for in the con- 
struction as it is exhibited in the number and case employed. 

A table made with this end in view allows the following 
inferences to be drawn. With the exception of ἦμαρ and νύξ 
in Homer the use of the words without modifiers—meaning 
the time of day, the time of year—is in the singular num- 
ber only, a peculiarity which is readily explained by the 
meanings of the words. Daytime, night time, summer, win- 
ter, etc., when unmodified have no need of a plural in order 
to give the time of an action or even that of its duration, 
the use of that number to express that relation being peculiar 
to Homer, and a question to be discussed later in connection 


eae” Apacs 


with the examination of the accusative case. On the other 
hand the words modified are employed in both numbers 
alike, and though for some of them no examples of the 
plural are found in the sources used, yet certainly there is 
nothing in the words themselves to prevent their use in that 
number. Secondly, the words without modifiers are em- 
ployed almost exclusively in the genitive and accusative. 
The exceptions to this are νυκτί, Od. 15 34, Hdt. VII 12, 
θέρεϊ, 11. 22 151, χειμῶνι, 11. 21 283, ὥρῃ, Il. 2 468, Od. 9 51. 
These exceptions in which the dative is found are limited 
to four words of which the six examples are taken from 
Homer and Herodotus, both of whom in more than one 
particular do not follow the general rules for nouns of time 
based on Attic prose. Passing to the words on the other 
side of the line, we find them used in all three cases in the 
singular, genitive, dative and accusative, but only in the 
genitive and accusative in the plural. At least these state- 
ments apply to those words that are confined to this class, 
day, month, and year, while the others for which the sources 
used do not furnish examples illustrating all three cases, do 
not contain any element which excludes them from any one 
of them. 

In concluding it may be safely said, I think, that those 
nouns denoting time which may be used without modifiers, 
are, when employed under such circumstances, as a general 
rule limited to the genitive and accusative singular. On the 
other hand, it may be affirmed that those nouns of time that 
always have some modifying word expressed or implied are 
not limited in their construction as to number and case, mak- 
ing an exception however of the dative plural; or limiting 
the statement to one case, it may be said that with the dative 
singular there is regularly coupled some modifying word 
and that the dative plural is not used. Thus it is clear that 
the line drawn between the modified temporal words and 
the unmodified marks a distinction in number and case con- 
struction as well as in meaning. 


ies 


Thus far we have been dealing with the two divisions of 
the classification as wholes, endeavoring to discover what 
differences exist between them. Now since that has been 
accomplished, a step further may be taken by grouping the 
words which are modified according to the meaning of those 
modifiers and the case employed. These modifying words, 
as might be expected in prose, are not mere descriptive 
epithets, but are necessary for a clear understanding of the 
thought as it was in the mind of the speaker or writer. Such 
a classification is a proper preliminary to the investigation 
of the question, whether these adjectival modifiers, seeing 
that they are such necessary adjuncts, have any influence on 
the case construction, that is, whether this or that modifying 
word is coupled with the use of a certain case or cases.* 

In the first place, the table showing this classification 
makes it plain that the demonstrative pronouns, αὐτός, 
“same,” and ἐπιών, “following’’ exert no particular influ- 
ence on the case of the nouns which they modify, though 
doubtless in a wider range of literature the number of in- 
stances of the demonstrative pronoun with the dative case 
would be found to outnumber by far those with the genitive. 
To the words just mentioned there might be added ἐπιγιγνό- 
μένος SO common with Thucydides, even though no case of 
the accusative can be cited. Secondly, the table shows that 
torepaios and the ordinal numerals are almost invariably 
connected with the dative. The genitive is wholly absent in 
the case of the former, and but one instance of it with the 

*In the classification according to the modifying words those 
that are unusual and appear only sporadically were omitted because 
there was with them no basis of numbers from which to draw 
any conclusion. This was also done in the case of descriptive 
epithets because of their great scarcity and their evident lack of 
influence on the case construction by reason of their meaning. In 
regard to the inferences drawn it should be said that in some cases 
the conclusions may be considered pretty certain because of an 
abundance of material, in others because of a lack of it they are 


only tentative, to be verified or modified by more extended inves- 
tigation in other authors. 


oe 


latter is found, Hdt. [TV 180; and the accusative appears 
only at rare intervals. In fact in the whole of the Anabasis 
and the Hellenica and all Thucydides and Herodotus there 
is found but one case of τὴν ὑστεραίαν (An. III 5 13) over 
against one hundred and nineteen cases of the dative, and 
but six instances—of which two are with xpévos—of an 
ordinal with a noun in the accusative over against one hun- 
dred and thirteen instances, exclusive of Homer, of the 
same combination in the dative. In this class one is inclined 
to place also προτεραῖος, which in formation and meaning 
is closely related to éorepaios, also ἄλλος “‘next,’’ and perhaps 
ὕστερος and πρότερος. A third observation is that πολύς, ὀλίγος, 
ὅλος, τοσοῦτος and the cardinal numerals are regularly accom- 
panied by the genitive or accusative case. The three excep- 
tions are μιῇ ἡμέρῃ, Hdt. II 42, V 929, μιᾷ νυκτί, Thuc. VI 27 
1. ' There should here be added the article, which does not 
seem definite enough for use in the dative case, though one 
instance is found, τῇ μεσαμβρῳ, Hdt. III 104. As for some 
of the other modifying words, there is no justification for 
saying that ὅσος, πᾶς and its compounds, πλείων, πλεῖστος, 
ἄλλος ““rest,’’ and the indefinite pronoun, equivalent toa 
weak word of measure, were limited to the accusative case, 
because no instance with the genitive can be cited from the 
sources. But rather they too should be classed with πολύς, 
etc., because of the similarity in meaning between ὅσος and 
τοσοῦτος, πᾶς and ὅλος, πλείων, πλεῖστος and πολύς, the indefinite 
pronoun and the whole class. Last of all it is noticed that 
ἕκαστος apparently favors the genitive, which is found 
twenty-three times with but one instance each for the dative 
and accusative. Since in every one of the above groups 
some exception or other may be cited, because there are 
other strong influences at work which neutralize the force 
of the modifying word, the inferences which have been 
drawn must be taken not as rules invariably followed but 
as indicating tendencies pointing strongly in this or that 
direction. 


-το-- 


With this in mind we may sum the matter up by dividing 
the list of modifiers into three classes. First, those that 
accompany the three oblique cases, including the demonstra- 
tive pronouns, αὐτός, ἐπιών and ἐπιγιγνόμενος (?). Second, 
those that are joined with the dative and accusative, with 
sporadic instances of the genitive, comprising the ordinal 
numerals, torepatos and perhaps zporepaios, πρότερος, ὕστερος, 
and ἄλλος “‘next.”” A third class are those usually found 
in connection with the genitive and accusative with only a 
rare instance of the dative; these consist of cardinal numer- 
als, πολύς, ὀλίγος, ὅλος, πλείων, πλεῖστος, τοσοῦτος, ὅσος, πᾶς and 
its compounds, ἕκαστος, ἄλλος “‘rest,’’ the indefinite pronoun 
and the article. Or in other words, the first two classes, 
which are really two divisions of a larger class, consist 
of words of a demonstrative nature with a preference 
for the dative case; the third is made up of words denot- 
ing measure, the article and the distributive adjective, 
which are employed almost exclusively in the genitive and 
accusative. The predominance of the former group in the 
dative and the latter in the genitive and accusative, especially 
the latter, quadrates with the general meanings assigned to 
the respective case constructions of words of time. 

Finally, a summary of all the results of the first primary 
classification according to the presence of definitive adjec- 
tival modifiers, expressed or implied, or their absence, may 
be given as follows. First, it shows a distinct line of 
demarcation in meaning between words of time used with- 
out such modifiers and those used with. Comprising the 
former class are the nouns meaning a time of day and a 
season of the year. In the latter are the words denoting 
“time,” “day,” “month” and “year,” which are excluded 
from the other class, though all the members of the first class 
may be used with modifiers. Secondly, it has been learned 
that the division along the given lines marked a distinction 
in case construction. Used without modifiers the words are 
confined to the genitive and accusative with the exceptions 
noted; used with modifiers the three oblique cases are com- 


99 


mon. Thirdly, further examination showed a limitation of 
case construction in the presence of certain modifiers; in 
general those nouns modified by a word of demonstrative 
nature are employed in all cases, with a predominance of 
the dative singular, those modified by a word expressive 
of measure or by the article are regularly found in the 
genitive and accusative. 

The second primary classification has as its basis of divi- 
sion the meaning of the word of time subdivided according 
to the case, for the purpose of learning whether any of the 
words are employed in one case to the exclusion of another, 
or more often in one case than in another. With this aim 
in view it has been deemed sufficient that the totals for 
each case be given. And since the question at issue has to 
do with the singular, because the dative plural without a 
preposition is not found in the sources used expressing a 
temporal relation, the statistics for the plural have been 
omitted. It also has not been thought necessary to give 
the data for the accusative singular, since it is evident 
enough that any noun denoting time may under proper con- 
ditions be employed in that case to deniote the period through 
which an action continues. 


Gen. Gen. Dat. Dat. 
unmod. mod. unmod. mod, 
ἡμέρα" “" daytime xyes high 10 6 ὍΝ 
ἥμερα αν πρῶ πον Ως 4 19 tae 288 
os, RO PARC TRE ΝΟΣ ΝΥΝ 66 60 I II 
PBs tacattn's aii-uiy' sities oy 4 es 10 
SPOT αν τ cies es tebe wig ae 14 ἫΝ 67 
ri ede, τς Cio a abn WA He Fe Syl he 2 ἂν 7 
SOBs Ges di ΕΝ Αοϑ de 2 
CO asin bam ek axe 6 47 I 2 
χομαν, νων Vale να τ 6 38 I 
ραν τς Rg eM fe δῇ I me 
GATE Fos sia)o sony ae a ee 2 ἐς Ι 
μοσημβρία.. οὐ ice dbake Ι ὯΝ Ι 
ΘΕ Χο ae αν on hee Ι 2 ae 
ἀϑηθρανν ον eat can aeeuee 2 τ Ι 
ἘΣ Σ FS ΒΥ ἸΡΡΝ ἡ ς Ι Ι τὴς vp 
GODS ica o disse sv doin aes δι te 3 ee 
MANNE bn a's ch oa ue 7 ἐν 9 


* There seems to be no instance of ἡμέρα with the meaning of 
the period of daylight in the dative. There certainly is no case 


A glance at the above table is enough to show a varia- 
tion in the use of the genitive and dative with the various 
words. With some the genitive is the predominating con- 
struction, with others the dative. This is abundantly proved 
if one includes in the count of the genitives the unmodified 
instances and those with the article only, and if in the count 
of the datives those expressions are included which were 
ascertained to be coupled usually with the dative case, as 
torepatos and the ordinal numerals. If this is done there 
is a division of the following sort. 

I. Nouns with which the genitive is the prevailing case 
are ἡμέρα ““daytime,”’ νύξ, ἔαρ, θέρος, ὀπώρα, χειμών, ἠώς, μεσημ- 
βρία, δείλη, ἑσπέρα, ὄρθρος. 

II. Nouns with which the dative is the prevailing case are 
ἡμέρα “day,’’ μήν, ἔτος, ἐνιαυτός, χρόνος, wpa. 

ὥρα seems to be out of place as it belongs rather to the 
words for season. Yet too much stress need not be laid on 
this word as it is rare, being found but three times, all of 
which are in Homer, two of them in a repetition of the same 
clause. But the above division is scarcely fair as it is 


similar to the accusative in such expressions as πρόπαν ἦμαρ és ἠέλιον 
καταδύντα, 1]. 1 601, and ταύτην μὲν οὖν Thy ἡμέραν καὶ νύκτα ἔμειναν ἐν 
πολλῇ ἀπορίᾳ ὄντε. An. IV 38. There is nothing in the context to 
show that in the phrases, ταύτῃ τῇ ἡμέρᾳ, etc., the thought was analyzed 
far enough to say that a particular period of daylight was meant, 
but simply day without any idea of a division into daytime and 
night time. The only thing that leads one to think that daytime 
may be the meaning is that many of the actions are such as are 
usually performed during that period. But that does not appear to 
be a sufficient reason for taking it so, when merely to date is the 
purpose. In the sentence, The sun shone brightly the first of 
December, the mind does not trouble itself to carry the analysis 
of the thought to the point of “the first daylight period of Decem- 
ber.’’ Of all the many examples of the dative of ἡμέρα there is 
but one that comes near being equivalent to daytime, namely, τῇ 
ὑστεραίᾳ, Hell. I 2 4, followed in the next sentence but one by τῆς 
ἐπιούσης νυκτός. But here there is a separation, and also the dating 
purpose is so manifest that one is not called to make a further 
analysis. 


--13-- 


known that the dative is very seldom found without some 
modifier, and that the genitive is by no means usual with 
such adjectives as torepatos and ordinal numerals. But per- 
haps too much weight must not be thrown on the modifier 
as the determining factor in deciding the case. The noun 
itself may possess those elements that induce its use in one 
case rather than another. Hence the division may not be 
far wrong. A better way, however, is to take as a basis 
only those examples that contain the modifying words which 
appeared to have no influence either way on the case, thus 
eliminating as far as possible the disturbing factors. By 
limiting the material in this way we are hampered, as some 
words must necessarily be omitted because no examples can 
be cited with any of those modifying words, or if inserted 
they will be only conjectural; and in addition the numbers 
are in many cases so small that the result will have to be 
taken as an indication of a tendency in one direction or the 
other. Thus forming a new list having for a basis the 
examples that have as one of their constituent parts a 
demonstrative pronoun, αὐτός “‘same,’’ ἐπιών or ἐπιγιγνόμενος, 
we have: 


MME ΠΑΝ Rs oo). Ws siete side Ἢ ᾿ pr 
τ OEE SORE GE CAA EOL AL 8 5 
BEDE isp halk Gh Ὁ ἢ ἀὐλήνν δον ἀκῷ CAA Ont I 5 
BOGUS ose wap ate lbcgioiainntetalomn’ 5 
COPS See Vika cede Rane an I 
DEANE, ince FL a hd ewe ROE RRS 40 I 
χε νον. pian oe Pa ard he hee 31 I 
WHOIS ἐῶν sare ne hile Mula gemeea te 2 I 


This new table gives the following. 

I. The nouns with which the genitive is the prevailing 
case are νύξ, ἔαρ, θέρος, χειμών, χρόνος (3). 

ΤΙ. tod nouns with which the dative is the prevailing case 
are ἡμέρα “day,” ἔτος, ἐνιαυτός. 

Comparing these two classes with the first two, which 
made no distinction between the modified and unmodified 
forms, they coincide with the exception of χρόνος. But the 
two instances of it in the genitive are τοῦ αὐτοῦ χρόνου from 


—I4— 


Hdt. II 47, V 36, whose case construction for this word 
and that for “day” does not correspond with that of Thucy- 
dides and Xenophon, as will hereafter be seen; and it might 
also be added that the other five of the seven cases in which 
it is found in the genitive modified according to the first 
table are with a word of measure, while the nine in the 
dative modified are all with a word of demonstrative charac- 
ter. Since these last two classes formed under less favora- 
ble circumstances agree so closely with the first two formed 
under the most favorable, we might be justified in supposing 
that the additional words of the first two, omitted in the 
second two on account of a lack of material, belong in the 
same classes in the second grouping. But taking simply 
those of the second and placing them alongside the result 
of the first primary classification according to the presence 
or absence of modifiers, it will be observed that they too 
essentially coincide, if we except χρόνος which differs in its 
constructions from the concrete words of time. That is, the 
words of time that may be used unmodified incline toward 
the use of the genitive rather than the dative, whether a 
modifying word be present or not; but those that call for 
some definitive modifier seem to prefer the dative to the 
genitive case. The explanation of this tendency toward the 
genitive in words denoting the time of day and season of 
the year can be made more satisfactorily in a study of the 
genitive temporal construction. But as for the fact that 
words for day (twenty-four hours), month and year are 
employed more often in the dative there need be no wonder, 
as they are the words most often used in giving a precise 
date and so would naturally fall in that case which had 
been adapted to that purpose. 

The first two primary classifications, of which the results 
have been given, are to be taken as only introductory to 
the main problem, that of discovering the factors that deter- 
mine the meaning of the case construction of the words 
denoting time. They form a more or less satisfactory basis 
varying with the words that are being dealt with, and must 


—I5— 


themselves be used as secondary classifications subordinate 
to the third primary classification. This is also of a formal 
nature and takes for its peculiar characteristic of division 
what might be hit upon first, namely, the inflectional ending. 
Indeed it could be used as the first and only one and all that 
has been gained so far could be drawn from it with the help 
of its subdivisions, though this would have made it some- 
what more complicated. And seeing that classifications are 
simply a means to an end, it was simpler and easier to make 
several than to make one, from which everything would have 
to be deduced by various combinations. The end of this 
classification is to determine the answer of the main ques- 
tion, to localize as far as possible the deciding factors of the 
meaning of the case construction of the nouns of time. 
In addition it will serve as an index of the various words 
and phrases. This classification must gather together all 
instances of each of the three oblique cases, which must 
severally be arranged according to the meanings of the 
words; and then in turn according to the presence or 
absence of modifiers. Those with modifiers will fall into 
groups marked by the meaning of the different modifiers, 
which in their turn, as the discussion proceeds, will form 
the basis of further classification. 


GENITIVE. 
ἡμέρα" 
Singular 
ἡμέρας, Hdt. Il 133, V 23, VII 166, VIII 71; Thuc. V 
59 1,, VIL. 43 2; ΑΚ δ Tl t ΟΣ ΕΣ 28, Hell. 
VII 5 19. 


*It has not been thought necessary to preserve in this index or 
classification the distinction between ἡμέρα ‘‘ day’’ and ‘‘daytime,’’ 
because the only conditions under which the latter meaning has an 
influence on the meaning of the case construction are when it is 
used in the genitive singular unmodified or with the article, which 
fact may be easily kept in mind—And also both in the case of this 
word and the following words if they are found in both the Attic 
form and Ionic or epic, the former is given, if in the latter only, then 
that particular form is given. 


cnet Chee 


τῆς ἡμέρας, Hdt. II 95, VII 12, VIII 78; Thuc. IV 23 2, 
VII 73 3; An. III 3 11, VII 4 14. 

τῆς ἡμέρας ταύτης, Hdt. VIII 7, Thuc. VII 40 2. 

τῆς αὑτῆς ἡμέρης, Hdt. VII 166, IX go, τοι. 

τῆς αὐτῆς ταύτης ἡμέρης, Hdt. V 77. 

τῆς ἐπιούσης ἡμέρης, Hdt. III 85. 

ἑκάστης ἡμέρης, Hdt. I 192, II 37, III 90, ΙΝ 98, V τῇ, 
VII 120; An. VI 61, Hell. I 1 30, VII 2 23. 

Plural 

Cardinal numeral ἡμερῶν, Hdt. I] 115, VI 58; Thuc. 
II 97 2, IV 105 2, VII 31; An. I 7 18, IV 7 20. 

ὀλίγων ἡμερῶν, Thuc. IV 26 4, Hell. VII 5 18. 

νύξ 
Singular 

νυκτός, Od. 13 278; Hdt. II 1210, 133, 141, 150, 171, 
IV 36, 140, 146, 158, 201, V 23, 121, VI το, τό, 45, 
103, Viliaz, το Vill o7, 9x, TX ros Thuc. 1 48:1, 
IT 83 3, 93 4, LI 30 3, 106 3, IV 26 6, 31 1, 42 4, 70 
2, IIO I, 120 2, 131 3, 135 1, V 115 4, VII 4 2, VIII 
41 3; An. III 1 40, 3 5, 4 35, 4 36, 4 37, IV 415, 6 
τὰ Vii 2.48) 33, 4/29, Vil ἃ δὰ, 4. 441. 9373 Σ18}1.Ζ 
ταῦ, αν 7408 BOC TT ws 1V is oF, V2 δὲ, 4. ἢ; 
Wl 2 03,°5 25; Vil 2 18,457, 4.87, 8 10. 

τῆς νυκτός, Hdt. VIII 76, 107; Thuc. I 541, I1 51, 5 2, 
LIT δι ΤΥ 23 2, κα 673, 2333, V δ. Vil ge 
2.9% ἃ, γ 3, 80.1, 01 2,844, $5 2; An. [1 2 7, 626, 
417, II] 4 34, 1V 2 14, 4 8, 6 3, 7 27, V7 14, VI1 
1, 3 6; 3.25, Vil τῇ, 46, 89; Hell. 16 28, Tf 4:3, 
4 5, 4 10, IV 5 3, ὃ 30, 8 35, V1 Io, 1 19, 4 21, VI 
4 25,5 17; VII 2 5, 2 23, 4 13, 4 32. 

ταύτης τῆς νυκτός, Thuc. [VI 97 1], An. III 3 20. 

ἐκείνης τῆς νυκτός, Hell. II 2 3. 

τῆς αὐτῆς ταύτης νυκτός, Thuc. VIII 102 1. 

τῆς ἐπιούσης νυκτός, Thuc. IV 130 1, Hell. I 1 13, 2 4. 

τῆς παροιχομένης νυκτός, Hdt. III 86, VI 107. 

ἑκάστης νυκτός, Hdt. II 37. 

πολλῆς νυκτός, Thuc. VIII τοὶ 3. 


—17— 
μήν 
Singular 
μηνὸς Tod αὐτοῦ, Hdt. IX τοι. 
τρίτου μηνός, Hdt. IV 180. 
τοῦ φθίνοντος μηνός, Od. 14 162, το 307. 
τοῦ ἱσταμένοιο (μηνός), Od. 14 162, το 307. 
μηνὸς ἑκάστου, Hdt. II 77. 
Plural 
Cardinal numeral μηνῶν, Thuc. VI 21 2. 
ἔτος 
Singular 
τούτου Tov ἔτεος, Hdt. VI 42. 
τοῦ προτέρου ἔτεος, Hdt. II 93. 
τοῦ ἐπιόντος ἔτεος, Hell. I 3 1. 
τοῦ ἐχομένου ἔτεος, Thuc. VI 3 2. 
ἑκάστου ἔτεος, Hdt. I 67, 183, I] 177, 111 84, ΙΝ 62, 105, 
V 825. δ. An: V3\ 13) 
Tov ἔτεος ἑκάστου, Hdt. I 196. 
Plural 
Cardinal numeral ἐτῶν, Hdt. IV 151, ΙΧ 26; Hell. V 
4 56. | 
ὀλίγων ἐτῶν, Thuc. V 14 3. 
τῶν προτέρων ἐτέων, 1]. 11 691. 
ἐνιαυτός 
τοῦ ἐνιαυτοῦ, Edt. II 59, ΙΧ ττο. 
τοῦ ἐνιαυτοῦ ἑκάστου, Hdt. IV 66. 
λυκάβας 
τοῦδ᾽ αὐτοῦ λυκάβαντος, Od. 14 161, 19 306. 
ἔαρ 
τοῦ ἦρος, Thuc. VII 50 τ. 
τοῦ αὐτοῦ ἦρος, Thuc. VI 95 1. 
θέρος 
θέρους, Od. 7 118; Hdt. IV 28 (2), 184; Thuc. III 88 1, 
VII 28 2. 
τοῦ θέρεος, Hdt. II 25 (2), II] 117, IV 31, 50 (2). 
τοῦ θέρους τούτου, Thuc. V 49 1. 
τοῦ αὐτοῦ θέρους, Thuc. II 28 1, 58 1, 66 1, 79 1, 801, 
ΠῚ 90 1, 91 1, 94 1, 100 1, ΙΝ 42 1, 58 1, 66 τ, 75 1, 
2 


ρον ἥδ. 


133 2, V 331, 341, 351, 52 2, 53 1, VI 961, VIII 
22.5, 24 2) B74. 
τοῦ ἐπιόντος θέρους, Hell. III 2 30. 
τοῦ ἐπιγιγνομένου θέρους, Thuc. II 71 1, II] 1 1, 26 1, 891, 
LV ΕΑ ey ΣΎ x 2, 40 2, δον Oar, VIS x, 
94 τ, ΝΠΙ 91, 61 1. 
ὀπώρα 
ὀπώρης, Il. .22 27. 
χειμών 
χείματος, Od. 7 118. 
χειμῶνος, Hdt. IV 28 (2), 184; Thuc. I 30 4, VII 28 2. 
τοῦ χειμῶνος, Hdt. IV 31, 50 (3); Thuc. VII 19 5, 31 3; 
Hell. I 2 17. 
τοῦ αὑτοῦ χειμῶνος, Thuc. II 70 1, 102 1, III 201, 88 1, 
104 ἃ, 105 3,125 1, ΝΟΣ, 202 7, 109 1; 3395.4, V 
B24, Viste, ὦ VET sock, ἂν ἢ; 
τοῦ ἐπιγιγνομένου χειμῶνος, Thuc. II 33 1, 69 1, III 87 1, 
τοῦ αὐ 1V 50.1, V 13 11,°36:1, 51.1, ό 95 αν 2262. 
VI 63 1, VII 101, VIII 2 1, 291. 


Hos 

ἠοῦς, Il. 8 470, 525. 
μεσημβρία 

μεσαμβρίης, Hdt. III 104. 
δείλη 

δείλης, An. IIT 3 11. 

τῆς δείλης, An. VII 2 τό, 3 το. 
ἑσπέρα 

ἑσπέρας, Hell. 161, IV 1 6. 
ὄρθρος 


ὄρθρου, Hell. IV 5 18. 
τοῦ ὄρθρου, Hell. V 4 28. 

χρόνος 
τοῦ αὐτοῦ χρόνου, Hdt. II 47, V 36. 
πολλοῦ χρόνου, Thuc. I 3 2, An. Ig 25. 

- ὀλίγου χρόνου, Hdt. III 134. 

τοῦ λοιποῦ χρόνου, Thuc. VIII 2g 1. 
χρόνου τοσούτου, Hdt. II 128. 


-τττῷ-- 


DATIVE. 
ἡμέρα 

ταύτῃ τῇ ἡμέρᾳ, Thuc. ΓΝ 78 5, 106 3, 129 5, VII 521, 
78 4; An. 17 14, 7 17, II 4 18, VI 4 25, VII 8 6; 
Hell, Lil 2 10,°8'33,¥. 4s: 

ἤματι τῷδε, Il. 11 444, 15 252, 21 584, Od. 20 116. 

τῇδε TH ἡμέρᾳ, Thuc. V 9 9, An. III 2 31, Hell. V 2 26. 

ἤματι τῳ, Il. 2 351, 743, 3 189, 5 210, 6 345, 8 475, 9 
253, 439, τι 766, 13 335, 14 250, 15 76, 17 401, 18 
85, 19 60, 89, 98, 21 77, 22 359, 471, 23 87; Od. 5 
309, 20 19, 23 252. 

ἤματι κείνῳ, 1]. 2 37, 482, 4 543, 18 324, 21 517. 

ἐκείνῃ TH ἡμέρᾳ, Thuc. I 20 2, VIII 69 2; An. IV 7 8; 
Hell. IV 8 36, VII 4 30, 5 21. 

ἤματι τῷ αὐτῷ, Od. 7 326. 

τῇ αὐτῇ ἡμέρᾳ, Thuc. I 29 5, 100 1, VII 3 5, 82 3, VIII 
23.23; An. 15 x2; Hell. 1627, IV 420. 

(rj) ordinal numeral ἡμέρᾳ (ἤματι), 1]. 1 54, 425, 9 363, 
II 707, 21 46, 24 612, 665, 666, 667; Od. 5 34, 263, 
6 170, 9 83, 10 29, 81, 14 252, 19 202, 24 65; Hat. I 
I, 30, 47, 82, II] 14, 42, 52, 129, 157, IV 75, V 72, 
VI τοι, 106, VII 31, 168, 191, 192 (2), 210, VIII 15, 
54, 55, IX 33, 84, 86, 87; Thuc. III 96 2 (3), 107 3, 
IV 25 8, 119 1, V 19.1, VI 23. 2, VIL 42) δ, 3; 
108 2, II 19 1, III 761, IV go 3, 101 1, VI 8 3, VII 
75 1, VIII 24.1, 107 1; An. I 7 18, 7 20, ΤΕ 3:25, HI 
4 31, 437 (2), IV 7 21, 81, 8 21, VI 2 12, VII 1 40; 
Hell. I 2 7, 6 20, IIT 1 19: (a), qian, EV 8 ΟΝ αν ὃ 
6, VI τ τῇ, 5 15, 5 20, 5 30. 

τῇ ἄλλῃ (ἡμέρᾳ), An. IL 1 3, IIL 4 1, VI 1 15; Hell. Ix 
$2, 

τῇ ὑστεραίᾳ, Hdt. I 77, 126, 133, II 141, IV 113, VII 54, 
110, 212, VIII 22, 25, IX 8, 15, 92; An. I 2 21,7 109, 
Il 2:18 (2), 5 27, 11 4 88, 4 37, 1V 2.24; ὁ 16 80; 
8 21, V 228, 4 11, 4.22,°6 1, VIF 14,2 2, 4:10, 4 20, 
VII rt 37, 1 40, 213, 41, 4 21, 6 7,755, 8 5, 8 20; 


LES BRA Ry “ 
far THE 
UNIVERSITY 
vo ν 







ee , ΕὐΔᾺ 


Hell. Τὺ. ται Σ᾽ ἃ, δος, ΤΙ 5 τὸ, ἃ, ἃ 22, 4.3, 
49, 423, 431, II] 117, 2 19, 415, 5 21, 5 22, 1V3 
9,49, 5 8,5 10,68, 7 5, V 4 18, 4 29, 4 49, 4 54, 
Vii 17, 2 31, 3 19, 4 16, 5 15,5 16, 5 18, 5 27; vil 
¥/20,4;920 ἃ 307 Phuc. \I ise) 1, TE 22.0. 7824, TIE 36 
4, 73 1, 109 1, 113 1, IV 13 3, 25 8, 31 1, 38 4, 45 2, 
71 1, 97 5, 991, τοῖ 1, VII 3 4, 35 2, 38 2, 39 1, 45 
i eos, 98. 4;'78'6, 79 5,83 1, VEIT χὰ 23 2).28 2, 
35 45°79 $ 93. 4- 

τῇ TeAevtain, Hdt. IT 87. 

τῇ προτεραίᾳ (ἡμέρᾳ), Hdt. I 84, 126, I1 63, VII 212, IX 
9° μο, ἄγ; And) @53,:0 4 226 Beha a6: 

τῇ ὑστάτῃ, Hdt. If 151. 

τῇ προτέρᾳ, Od. 16 50; Thuc. VII 51 2. 

τῇ ἐπιούσῃ ἡμέρᾳ, An. IV 5 30. 

τῇ ἐπιγιγνομένῃ ἡμέρᾳ, Thuc. III 75 1, 1V 130 2, VI 97 1. 

τῇ αὔριον, An. VI 4 15. 

τῇ πρόσθεν ἡμέρᾳ, An. II 3 τ. 

τῇ ἐπὶ ταύτῃσι (ἡμέρῃ), Hdt. VI 12. 

ἡμέρᾳ ἣ, Hell. 1 4 12. 


᾿ ἡ ἡμέρᾳ, Hell. IT 1 30. 


εὐφρ 


ἤματι χειμερίῳ (ὀπωρινῷ), 1]. 12 279, 16 385. 
ἰῷ ἤματι, Il. 6 422. 
μιῇ ἡμέρῃ, Hdt. Il 42, V 92η. 


νυκτί, Hdt. VII 12. 

ταύτῃ τῇ νυκτί, Hell. IV 5 4. 

τῇδε νυκτί, Od. 20 88. 

ἐκείνῃ TH νυκτί, Thuc. IV 103 4. 

Ordinal numeral νυκτί, Od. 7 253, 12 447, 14, 314; Hdt. 
IV 172. 

τῇ ἐπιούσῃ νυκτί, Thuc. VII 6 4, Hell. II τ 22. 

μιᾷ νυκτί, Thuc. VI 27 1. 


τρίτῃ εὐφρόνῃ, Hdt. IX 37. 


ἔτος 


Ordinal numeral μηνί, Hdt. III 68, 153, V 115; Thue. 
107: 3. Tb πα τὸ Wier 64. 92 Hell. 0 gat; bia 39, Ee 
ἜΣ Κ᾽ δὲ 


τούτῳ τῷ ἔτει, Hell. V 2 2. 

ἐκείνῳ τῷ ἔτει, Hell. ΓΝ 5 2. 

(τῷ) ordinal numeral ἔτει, Il. 2 329; Od. 3 306, 4 82, 5 
107,14 241, τό 206, 19 484, 21 208, 23 102, 170, 24 
322; Hdt. I 19, 74, 108, II 111, 133, III 59, 131 (4), 
IV 14, 42, 95, 158, V 42, 89, VI 18, 31, 40 (2), 46, 
VII 1, 7, 20, 80; Thuc. I 12 3 (2), 18 2, τὸξ 3, 103 
2, 1152, If 2 τ ὙΠ 68 5.1162, TV 102 ¢, V τό 3, 
VI 3 3, 43, 59 4, VII 28 3, VIII 58 1, 68 4; Hell. 
II 3 9. 

τῷ ἄλλῳ ἔτει, Hell. 1 2 1. 

τῷ ἐπιόντι ἔτει, Hell. 1 6 1, IL 1 10, 3 1. 

τῷ ὑστέρῳ ἔτει, Hdt. VII 4, Hell. VII 1 1, 2 10. 

τῷ πρόσθεν ἔτει, Hell. Κ 24. 

τῷ προτέρῳ ἔτεϊ, Hdt. III 47, VI 95 (2). 


9 , 
€VLAUTOS 


θέρος 


τούτῳ τῷ ἐνιαυτῷ, Hell. [II τ 8]. 
Ordinal numeral ἐνιαυτῷ, Il. 12 15; Od. 2 175, 3 391, 
£618,179 227; 


περιιόντι τῷ ἐνιαυτῷ, Hell. 2 25. 


θέρεϊ, 11. 22 151. 
τῷ αὑτῷ θέρει τούτῳ, Thuc. II 27 1. 
περιιόντι τῷ θέρει, Thuc. I 30 3. 


χειμών 


>? 
ἠώς 


χειμῶνι, Il. 21 283. 


ἠοῖ τῇ προτέρῃ, 11. 13 794. 


ε , 
εσπέερα 


@pa 


τῇ πρώτῃ ἑσπέρᾳ, Hell. IV 7 4. 


épy, 11. 2 468, Od. 5 485, 9 51. 


ae ΡΕΙΝ 
χρόνος 
τῷ αὐτῷ χρόνῳ, Hell. I 2 18. 
τῷ πρώτῳ χρόνῳ, Hell. II 3 15. 
ὑστέρῳ χρόνῳ, Hdt. I 130, III 149, IV 166, V 32, VI 66; 
Hell. II 4 43. 
ἡμίσει χρόνῳ, An. I 8 22. 


ACCUSATIVE. 
ἡμέρα 
Singular 

ἦμαρ, Il. 5 490, 22 432, 24 73, Od. 2 345, 10 28, 80. 

ἡμέραν, An. VI 1 14, VII 6 9, Hell. V 4 58; Thuc. I 
s3y 2, 1V ττὰ . VIF 77°63 An. Ta) or, 

τὴν ἡμέραν, Thuc. II 81 8, III 88 3, VII 28 2; An. V 8 
24, Hell. 1 6 20, VII 4 13. 

ταύτην τὴν ἡμέραν, Hat. III 53, 79, V 112, VII 54, 55, 
181, VIII 25, 86, 107, IX 92; Thuc. III 91 5, IV 
13 1, 38 4, 90 3, V 54 3, 65 5, VII 73 2, VIII 103 1; 
An. Il xa Atle χὰ 26, 1V's 14,3 4,4 $04 22, 
Ae ble ee 3. 

ἐκείνην τὴν ἡμέραν, Hdt. VIII 9, An. II τ 6. 

(τὴν) ordinal numeral ἡμέραν, Thuc. IV 90 3; An. IV 5 
24, Hell. II 4 13. 

τὴν προτέρην ἡμέρην, Hdt. 1 126. 

τὴν ἐπιοῦσαν ἡμέραν, Thuc. VII γ4 τ, An. III 4 18, Hell. 
IV 6 6, V 43. 

τὴν ὑστεραίαν, An. III 5 13. 

τὴν παρεοῦσαν (ἡμέρην), Hdt. I 126. 

τὴν τήμερον ἡμέραν, An. IV 6 9. 

τὴν ἐπὶ τῇ νυκτὶ--- ἡμέραν, Hell. IV 4 9. 

μίαν ἡμέραν, Hdt. I 164, Thuc. IV 31 1, 115 1, VI 7 2, 
VIII 28 1; An. VI 6 38, Hell. V x 14. 

τὴν ἄλλην ἡμέραν, Hell. IV 3 22. 

πρόπαν ἦμαρ, Il. τ 601, 19 162, 24 713, Od. 9 161, 556, 
10 183, 476, 12 29, 19 424, 24 41. 

πᾶν ἦμαρ, 1]. τ 592, 18 453. 

τὴν ἡμέραν ἅπασαν, Thuc. IV 130 1. 


—23— 


κείνην τὴν ἡμέρην πᾶσαν, Hdt. IX 52. 

τὴν ἑτέρην (ἡμέρην) πᾶσαν, Hdt. I 94. 

πᾶσαν ἡμέρην, Hdt. I 111, VII 203. 

ὅλην THY ἡμέραν, Thuc. VII 38 3, An. IV 1 το, Hell. VI 4 
36. 

ταύτην τὴν ἡμέραν ὅλην, Thuc. IV 69 2. 

THY ἐπιοῦσαν ἡμέραν ὅλην, An. IV 5 7. 

Plural 

npara, 1]. 18 340, 23 186, 24 745, Od. 5 156, 10 11, 16 
365, 19 513, 20 84. 

τὰς ἡμέρας, Hdt. III 18, IX 37, 93; An. V 8 24, VII 2 
$1. 

ταύτας Tas ἡμέρας, Hdt. VI 58. 

τὰς αὐτὰς ταύτας ἡμέρας, Hdt. VIII 15. 

Cardinal numeral (ἤματα) ἡμέρας, I]. 6 217, 21 45; Od. 
4 360, 5 278, 388, 7 267, 9 74, 10 142, 17 515, 19 199, 
24 63; Hdt. I 86, II 29, 77, 88, 1V 73, 89, 133, V 8, 
72, VI 135, VII 191, VIII 66, IX 40; Thuc. II 57 2, 
75 3, III 81 4, 107 3, IV 6 2, 54 4, 124 4, VII 50 5, 
87 3, VIII 31 4, 44 4, 99 1, 103 2; An. 126, 29, 2 
10, 2.12, 2 14,.2:19, 2.20,\3 3, :4°1,.4:0, 4 33; 490;'5 
4, 11317, 5 1, II] 4 31, IV 3 2, 7 18, 8 22, V 3 3, 5 
ἄν δ ΝΕ. τῇ, 2:3, 6 38% Hell. Tin ab. 9 206 6) 1s 
24, Ti) 4 a1, στ 14, VE 5) δ, τς. 32; 

τὰς ἄλλας (ἡμέρας), Thuc. IV 39 2. 

πολλὰς ἡμέρας, Thuc. II 47 3, Hell. VII τ 22. 

ἡμέρας συχνάς, Hdt. VII 131. 

ὀλίγας ἡμέρας, Hdt. IV 105, V 65, VI 102, VII 173, VIII 
113; Thuc. VIII 71 3, Hell. I 4 23. 

ἤματα πάντα, 1]. 8 539, 12 133, 13 826, 14 235, 269, 276, 
16 499, 19 226, 23 594, 24 491; Od. 2 55, 205, 4 209, 
592, 5 136, 210, 219, 6 46, 281, 7 94, 257, ὃ 431, 468, 
9 123, 10 467, 15 54, 17 534, 21 156, 23 6, 336, 24 25. 

πάσας (ἡμέρας), An. IV 3 2. 

τριάκοντα Tas πάσας ἡμέρας, Thuc. II τοι 6. 

ὅσασπερ (ἡμέρας), An. IV 3 2. 

ἡμέρας ὅσαι, Thuc. VII 51 2. 

ἡμέρας πλείους, An. II 4 1. 


—24— 


twas ἡμέρας, Thuc. III 52 3, Hell. VI 5 49. 

ἡμέρας ἐν ats, Thuc. II 73 1. 

τὰς προκειμένας ἡμέρας, Hdt. II 87, IV 133. 

Tas πρὸ Tod ἡμέρας, Hdt. VII 168. 

νύξ 
Singular 

νύκτα, Il. το 188, 312, 399, 18 274; Od. 3 151, 490, 5 
466, τό 367, 22 195; Hdt. I 181, VII 42, 119, IX 15; 
Thuc. I 137 2, VII 776; An. VI 114, VII 6 9, Hell. 
V 458. 

τὴν νύκτα, 1]. το 497; Hdt. II 95; Thuc. III 74 3, 88 3, 
IV 45 1, 68 5, 103 1, VII 28 2, 29 3, 741; An. IV 
24,26, 55. νι 8:24, Viig an, is t, Hell Vil '2.70: 

ταύτην τὴν νύκτα, An. I 10 19, III 1 3, [V1 11, 3 8, 5 29, 
Hell. [V5 3. 

ἐκείνην τὴν νύκτα, Hell. V 4 3. 

τὴν ἐπιοῦσαν νύκτα, Thuc. IV 38 4. 

τὴν πρόσθεν νύκτα, An. IV 3 7. 

μίαν νύκτα, An. VI 6 38, Thuc. VI 61 2. 

πᾶσαν τὴν νύκτα, Hdt. VII 217. 

νύκτα ἑκάστην, Hdt. II 130. 

Plural 

νύκτας, Il. 5 490, 9 470, 18 340, 22 432, 23 186, 24 73, 
745; Od. 2 105, 345, 5 154, 10 11, 28, 80, 15 476, 19 
150, 340, 20 85, 24 140. 

τὰς νύκτας, Hdt. I 182, 186 (2), II 44, III 18, IV 128, 
VII 125, IX 37, 93; Thuc. III 21 4; An. V 8 24, 
MII 2 22. 

Cardinal numeral νύκτας, Od. 5 388, 9 74, 10 142, 17 
515, 24 63; Thuc. II 75 3. 

πολλὰς νύκτας, Il. 9 325, Od. το 341. 


εὐφρόνη 
ταύτην τὴν εὐφρόνην, Hdt. VII 188. 
μήν 
Singular 


μῆνα, Od. 14 244. 
ἕνα μῆνα, 1]. 2 292. 
μῆνα πάντα, Od. 10 14, 12 325. 


---25--- 


Plural 
Cardinal numeral μῆνας, Il. 5 387, Od. 17 408; Hdt. I 
192 (2), II 68, 149 (2), III 14, 67, IV 28 (3), V 34; 
Thuc. I τοῦ 4, II 2 1, 65 6, V 60 1; Hell. I 5 21, II 


2 16. 
ἔτος 


Plural 
Cardinal numeral ἔτη, Hdt. I 7, 14, τό, 18 (3), 25, 29 
(2), 86, 91, 102 (2), 119, 163, 214, II 13, 30, 111, 
127 (2), 133, 139, 140, 157, 159, III το, 50, ΓΝ 1, 157, 
158, 159, V 8g (2), VII 148, 154, 155; Thuc. I 110 
1, II 2 1 (2), 65 6, 65 12, III 87 2, 114 3, V 18 3, 23 
I, 26 4, 26 5, 41 2, 47 1, 47 3, 79 1, 112 2, VI 25, 4 
9; πὸ 4) ΤΟΙ͂Ν Th a 31... ὦ. 
τὰ πάντα Cardinal numeral ἔτεα, Hdt. I 163, III 66, VII 4. 
ταῦτα τὰ δέκα ἔτη, Thuc. V 24 2. 
τὰ δέκα ἔτη, Thuc. I 11 1. 
πολλὰ ἔτη, Thuc. I 24 4, Hell. VII x 6, 1 το. 
ὀλίγα ἔτεα, III 22. 
τοσαῦτα ἔτη, Il. 2 328, Hdt. III 22, Thuc. VI 10 5. 
ἐνιαυτός 
Singular 
ἐνιαυτόν, Od. τ 288, 2 219; Hdt. I] 168, III 24, V 116, 
VI 128, ΙΧ 93; Thuc. I 109 4, 137 4, ΕΝ 118 10, 118 
12, VII 28 3, 48 5; An. II 6 29, Hell. III 3 4, VI 4 
34. 
τὸν ἐνιαυτόν, Thuc. IV 118 14. 
τοῦτον Tov ἐνιαυτόν, Hdt. I 67. 
τὸν ὕστερον (ἐνιαυτόν), Thuc. I 31 1. 
τὸν ἐπιόντα ἐνιαυτόν, Hell. III 2 6. 
τὸν ἐνιαυτὸν πάντα, Thuc. I 31 1. 
ἐνιαυτὸν ἅπαντα, Od. 15 455. 
ἐνιαυτόν twa, Thuc. III 68 3. 
Plural 
πέντε περιπλομένους ἐνιαυτούς, 1]. 23 833. 
θέρος 
τὸ θέρος, Hdt. II 25, IV 23, 28, 5ο, 172; Hell. V 2 43. 
τὸ θέρος τοῦτο, Thuc. I 30 4, V 35 8. 


vn? , wees 


τὸ θέρος τοῦτο πᾶν, Thuc. V 35 2. 
τὸ ἐπιὸν θέρος, Thuc. VIII 2 2. 
τὸ λουπὸν θέρος, Hell. III 2 30, V 4 58. 
χειμών 
τὸν χειμῶνα, Hdt. II 25, II] 117, ΓΝ 23; Thuc. VI 88 5; 
Hell. 141, IV 8 7. 
τὸν δεινὸν χειμῶνα, An. VII 6 9. 
τὸν χειμῶνα τοῦτον, Thuc. V 17 2, 56 4. 
τὸν ἐπιόντα χειμῶνα, Hell. III 2 30. 
τὸν χειμῶνα ἅπαντα, Hdt. II το. 


ἠῶ, Od. 2 434. 
ὄρθρος 
τὸν ὄρθρον, Hdt. IV 181. 
wpa. 
ὥρην καλλίστην, Hdt. VII so. 
: τὴν χειμερινὴν ὥρην, Hdt. 11 24. 
χρόνος 
Singular 
χρόνον, Od. 4.599; Hdt. 1175, VI 129, VII 223, IX 49. 
τὸν χρόνον τοῦτον, Hdt. I 1, 29, 59, 65, 68, 73, 75, 77, 79» 
191, II 25, 52, 128, III 57, 104, 148, IV 135, 144, 
152, 162, 163, V 30, 44, 58, 83, VI 51, 86a, 89, 127 
(2), 137, VII 59, 208, VIII 65, IX 7, 37; Thuc. VIII 
76 τ. 
τὸν χρόνον ἐκεῖνον, Hdt. I 183. 
τὸν αὐτὸν τοῦτον χρόνον, Hdt. IV 145, 147, VI 22, 27, 
VII 151. 
τὸν πρῶτον χρόνον, Thuc. VIII 97 2. 
τὸν παρελθόντα χρόνον, Hell. VI 3 17. 
τὸν πρότερον χρόνον, Hdt. V 41. 
τὸν πρόσθεν χρόνον, Hell. V. 1 1, VII 4 30. 
τὸν ἔμπροσθεν χρόνον, An. VI 1 18. 
τὸν νῦν χρόνον, An. VI 6 13. 
τὸν ἔπειτα χρόνον, Thuc. IV 45 2. 
Tov ἀπὸ τούτου χρόνον, Hdt. V 86. 
τὸν εἰρημένον χρόνον, Hdt. II 125. 
τὸν ἄλλον χρόνον, Thuc. III 68 1, VII 27, 4; Hell. ΠῚ 4 


12. 


—27— 


πολὺν χρόνον, Il. 2 343, 3 157, 129; Od. 2 115, 4543, 594, 
675, 5 319, 11 161, 15 68, 545, 16 267, 21 70, 24 218; 
Hdt. I 199, III 57, 124, IV 1, 201, V τό, 48, 28, 106, 
VIII 688, 114, 142; Thuc. I 86 4, II 19 2, IV 35 4, 
44%; Vil 3445598 73 Amel 39,1] ὁ 4a: Helis 
35, 3 6, 6 33, V 2 4. 

συχνὸν χρόνον, Hdt. IX 102, An. V 8 14. 

πλέονα χρόνον, Hdt. III 124, 1V 114, 152, ΙΧ 111; Thuc. 
V 47 6, VII 28 3. 

(as, ὅτι) πλεῖστον χρόνον, Hdt. IV 9; Thuc. II 57 2, IV 
63/1, 74 4; Hell. Il-3 24, V1I3'7; VIE 12. 

ὀλίγον χρόνον, Il. 19 157, 23 418; Hdt. I 132, II 125, VIII 
4; Thuc. I 18 3, II 85 6, g2 1, 102 6, IV 34 1, 54 2, 
VI 41, VIII 95 5; Hell. II 3 41, IV 5 8, V1 8. 

δηρὸν χρόνον, 1]. 14 206, 305. 

πάντα τὸν χρόνον, Thuc. V 54 3, An. V 211. 

τὸν πάντα χρόνον, Hdt. I 85, II 173, III 75, VI 52, 123, 
VIII 100, 140a8, IX 106. 

τὸν πάντα χρόνον Tov ἐπίλοιπον, Hdt. II 13. 

τοσοῦτον χρόνον, Thuc. VII 12 3, An. Ig 11, II 4 26, VII 
4 το, Hell. IV 6 13. 

ὅσον χρόνον, Il. 24 670, Od. 19 169; Hdt. I 21, III 48, 
133, IV 119, 123, 201, V 84, VI 128, VII 73, 94, 
VIII 29, IX 63; Thuc, I 137 4, II 49 6, 57 1, 65.5, 
VII 70 5, VIII 5 3; An. II 4 26, τ 12, VII 4 10, 
Hell, IV 4:15. 

ὁπόσον χρόνον, Hdt. III 22, Thuc. IV 21 3. 

τόσσον χρόνον, Il. 24 670, Od. 19 169, 221. 

τὸν διπλάσιον----χρόνον, Hell. V 3 21. 

οὐδένα χρόνον, Hdt. II 147, VII 13, 56, VIII 71; Thuc. 
II 84 2, III 87 1. 

Χρόνον τινά, Thuc. I 13 6, III 104 2, V5 1, VI 7 1, VII 
40 4; An. III 4 36, Hell. V 25. 

χρόνον ὅσου, Thuc. II 23 3. 

χρόνον ov, Thuc. III τ 2. 

ov χρόνον, Thuc. III 39 8. 

χρόνον εἰς 6 xe, Od. 6 295, 9 138. 


Plural 
τοὺς πρώτους χρόνους, Thuc. VII 87 1. 


ea), ae 


It is a natural supposition that accompanying such a gen- 
eral classification according to case there should be a well de- 
fined and well maintained distinction in function, something 
to which we have become accustomed in our grammars; and 
this is in great part true. But any attempt to draw a hard 
and fast distinction between the meanings of the cases and 
to make a general statement with regard to any one of them, 
which will invariably hold true, involves one in difficulties, 
because not infrequently there will appear a use of a case 
that does not harmonize with the general rule; a strict 
line of demarcation does not exist. Especially does this 
crossing of the case meaning appear in the use of the 
genitive and dative, which at times seem to have the same 
signification. The genitive and accusative here and there 
give a hint that they too may be employed the one for the 
other. And also the function of the accusative and that of 
the dative are not always maintained distinct from one 
another. In the endeavor to demonstrate these points the 
aim will be to cite examples which present as far as possi- 
ble the same conditions. That is, the cases to be compared 
will be of the same noun, will have the same or similar 
modifiers, and will depend upon verbs of the same or simi- 
lar meaning—in a word, the trend of the thought of the 
two or more sentences will be alike as far as possible. Such 
conditions cannot always be complied with; and seldom 
will all of them be observed together, since some attributives 
are not used with certain cases and with certain nouns, and 
so on. 

The first topic is the crossing of the genitive and dative. 
We read in the school grammars that the genitive expresses 
the time within which an action takes place, and the dative, 
the time when, or something to that effect. Do we find 
such a definite distinction in the following? 


Compare 


᾿ ἅθρόαι δὲ γούμεναι αἷ νῆες ἅπασαι ἐν Παρίῳ ἐξ καὶ ὀγδοήκοντα ᾿ τῆς 
ἐπιούσης νυκτὸς ἀνηγάγοντο, καὶ τῇ ἄλλῃ ἡμέρᾳ περὶ ἀρίστου ὥραν ἧκον 


—29— 


εἰς ἸΤροκόνησσον. Hell. 1113. τῇ δ᾽ ὑστεραίᾳ οἱ μὲν ᾿Αθηναῖοι 

΄ 3 Ν Ν , , 4 2 Sw αἰ 
περιπλεύσαντες ἐς τὸ πρὸς Σκιώνης τό τε προάστειον εἷλον καὶ τὴν ἡμέ- 
ραν ἅπασαν ἐδήουν τὴν γῆν οὐδενὸς ἐπεξιόντος . . . , οἱ δὲ τριακόσιοι 
τῶν Σκιωναίων τῆς ἐπιούσης νυκτὸς ἀπεχώρησαν ἐπ᾽ οἴκου. καὶ τῇ 
ἐπιγιγνομένῃ ἡμέρᾳ Νικίας μὲν τῷ ἡμίσει τοῦ στρατοῦ προϊὼν ἅμα ἐς τὰ 

, a ΄ Ν a. 3 7 N, ΄ δὲ ΄, 

μεθόρια τῶν “Σκιωναίων τὴν γῆν ἐδήου, Νικόστρατος δὲ... προσεκάθητο 
τῇ πόλε. Thuc. ΙΝ 130 1-2. Kat τῆς ἐπιούσης νυκτὸς ἐνέβαλον 
εἰς τὴν Λυδίαν ἀκμάζοντος τοῦ oirov. Hell. 124. εἰ τοίνυν τι 
τοιοῦτο ἔχεις σόφισμα, ὥρη μηχανᾶσθαι καὶ μὴ ἀναβάλλεσθαι, ὡς τῆς 
ἐπιούσης ἡμέρης ὃ ἀγὼν ἡμῖν ἐστ. Hdt. III ὃς, τοῖσι δὲ βαρβά- 
ροισι κατηγέετο Ἱππίης 6 Πεισιστράτου ἐς τὸν Μαραθῶνα, τῆς παροιχο- 


μένης νυκτὸς ὄψιν ἰδὼν τοιήνδε. Hdt. VI 107 (cf. Hdt. III 86.) 


with 

καὶ τῇ ἐπιούσῃ νυκτὶ ἔφθασαν παροικοδομήσαντες καὶ παρελθόντες 
τὴν τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων οἰκοδομίαν. Thuc. VII 6 4. Λύσανδρος δὲ τῇ 
ἐπιούσῃ νυκτί, ἐπεὶ ὄρθρος ἦν, ἐσήμηνεν εἰς τὰς ναῦς ἀριστοποιησα- 
μένους εἰσβαίνειν. Hell. Il τ 22. τῇ δ᾽ ἐπιούσῃ ἡμέρᾳ Ἐξενοφῶν 
λαβὼν τὸν κωμάρχην πρὸς Χειρίσοφον ἐπορεύετο. An. IV 5 30. 6 
ὧν δὴ Ὑροιάδης οὗτος 6 Μάρδος ἰδὼν τῇ προτεραίῃ τῶν τινα Λυδῶν 
κατὰ τοῦτο τῆς ἀκροπόλιος καταβάντα ἐπὶ κυνέην ἄνωθεν κατακυλισθεῖ- 
σαν κτλ. Hdt. 1 84. καὶ μετὰ τὸν κατάπλουν τετάρτῳ μηνὶ ἀνήχθη 
ἐπ᾿ "Ανδρον ἀφεστηκυῖαν τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων. Hell. 1.4. 21. ἐνέβαλον 
δὲ καὶ τῷ ὑστέρῳ ἔτει εἰς τὸν Φλειοῦντα οἵ τε ᾿Αργεῖοι καὶ οἱ ᾿Αρκάδες 
ἅπαντες. Hell. VII 2 το. 

What better parallels can be found than those in Hell. I 
113 and Thuc. IV 130 1-2, in which are τῇ ἄλλῃ ἡμέρᾳ 
and τῇ ἐπιγιγνομένῃ ἡμέρᾳ respectively following τῆς ἐπιούσης 
νυκτός almost immediately, in both cases separated by but 
a very few words? Are we to suppose that in using the 
genitive the writer analyzed the thought to the point of 
thinking “in the course of, during, some time within,” but 
when using the dative did not go through this process but 
allowed it to stop with the concept, “when, at which”? This 
does not seem rational inasmuch as there is nothing to 
indicate that his purpose is not the same in both instances, 
namely to date the action. In Thuc. VII 6 4 and Hell. II 1 


22 the same phrase is in the dative which was genitive in 
the two references just mentioned and Hell. I 2 4; and while 
in the case of Hell. II 1 22 it may be objected that the 
ἐπεί clause so changes the conditions that its exactness in 
defining the time produces a desire for the definite dating 
case in the noun, which is probably true, yet certainly the 
Thucydidean example is free from this objection, and a 
comparison shows that one case is as precise in dating as 
the other, because the attributives are the same. That 
Herodotus in III 85 writes τῆς ἐπιούσης ἡμέρης instead of 
the dative, as Xenophon or Thucydides most probably 
would have done, is not surprising, since he is accustomed 
to use this word and others of the same class in the geni- 
tive; instances of this will be cited in the following pages. 
His meaning seems to be “our trial is to-morrow,’ which 
is like that of An. IV 5 30, with which it may be com- 
pared. Of the other examples given there are none corre- 
sponding so closely as those that have been mentioned, but 
a similarity in the verb if not in the phrase may be found 
as ἀνηγάγοντο Hell. I 1 13 and ἀνήχθη Hell. I 4 21, ἐνέβαλον 
Hell. I 2 4 and VII 2 το, ἰδών Hdt. VI 107 and I 84. 


Compare 


ἈΝ ,ὔ a Ν 50 “ Ν > ὃ / o δα 9 
καὶ ταύτης τῆς νυκτὸς σφενδονῆται μὲν εἰς διακοσίους ἐγένοντο, ἵπποι 
δὲ καὶ ἱππεῖς ἐδοκιμάσθησαν τῇ ὑστεραίᾳ εἰς πεντήκοντα. An. III 3 
20. καὶ τῆς αὐτῆς ταύτης νυκτὸς ὡς εἶχον τάχους ὑπομείξαντες τῇ 
σ > 


Χερσονήσῳ παρέπλεον ἐπ᾽ ᾿Ελαιοῦντοςς. Thuc. VIII 102 1. dor 
ἐκείνης τῆς νυκτὸς οὐδεὶς ἐκοιμήθη. Hell. II 2 3. 


with 

καὶ τότε δεξάμενοι αὐτὸν τῇ πόλει Kal ἀποστάντες τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων 
ἐκείνῃ τῇ νυκτὶ κατέστησαν τὸν στρατὸν πρὸ ἕω ἐπὶ THY γέφυραν τοῦ 
ποταμοῦ. Thuc. IV 103 4. φανερὸς δὲ ἐγένετο καὶ ὃ νεὼς τοῦ 
Ποσειδῶνος ταύτῃ τῇ νυκτὶ καόμενος. Hell. ΓΝ 5 4. δεκάτῳ μηνὶ 
éyevov. Hell. II] 3 2. αἰσθόμενος δὲ ὅτι ὃ σῖτος ἐν τῇ πόλει πολὺς 
ἐνείη, εὐετηρίας γενομένης τῷ πρόσθεν era. Hell. V 2 4. δῆλον δὲ 
τοῦτο τῇ ὑστεραίᾳ éyévero. An, II 2 18. 


_ A second time there are present in the same sentence a 
genitive phrase of which νυκτός is the noun and a dative 
phrase in which it is ἡμέρᾳ understood, An. III 3 20. 
In this passage there seems to have been in the mind of the 
writer with respect to the two ideas expressed no feeling of 
difference which would influence one to take the genitive 
and the other the dative—o¢evdovnra ἐγένοντο is virtually the 
same as ἵπποι δὲ καὶ ἱππεῖς ἐδοκιμάσθησαν. ταύτῃ τῇ νυκτί might 
just as well have been used and with the same significa- 
tion. The explanation of the genitive is probably the force 
of attraction exerted by the word, νύξ, which was so com- 
monly employed in the form, νυκτός and τῆς νυκτός. The 
ἐκείνῃ (ταύτῃ) τῇ νυκτί οἵ Thuc. IV 1034 and Hell. IV 5 4 
may fairly be compared with the preceding and the τῆς 
αὐτῆς ταύτης νυκτός οἱ Thuc. VIII 102 1. The next three 
containing the dative, Hell. III 3 2, V 2 4, An. II. 2 18, 
illustrate the use of γίγνομαι with that case, which in An. 
III 3 20 is accompanied by the genitive. 


Compare 

πρὸς δὲ καὶ τάδε λέγουσι, ὡς συνέβη THs αὐτῆς ἡμέρης ἔν τε TH 
Σικελ Τέλωνα καὶ Θήρωνα νικᾶν ᾿Αμίλκαν τὸν Καρχηδόνιον καὶ ἐν 
Σαλαμῖνι τοὺς Ἕλληνας τὸν Πέρσην. Hdt. VIL τ66. τῆς δὲ αὐτῆς 
ἡμέρης τῆς περ ἐν ἸΠλαταιῇσι τὸ τρῶμα ἐγένετο, συνεκύρησε γενέσθαι 
καὶ ἐν Μυκάλῃ τῆς Ιωνίηῆς. Hdt. ΙΧ 90. ὅτι δὲ τῆς αὐτῆς ἡμέρης 
συνέβαινε γίνεσθαι μηνός τε τοῦ αὐτοῦ, χρόνῳ οὐ πολλῷ σφι ὕστερον 
δῆλα ἀναμανθάνουσι ἐγίνετο. Hdt. ΙΧ ror. τῆς δὲ αὐτῆς ταύτης 
ἡμέρης οἱ ᾿Αθηναῖοι διαβάντες ἐς τὴν Εὔβοιαν συμβάλλουσι καὶ τοῖσι 
Χαλκιδεῦσι. Hdt. V 77. ταῦτα βουλευσάμενοι ἀπέπεμπον τῶν νεῶν 
τὰς ταχθείσας, αὐτοὶ οὐκ ἐν νόῳ ἔχοντες ταύτης τῆς ἡμέρης τοῖσι Ἕλλησι 


ἐπιθήσεσθα. Hdt. VIII 7. 


with 
τῇ δὲ αὐτῇ ἡμέρᾳ αὐτοῖς ξυνέβη καὶ τὴν Ἐπίδαμνον τοὺς πολιορκοῦν- 
τας παραστήσασθαι ὁμολογίᾳ ὥστε κτλ. Thuc. I 29 5. ἐγένετο δὲ 
μετὰ ταῦτα καὶ ἡ ἐπ᾽ Εὐρυμέδοντι ποταμῷ πεζομαχία καὶ ναυμαχία ᾿Αθη- 


ναΐων καὶ τῶν ξυμμάχων πρὸς Μήδους, καὶ ἐνίκων τῇ αὐτῇ ἡμέρᾳ ἀμφό- 
τερα ᾿Αθηναῖο. Thuc. 1100 1. καὶ τριήρης τῇ αὐτῇ ἡμέρᾳ ἁλίσ- 
κεται τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων ὑπὸ τῶν Συρακοσίων ἐφορμοῦσα τῷ λιμένι. Thuc. 
ΝΙ 3. 5. Νικίας δὲ καὶ of μετ᾽ αὐτοῦ ἀφικνοῦνται τῇ αὑτῇ ἡμέρᾳ 
ἐπὶ τὸν ποταμὸν τὸν Epweéov. Thuc. VII 82 3. τῇ δ᾽ αὐτῇ ἡμέρᾳ 
ἔτυχον καὶ οἱ ᾿Αθηναῖοι δειπνοποιούμενοι ἐν ταῖς ᾿Αργινούσαις. Hell. 
16 27. wore δόξαν παρεῖχε τοῖς πολεμίοις μὴ ποιήσεσθαι μάχην ἐκείνῃ 
τῇ ἡμέρ. Hell. VII 5 21. 

It has doubtless been noticed that all the examples of the 
genitive just given are from Herodotus. It is a peculiarity 
of his that in every instance of this kind but one, as far 
as I can find, in which he uses a demonstrative or αὐτός, 
the phrase is genitive. This is all the more surprising since 
ἡμέρα is the noun which is so generally in the dative with 
such words in the other sources. A comparison of the 
above genitive and dative phrases does not seem to show 
that Herodotus had a shade of meaning in his use of the 
genitive not found in the dative phrases of Thucydides and 
Xenophon, especially as some of the passages correspond so 
closely in meaning; but rather he illustrates a freer use of 
the cases, perhaps due to a-dialectic difference in idiom, or 
a personal preference for a phrase which for him had 
become almost stereotyped through his habitual employment 
of it. 

In full accord with Herodotus’ use of τῆς αὐτῆς ἡμέρης are 
the two instances of τοῦ αὐτοῦ χρόνου, where the dative is 
expected, and in fact in one the time is more definitely de- 
fined by a dative phrase. The change of case may be due to 
the fact that ὥρῃ was understood, a word apparently ém- 
ployed in the dative rather than in the genitive. These cases 
are: τοῖσι μέν νυν ἄλλοισι θεοῖσι θύειν ὗς οὐ δικαιεῦσι Αἰγύπτιοι, Σελήνῃ 
δὲ καὶ Διονύσῳ μούνοισι τοῦ αὐτοῦ χρόνου, τῇ αὐτῇ πανσελήνῳ, ὗς θύσαν- 
τες πατέονται τῶν κρεῶν. Hdt. I] 47. Ἱστιαῖος μέν νυν ταῦτα διανοεύ- 
μενος ἀπέπεμπε τὸν ἄγγελον, ᾿Αρισταγόρῃ δὲ συνέπιπτε τοῦ αὐτοῦ χρόνου 
πάντα ταῦτα συνελθόντα. Hdt. V 36. 

Instances of this noun without a preposition are so rare 
that it is difficult to find a parallel. The only one that may 


be compared with the above is taken from Xenophon. τῷ 
δ᾽ αὐτῷ χρόνῳ καὶ of Λακεδαιμόνιοι τοὺς εἰς τὸ Κορυφάσιον τῶν Eidd- 
των ἀφεστῶτας ἐκ Μαλέας ὑποσπόνδους ἀφῆκαν. Hell. I 2 18. 


Compare 
[rod δ᾽ ἐπιόντος ἔτους 6 ἐν Φωκαίᾳ νεὼς τῆς ᾿Αθηνᾶς ἐνεπρήσθη. 
Hell. 13 1. Συρακούσας δὲ τοῦ ἐχομένου ἔτους ᾿Αρχίας τῶν Ἧρα- 
κλειδῶν ἐκ Κορίνθου ᾧκισε. Thuc. VI 3 2. 


with 

τῷ δ᾽ ἐπιόντι ἔτει... οἱ Λακεδαιμόνιοι... ἔπεμψαν ἐπὶ τὰς ναῦς 
Καλλικρατίδαν. Hell. 161. τῷ δ᾽ ἐπιόντι ἔτει... ἔδοξε τῷ δήμᾳ 
τριάκοντα ἄνδρας ἑλέσθα. Hell. ΠῚ 5 1. τῷ δ᾽ ἐπιόντι era... 
Λύσανδρος ἀφικόμενος εἰς Ἔφεσον μετεπέμψατο Eredvixov ἐκ Χίου σὺν 
ταῖς ναυσὶ, καὶ τὰς ἄλλας πάσας συνήθροισεν κελ. Hell. II τ το. 

It is not fair to base any inference on the use of the 
first genitive phrase quoted, Hell. I 3 1, because of the 
probable spuriousness of the sentence in which it stands, 
though the following datives appear to express the same rela- 
tion. The second one, Thuc. VI 3 2, is followed in the next 
sentence but one by Θουκλῆς δὲ καὶ of Χαλκιδῆς ἐκ Νάξου ὁρμηθέν- 
τες ἔτει πέμπτῳ μετὰ Συρακούσας οἰκισθείσας Λεοντίνους τε, πολέμῳ 
τοὺς Σικελοὺς ἐξελάσαντες, οἰκίζουσι καὶ μετ᾽ αὐτοὺς Κατάνην, in which 
ἔτει πέμπτῳ Expresses a thought like that of τοῦ ἐχομένου ἔτους. 
It is unaccountable that these two word combinations in 
consecutive sentences with the same verb were conceived 
in the mind of the writer and understood by that of the 
reader in two different meanings. With the latter is an 
ordinal numeral which in a dating phrase usage demanded 
should be with a noun in the dative; with the former is a 
word rather unusual with temporal phrases, and one with 
which neither case had probably associated itself, so that 
the writer had a larger freedom in choosing his construction. 
It is just this kind of juxtaposition, of which other examples 
have been cited, that has been one of the factors in pre- 
venting one meaning from crystallizing about a case. 


3 


Compare the following examples with those of τῷ ἐπιόντι 
ἔτει quoted above. τοῦ δ᾽ ἐπιόντος θέρους πέμψας Θρασυδαῖος εἷς 
Λακεδαίμονα συνεχώρησε Φέας τε τὸ τεῖχος περιελεῖν κτλ. Hell. III 
2 30. τοῦ δ᾽ ἐπιγιγνομένου θέρους οἱ ἸΤελοποννήσιοι καὶ οἱ ξύμμαχοι 
ἐς μὲν τὴν ᾿Αττικὴν οὐκ ἐσέβαλον, ἐστράτευσαν δὲ ἐπὶ Πλάταιαν. 
Thuc. II 71 1. τοῦ δὲ ἐπιγιγνομένου θέρους ai μὲν ἐνιαύσιοι σπονδαὶ 
διελέλυντο μέχρι Πυθίων. Thuc. Ν' τ 1. τοῦ δ᾽ ἐπιγιγνομένου θέρους 
Διῆς τε οἱ ἐν Αθῳ ἀπέστησαν ᾿Αθηναίων πρὸς Χαλκιδέας καὶ Λακεδαι- 
μόνιοι τὰ ἐν ᾿Αχαιΐᾳ οὐκ ἐπιτηδείως πρότερον ἔχοντα καθίσταντο. Thuc. 
V 821. τοῦ δ᾽ ἐπιγιγνομένου χειμῶνος ἣ νόσος τὸ δεύτερον ἐπέπεσε 
τοῖς ᾿Αθηναίοι. Thuc. III 87 1. τοῦ δ᾽ ἐπιγιγνομένου χειμῶνος 
Ἡρακλεώταις τοῖς ἐν Τραχῖνι μάχη ἐγένετο πρὸς Αἰνιᾶνας κκλ. Thuc. 
V 511. τοῦ δ᾽ ἐπιγιγνομένου χειμῶνος Λακεδαιμόνιοι λαθόντες ᾿Αθη- 
ναίους φρούρους τε τριακοσίους καὶ ᾿Αγησιππίδαν ἄρχοντα κατὰ θάλασσαν 
ἐς Ἐπίδαυρον ἐσέπεμψαν. Thuc. V 56 1. τοῦ δ᾽ ἐπιγιγνομένου 
χειμῶνος Λακεδαιμόνιοι ὡς ἤσθοντο τειχιζόντων, ἐστράτευσαν ἐς τὸ 
Apyos. Thuc. V 83 1. 

To the above may be added some illustrations of the 
other dating phrase so common in Thucydides. οἱ δὲ Aaxe- 
δαιμόνιοι καὶ of ξύμμαχοι Tod αὐτοῦ θέρους ἐστράτευσαν ναυσὶν ἑκατὸν 
ἐς Ζάκυνθον τὴν νῆσον. Thuc. 11 66 τ. καὶ ὃ νεὼς τῆς Ἥρας τοῦ 
αὐτοῦ θέρους ἐν ΓΑργει κατεκαύθη Thuc. IV 133 2. καὶ τοῦ αὐτοῦ 
θέρους ... οἱ Λακεδαιμόνιοι ἐψηφίσαντο τοὺς μὲν μετὰ Βρασίδου Εἵλωτας 
μαχεσαμένους ἐλευθέρους εἶναι καὶ οἰκεῖν ὅπου ἂν βούλωνται. Thuc. 
V 34 1. τοῦ δ᾽ αὐτοῦ χειμῶνος καὶ Δῆλον ἐκάθηραν ᾿Αθηναῖοι κατὰ 
χρησμὸν δή twa. Thuc. Il] 104 1. τοῦ δ᾽ αὐτοῦ χειμῶνος καὶ Χῖοι 
τὸ τεῖχος περιεῖλον Τὸ καινὸν κελευσάντων ᾿Αθηναίων κτλ. Thuc. IV 
511. Ὀλύμπια δ᾽ ἐγένετο τοῦ θέρους τούτου, οἷς ᾿Ανδροσθένης ᾿Αρκὰς 
παγκράτιον τὸ πρῶτον ἐνίκα. Thuc. V 49 1. 

It will be remembered that the words for the seasons are 
regularly found in the genitive case and that but two out 
of the whole number are in the dative. Hence it is impos- 
sible to give a number of parallels in the dative containing 
the same words, and we are obliged to be content with a 
correspondence in the modifying word or a similarity in the 
general trend of the thought. For phrases in the dative 
with the same modifying word there may be compared the 


examples of τῇ αὐτῇ ἡμέρᾳ (p. 31), and τῇ ἐπιγιγνομένῃ ἡμέρᾳ 


found below, and for those containing an attributive of a 
meaning like ἐπιγιγνόμενος there are the illustrations of τῷ 
ἐπιόντι ἔτει mentioned above. Others that may be given 
are: ἀνέστησαν δὲ καὶ Αἰγινήτας τῷ αὐτῷ θέρει τούτῳ ἐξ Αἰγίνης ᾿Αθη- 
vaio. Thuc. II 27 1. καὶ τοὺς τῶν Κορινθίων ξυμμάχους ἐπιπλέον- 
τες ἔφθειρον, μέχρι οὗ ἹΚορίνθιοι περιιόντι τῷ θέρει πέμψαντες ναῦς καὶ 
στρατιάν, ἐπεὶ σφῶν οἱ ξύμμαχοι ἐπόνουν, ἐστρατοπεδεύοντο ἐπὶ ᾿Ακτίῳ 
κτλ. Thuc. I 30 3. ἐλέγοντο δὲ καὶ ai σπονδαὶ ἐξεληλυθέναι τοῖς 
Μαντινεῦσι τούτῳ τῷ ἔτει κτλ. Hell. V 22. τῷ δ᾽ ὑστέρῳ ἔτει 
Λακεδαιμονίων καὶ τῶν συμμάχων πρέσβεις ἦλθον αὐτοκράτορες ᾿Αθήναζε. 
Hell. ΝῚ 11. ἐνέβαλον δὲ καὶ τῷ ὑστέρῳ ἔτει εἰς τὸν Φλειοῦντα οἵ 
τε ᾿Αργεῖοι καὶ οἱ ᾿Αρκάδες ἅπαντες. Hell. VII 2 το. ἀλλὰ γὰρ 
μετὰ ταῦτά τε καὶ Αἰγύπτου ἀπόστασιν τῷ ὑστέρῳ ἔτεϊ παρασκευαζό- 
μενον συνήνεικε αὐτὸν Δαρεῖον... ἀποθανεν. Hdt. VII 4. τῇ δὲ 
ἐπιγιγνομένῃ ἡμέρᾳ Νικόστρατος... παραγίγνεται βοηθῶν ἐκ Ναυπάκτου 
κτλ. Thuc. II] 75 1. καὶ τῇ ἐπιγιγνομένῃ ἡμέρᾳ Νικίας μὲν τῷ 
ἡμίσει τοῦ στρατοῦ προϊὼν ἅμα ἐς τὰ μεθόρια τῶν Σκιωναίων τὴν γῆν 
ἐδήου. Thuc. IV 130 2. 

When it is considered that Thucydides uses a phrase con- 
taining a word denoting season in a temporal construction 
seventy-four times, all of which are genitive but two, it 
can scarcely be assumed that in all of the seventy-two 
instances he intended to convey the idea of “during, some 
time within,” and but once conceived the period as a point 
in time. He was writing a history and was dating the 
events by summers and winters, and his customary phrases, 
all of which have αὐτός or ἐπιγιγνόμενος with the exception 
of one, Thuc. V 49 1 (p. 34), were stereotyped and through 
constant use were never analyzed further than the stage of 
thinking that they dated a given event at the time of a 
certain season. Homer and Herodotus do not use such 
phrases at all; but Xenophon in the only instance in which 
he uses a season in this fashion in the Hellenica or Anabasis 
uses the genitive, τοῦ ἐπιόντος θέρους (p. 34), though in the 
preceding two books of the Hellenica he had employed 
τῷ ἐπιόντι ἔτει three times. A comparison with the dative 
phrases of like character reveals so close a resemblance that 


it must be admitted that the two cases in these instances do 
not have their general distinction, but express the same rela- 
tion, unless the view is held that the case can express one 
relation and one only, which is not warranted by the facts 
already brought forward and those that are to follow. It 
cannot be said with certainty that they have lost this dis- 
tinction, for the number of instances of seasons in the geni- 
tive tends rather to prove that these words never possessed 
it, and this supposition is supported by the few Homeric 
examples in which the word for a season is unmodified, but 
nevertheless both genitive and dative are found, and without 
a distinction in meaning. 
. These are 
τάων οὔ ποτε καρπὸς ἀπόλλυται οὐδ᾽ ἀπολείπει 
χείματος οὐδὲ θέρευς, ἐπετήσιος.---(α. 7 117-8. 
τὸν δ᾽ ὁ γέρων Πρίαμος πρῶτος ἴδεν ὀφθαλμοῖσιν 
παμφαίνονθ᾽ ὥς 7’ ἀστέρ᾽ ἐπεσσύμενον πεδίοιο, 
ὅς ῥά τ᾽ ὁπώρης εἶἷσιν.---1]. 22 25-7. 
ἡ δ᾽ ἑτέρη θέρεϊ προρέει ἐικυῖα χαλάζξῃ.---1Ἰ. 22 151. 
ἔσταν δ᾽ ἐν λειμῶνι Σκαμανδρίῳ ἀνθεμόεντι 
μυρίοι, ὅσσα τε φύλλα καὶ ἄνθεα γίγνεται ὥρῃ.----1]. 2 467-8. 
Of a character similar to the above datives are the follow- 
ing two examples of νυκτί, which do not seem to differ from 
the ordinary use of the genitive of the same word. In the 
Homeric passage the adverb ὅμως gives the same meaning 
as καὶ ἡμέρας καὶ νυκτός. 
ἀλλὰ ἑκὰς νήσων ἀπέχειν ἐυεργέα νῆα 
νυκτὶ δ᾽ ὁμῶς πλείειν.----Οα. 15 33-4. 
μετὰ δὲ εὐφρόνη τε ἐγίνετο καὶ Ἐέρξην ἔκνιζε ἡ ᾿Αρταβάνου γνώμη " 
νυκτὶ δὲ βουλὴν διδοὺς πάγχυ εὕρισκέ οἱ οὐ πρῆγμα εἶναι στρατεύεσθαι 
ἐπὶ τὴν Ἑλλάδα. Hdt. VII 12. 
Compare these with 
ἡγήσαντο οὖν, εἰ ἕνα ἕλοιντο ἄρχοντα, μᾶλλον ἂν ἢ ToAvapxias οὔσης 
δύνασθαι τὸν ἕνα χρῆσθαι τῷ στρατεύματι καὶ νυκτὸς καὶ ἡμέρας. An. 
V1I1 18. ἐλθόντας δὲ ἐπὶ τὰ βασιλήια νυκτὸς καὶ τὸν λίθον ἐπὶ τῷ 
οἰκοδομήματι ἀνευρόντας ῥηιδίως μεταχειρίσασθαι κκλ. Hdt. ΠῚ rata. 
ταῦτα δὲ ποιησαμένοισι νυκτὸς φόβος ἐς τὸ στρατόπεδον ἐνέπεσε. Hat. 


VII 43. 


Up to this point all that has been given shows the geni- 
tive stepping over into the territory supposed to belong to 
the dative; but sometimes the dative encroaches on the 
domain of the genitive, a fact to be inferred from the pas- 
sages quoted below. 


Compare 

νομίζοντες οὕτω καὶ ἐν ἀσφαλεστάτῳ εἶναι, ἢν ἢ ἡ ἰσχὺς αὐτῶν ἕκα- 
τέρωθεν, καὶ εἴ τι παραγγεῖλαι χρήζοιεν, ἡμίσει ἂν χρόνῳ αἰσθάνεσθαι τὸ 
στράτευμαι An. 1 ὃ 22. This is supplemented by two others 
taken from an outside source. ὡς δὲ κατιδὼν ἐκεῖνος ἐξανέστη 
καὶ per ὀργῆς ἠπείλησεν ὀλίγῳ χρόνῳ τοὺς ἄνδρας ἐπιδείξειν οὐκ εἰς THY 
αὐτοῦ ναῦν ἐμβεβληκότας, ἀλλ᾽ εἰς τὰς ἰδίας πατρίδας, ἐκέλευον κτλ. 
Plut. Aristid. 22. Κίμων δ᾽ ὥσπερ ἀθλητὴς δεινὸς ἡμέρᾳ μιᾷ δύο 
καθῃρηκὼς ἀγωνίσματα, καὶ τὸ μὲν ἐν Σαλαμῖνι πεζομαχίᾳ, τὸ δ᾽ ἐν Πλα- 
ταιαῖς ναυμαχίᾳ παρεληλυθὼς τρόπαιον, ἐπηγωνίσατο ταῖς νίκαις KTA.— 
Plut. Kim, 13. 

with 

Kai ταῦτα ὀλίγου χρόνου ἔσται rerevpeva. Hat. II] 134. ἀθυ- 
μίαν τε πλείστην ὃ χρόνος παρεῖχε παρὰ λόγον ἐπιγιγνόμενος, OVS ᾧοντο 
ἡμερῶν ὀλίγων ἐκπολιορκήσειν, ἐν νήσῳ τε ἐρήμῃ καὶ ὕδατι ἁλμυρῷ 
χρωμένους. Thuc. 1V 26 4. 6 δ᾽ αὖ ᾿Επαμεινώνδας, ἐνθυμούμενος 
ὅτι ὀλίγων μὲν ἡμερῶν ἀνάγκη ἔσοιτο ἀπιέναι διὰ τὸ ἐξήκειν τῇ στρατείᾳ 
τὸν χρόνον. Hell. VII 5 18. ἐλθὼν δ᾽ ἐκεῖνος λέγει ὅτι ἄξει 
αὐτοὺς πέντε ἡμερῶν εἰς χωρίον ὅθεν ὄψονται θάλατταν. An. IV 7 2ο. 

Note in both cases the character of the attributives. They 
are words of measure, and adjectives of such meaning can- 
not denote the time at which an event occurs; but both 
genitive and dative modified as they are give the limits 
of the time within which the action of the verb takes place. 
This is particularly clear in the sentence with ἡμέρᾳ μιᾷ, of 
which the interpretation is that it was something extra- 
ordinary for a general to win two such victories as those at 
the Eurymedon within the given time. 

It has been hinted that the genitive and accusative some- 
times come in conflict, or better, the resultant when the 
genitive is used is in the end the same as when the accusa- 


tive is the case. Such instances are naturally rare. Yet 
the two stereotyped, semi-adverbial expressions, τοῦ λοιποῦ 
and τὸ λοιπόν, which certainly had their origin in the geni- 
tive and accusative cases, clearly have an equivalent mean- 
ing under certain conditions. The distinction generally 
made is that the former equals “in the future (at any 
time)”, the latter, “for the future (for all future time),” 
and this holds good in very many instances, as for example: 
καὶ δόγμα ἐποιήσαντο, ἐάν τις τοῦ λοιποῦ μνησθῇ δίχα τὸ στράτευμα ποιεῖν, 
θανάτῳ αὑτὸν ζημιοῦσθα. An. VI 4 τι. ἐποίησε δὲ καὶ βωμὸν καὶ 
ναὸν ἀπὸ τοῦ ἱεροῦ ἀργυρίου, καὶ τὸ λοιπὸν δὲ ἀεὶ δεκατεύων τὰ ἐκ τοῦ 
ἀγροῦ ὡραῖα θυσίαν ἐποίει τῇ Oe. An. V 3.9. Yet when the 
verb was negatived it seemed to make little or no difference 
which was used. For doubtless the conception was that 
“not—at any time” was essentially the same as “not—for 
all future time or throughout the future.” This is illus- 
trated in the following. 

φέρετε, τοῦ λοιποῦ μὴ πειθώμεθα airod. Hdt. V1 12. σύ τε τοῦ 
λοιποῦ λόγους ἔχων τοιούσδε μὴ ἐπιφαίνεο ᾿Αθηναίοισ. Hdt. VIII 
143. ὡς δ᾽ ἐκεῖ ἐγένετο, πυθόμενοι οἱ βοιώταρχοι ὅτι θύοι, πέμψαντες 
ἱππέας τοῦ τε λοιποῦ εἶπαν μὴ θύειν. Hell. III 4 4. τοσαῦτα τοῦ 
κήρυκος εἰπόντος οἱ ᾿Αθηναῖοι πέμψαντες παρὰ τοὺς Βοιωτοὺς ἑαυτῶν 
κήρυκα τοῦ μὲν ἱεροῦ οὔτε ἀδικῆσαι ἔφασαν οὐδὲν οὔτε τοῦ λοιποῦ ἑκόν- 
tes βλάψαν. Thuc. 1V 98 1. cf. Hdt. I 11, An. V 7 34, 
Bell. 11 χ δὸ, Ὗ 4 x2. 

With the above compare the following. ἐκέλευον τὸ ἐς 
Παλλήνην τεῖχος καθελεῖν καὶ ὁμήρους δοῦναι, τούς τε ἐπιδημιουργοὺς 
ἐκπέμπειν καὶ τὸ λοιπὸν μὴ δέχεσθαι os κατὰ ἔτος ἕκαστον Κορίνθιοι 
ἔπεμπον. Thuc. 1 56 2. ξυμμάχους δὲ οὐδέποτε τὸ λοιπὸν ἐπαξό- 
μεθα οὐδὲ διαλλακτάς. Thuc. IV 64 4. καὶ τὸ λοιπὸν ξυμμάχους 
μὴ ποιεῖσθαι, ὥσπερ εἰώθαμεν. Thuc. VI 13 2. καὶ τὸ λοιπὸν 
προεῖπον μήτε ἐναποθνήσκειν ἐν τῇ νήσῳ μήτε ἐντίκτειν, ἀλλ᾽ ἐς τὴν 
Ῥηνείαν διακομίζεσθαι. Thuc. III] 104 2. cf. Ii] 71 1, V 32 5, 
VII 60 2. 

It is this interchange of the two forms of expression when 
the negative is present that may account for the geni- 
tive in the following two instances, in which, though the 


negative is absent, the meaning of the words is “for the 
future”, not “at any or some time in the future.” This is 
effected by the word, λοιπός “rest, remainder,’ a word of 
measure, and the context. ‘The passages are these: ἔνθα τοῦ 
λοιποῦ διαιτᾶτο ἔχων οὐδὲν βίαιον. Hdt. III 15. τοῦ δὲ λοιποῦ χρό- 
νου ἐβούλετο τριώβολον διδόναι, ἕως ἂν βασιλέα ἐπέρηται. Thuc. 
VIII 29 1. In Hdt. III 15 the verb, διαιτάομαι “live,” con- 
taining so strong an element of duration, limits to extent of 
time a temporal expression of which a word of measure is 
apart. The second example, though somewhat different in 
that χρόνου is expressed, should be classed here because of 
the close likeness in meaning. But, though the noun is 
expressed and the case is genitive, the attributive and the 
éws clause seem to indicate clearly that the meaning is “ for 
the future until.” 

Thus it is seen that the crossing of the genitive and accu- 
sative cases, if such it may be called, is quite limited in its 
extent. Examples of other words which have a hint of it, 
yet are by no means certain, are here omitted and will be 
examined as they are met with in the separate discussion 
of the cases. 

It is also apparent that the line between the dative and 
accusative is not always strictly drawn. For this is seen 
not only in such petrified accusative forms as αὐτῆμαρ, σήμε- 
pov and the like, but also in the Herodotean phrases of 
which the prominent elements are a demonstrative and αὐτός 
depending on χρόνος. In these it is difficult to perceive a 
distinction, since the use of the accusative resembles so 
. Closely the dating function of the dative. The most strik- 
ing examples of this are the following: 

Τοῦτο μέν σφι πέμψασι és Δελφοὺς χορὸν νεηνιέων ἑκατὸν δύο μοῦνοι 
τούτων ἀπενόστησαν, τοὺς δὲ ὀκτώ τε καὶ ἐνενήκοντα αὐτῶν λοιμὸς ὕπο- 
λαβὼν ἀπήνεικε" τοῦτο δὲ ἐν τῇ πόλι τὸν αὐτὸν τοῦτον χρόνον, ὀλίγον 
πρὸ τῆς ναυμαχίης, παισὶ γράμματα διδασκομένοισι ἐνέπεσε ἣ στέγη, 
ὥστε ἀπ᾽ ἑκατὸν καὶ εἴκοσι παίδων εἷς μοῦνος ἀπέφυγε. Hdt. VI 27. 
Ζαγλαῖοι γὰρ οἱ ἀπὸ Σικελίης τὸν αὐτὸν χρόνον τοῦτον πέμποντες ἐς τὴν 
᾿Ιωνίην ἀγγέλους ἐπεκαλέοντο τοὺς Ἴωνας ἐς Καλὴν ἀκτήν. Hdt. VI 


22. τυχεῖν ἐν Σούσοισι τοῖσι Μεμνονίοισι ἐόντας ἑτέρου πρήγματος 
εἵνεκα ἀγγέλους ᾿Αθηναίων, ... ᾿Αργείους δὲ τὸν αὐτὸν τοῦτον χρόνον 
πέμψαντας καὶ τούτους ἐς Σοῦσα ἀγγέλους εἰρωτᾶν ᾿Αρτοξέρξην κτλ. 
Hdt. Vil 151. τὸν δὲ αὐτὸν τοῦτον χρόνον Θήρας. .. ἔστελλε ἐς ἀποι- 
κίην ἐκ Λακεδαίμονος. Hdt. 1V 147. 6 γὰρ Ἱστιαῖος τύραννος ἦν 
Μιλήτου καὶ ἐτύγχανε τοῦτον τὸν χρόνον ἐὼν ἐν Σούσοισι, ὅτε οἱ Νάξιοι 
ἦλθον, ξεῖνοι πρὶν ἐόντες τῷ Ἱστιαίιῳ. Hdt. V 30. 

The factors that produce the impression that extent of 
time is not the relation expressed are first, the modifying 
words which are so usual in phrases that date, because they 
are by their meaning so well adapted for that purpose, and 
second, the verbs upon which the phrases depend. In the 
first passage, Hdt. VI 27, it is impossible to conceive that 
the roof was falling on the children at home throughout the 
time that the youths at Delphi were being carried off by 
the plague. Just as ἐμπίπτω does not express continuance, 
so the same is true of πέμπω and στέλλω of the next three, 
VI 22, VII 151, VI 147. The last example does not illus- 
trate the point in question so well as the others, because 
the verbal expression may be just another way of saying 
““he was staying or living etc.’’; yet the following ὅτε 
‘clause apparently indicates that the time of duration was 
not in the mind of the writer but a desire to date. Here 
again as in the case of the same author’s use of the geni- 
tive of ἡμέρα (see p. 32) there may be a dialectic difference 
in idiom or a preference for a phrase that had become 
stereotyped through his own employment of it. 

It is difficult to parallel these expressions with a dative 
of the same because Herodotus does not employ that case 
with these phrases, nor do the other authors drawn from 
in this study. The only two resembling them that can be 
cited are τῷ αὐτῷ χρόνῳ, Hell. I 2 18 (see p. 33), and the fol- 
lowing, Hell. II 3 15, τῷ μὲν οὖν πρώτῳ χρόνῳ ὃ Κριτίας τῷ 
Θηραμένει ὁμογνώμων τε καὶ φίλος ἦν" ἐπεὶ δὲ αὐτὸς μὲν προπετὴς ἦν 
ἐπὶ τὸ πολλοὺς ἀποκτείνειν κκλ. But this is not so good as the 
former. For we should almost expect an accusative when 
we compare it with An. VI 1 18, τὸν δ᾽ ἔμπροσθεν χρόνον ἐκ τῆς 


νικώσης ἔπραττον πάντα ot στρατηγοί. But if the notion of dura- 
tion was in the thought of the writer, it was crowded out by 
the contrasted idea already in mind, with which he begins 
the following sentence and which is used to date. Accord- 
ingly he substitutes the case that dates in order to get a 
more perfect balance. 

From the various indications it can hardly be doubted that 
a Classification according to the inflectional ending does not 
result in a functional classification of which each part is 
entirely exclusive of the othertwo. The greatest overlapping 
is with the genitive and dative, with the former having the 
meaning of the latter more often than the latter that of 
the former. That they overlap in this way is not surpris- 
ing considering the comparatively small difference in mean- 
ing that exists between them. The relation of the genitive 
to the accusative in this particular is of a different sort; 
for the cases of a genitive expressing extent of time are 
certainly rare, but, if it is fair to draw any inference from 
the use of τοῦ λοιποῦ and τὸ λοιπόν, it is possible at least 
_ that the presence of a negatived verb upon which the geni- 
tive depends did not under most circumstances call forth 
in the mind an interpretation essentially different from that 
which an accusative in the same place would have done. 
And finally, though in the great majority of cases there is 
a well marked distinction between the dative and accusative 
temporal constructions, in Herodotus there are some pretty 
definite instances of the accusative construction—limited to 
be sure to one or two phrases—which in their meaning do 
not appear to differ from the signification usually assigned 
to the dative. So it is all along the line, a crossing more 
or less in case meaning, a fact which makes us hesitate to 
depend entirely on the case ending for the meaning of the 
construction. And yet, what is the explanation of these 
irregularities and these various facts that have been gleaned 
from the different classifications? The answer to this as 
well as the greater question, which contains it, the one with 
regard to the factors that determine the meaning of the case 


-Ὡ ΠΣ 


construction of words of time, seems to lie in the meaning 
of the word itself, the context,* and the inflectional ending. 
A satisfactory answer to this larger question demands a 
separate study of each case, and since the point has now 
been reached at which that may be entered upon, we shall 
begin with the accusative because its problems are perhaps 
the simplest and most readily solved. 


* The term context is meant to apply not only to the words of the 
particular sentence to which the temporal expression belongs, but 
also the sentences which precede and follow, with special attention 
to the meaning of the modifiers of the temporal noun, the meaning 
of the verb, and any other expression of time in the same sentence 
or those contiguous to it. 


II. THE ACCUSATIVE. 


It will be admitted that the usual meaning of the accusa- 
tive of nouns of a temporal connotation is extent of time. 
The question is, Does this meaning reside wholly in the case? 

The first point to be observed and one which is of primary 
importance in determining the meaning of the construction 
is, that all words to be dealt with in the accusative express- 
ing a temporal relation without the aid of a preposition 
primarily denote time. This fact must be continually 
kept in mind, not only here, but also in dealing with the 
same words in the other cases, as it has not been deemed 
necessary to mention it in each particular instance discussed. 
Thus at the very beginning we come upon an important 
. factor, and that it gives material aid in determining the 
meaning of the construction goes without saying, since it is 
easy to see that a word denoting instrument or quality or 
agent could not possibly express any of the relations of 
time. 

It has been stated before that the accusative is found 
with and without modifying words, but the great number 
of instances are with some modifier or other. These two 
classes will be considered separately. Looking first at the 
class which has the modifiers and so contains an element 
which may assist in ascertaining the meaning, we may sub- 
divide these modifying words according as they do or do 
not aid in expressing the idea of extent. 

The modifiers that aid in expressing extent are πολύς, 
συχνός, ὀλίγος, Snpds, ὅλος, πᾶς, πρόπας, ἅπας, τοσοῦτος, ὅσος ὁπόσος, 
τόσος, πλείων, πλεῖστος, διπλάσιος, ἄλλος “΄ rest,’ λοιπός, οὐδείς, τὶς. 

The modifiers that do not aid in expressing extent are 
an ordinal numeral, οὗτος, ἐκεῖνος, αὐτός, ἄλλος “next,” ὕστε- 
ραῖος, ὕστερος, πρότερος, παρών, ἐπιών, παρελθών, προκείμενος, εἰρη- 
μένος, ἕκαστος, δ-ἧ-τό, τήμερον, πρόσθεν, ἔμπροσθεν, νῦν, ἔπειτα, πρὸ 
τοῦ, ἀπὸ τούτου. 


mde Bete 


The result is that all the words expressing measure are 
in one list and all those that do not are in the other. Since 
in these words of measure there is a second factor aiding 
in expressing the idea of extent of time, it is to this class 
of phrases that consideration will be given first. But help- 
ful as such words are they do not exclude other meanings ; 
for words of measure are employed where plainly extent 
of time is not intended, as in the genitive. Therefore, we 
must look to that which after the modifying word is next 
in degree of relationship, namely, the verb. There are 
found, of course, verbs of a great variety of meanings, but 
the great majority of them have an element in common, 
that of time necessary for the performance of the act or 
realization of the state; or in other words, there is in them 
the idea of continuance in varying degrees of distinctness. 
A smaller number consists of those of a colorless charac- 
ter, which, though neither excluding nor including the 
above idea, are furnished by the context with abundant indi- 
cation of the idea of continuance. At any rate, none belong 
to the class of verbs which express instantaneous action, 
such as to arrive, to hit, etc. By reason of the varying 
character of these verbs they will be divided into three 
classes. 

1. Verbs which clearly contain the element of continuance 
and need no explanation. 

deoa, Od. 19 342. 

ἄημι, imp. Od. 12 325. 

ἀλάομαι, pres. Od. 11 160. 

dvréxw, pres. Hdt. VIII 688, t40a; imp. Thuc. II 65 12, 
IV 35 4, 441, VII 344; aor. VIII 95 5. 

βιόω, aor. Hdt. IX το. 

γηράσκω, pres. Od. 4 210. 

δαίνυμαι, imp. Il. 1 602, Od. 19 425. 

δακρύω, imp. An. I 3 2. 

δῃόω, imp. Thuc. IV 54 4, 130 1. 

διαιτάομαι, aor. Thuc. VII 87 3. 

διαλέγομαι, aor. An. II 5 42. 


j ι fd : \/ Ε Ω i δ z 

itchy a4 ry } 
ὦ VP 
Αἱ Prima Pod 


- ά 


Aa ae νήμυμ ον ing, eas 

διαμένω, pres. Hell. VI 3 7. 

διαπορεύομαι, imp. Hell. III 4 12. 

διατελέω, (with suppl. part.) pres. Hdt. Π 19, ΓΝ 28; aor. 
Thuc. VII 38 3, An. IV 3 2. 

ἐέλδομαι, pres. Il. 14 269, 276, Od. 5 210, 219, 23 6. 

éupevw, aor. Thuc. II 2 1, 19 2, 23 3, 57 2, VIII 31 4. 

ἐνοικέω, pres. Thuc. III 68 3. 

ἐπιβιόω, imp. Thuc. II 65 6. 

ἐργάζομαι, imp. Thuc. IV 69 3. 

ἐσθίω, pres. Hdt. II 68. 

ζάω, pres. Hdt. III 22 (3), An. 19 11. 

nyo, imp. Od. 9 162, 557, 10 184, 468, 477, 12 30. 

ἡσυχάζω, pres. Thuc. III 68 1; imp. Thuc. III 107 3, VIII 
44 4; fut. Thuc. II 84 2. 

iavw, imp. Il. 9 325. 

καταμένω, aor. Hell. ΓΝ 6 13, VI 5 20. 

κλαίω, pres. Od. 4 544; imp. Od. 24 64. 

μάρναμαι, imp. Il. 18 453, Od. 24 41. 

μάχομαι, pres. Il. το 163, An. VII ὃ το; imp. Thuc. VII 
ἤδη. Hell. I 3:6. 

μένω, pres. Il. 2 292, Od. 15 455, Hdt. IV 201, An. Vt 
12; imp. Od. 19 199; aor. Od. 6 295, 9 138, Hdt. VII 173, 
Thuc. II τὸν 6, 1V 6 2, VII 50 5, VIII 28 1, 71 3, 991, 
An: I’ 2 6, 2:9,:2: ἴον, 4.11. 2 14,2 19,/2 20; Bt Aa an 
11,419, 5 4, 11317, 5 1, Il 4 31, 1Ν ἡ 18, 8 22, V 3 3, 5 
g./ Vi τ τ, 638, Hell. Τ νόον a9) aaa Vibe ga: 

μίμνω, pres. Il. 12 133, Od. 15 545. 

ναυμαχέω, aor. Hell. 1 6 33. 

ὀδύρομαι, imp. Il. 24 714. 

oixew, pres. Hdt. "Ν 157, Thuc. V 112 2; imp. Hdt. Il 
140, ΙΝ 158, VII 94; aor. Thuc. VI 4 2. 

οἰκοδομέω, pres. Hdt. 1 21; imp. Hdt. II 125. 

παραμένω, pres. Hdt. III 57; aor. Thuc. III 87 2. 

περιμένω, imp. An. II 41. 

πλανάομαι, imp. Thuc. II 102 6. 

πλέω, imp. Od. 5 278, 7 267, An. VI 21; fut. Hdt. II 29. 

πολεμέω, pres. Hdt. VIII 1408, Hell. II 4 21, VII 1 το; 
imp. Hdt. I 18 (2). 


πολιορκέω, imp. Hdt. V 34, 72, Thuc. VI 7 2; aor. Hdt. I 
86, V 65, VI 135. 

πορεύομαι, pres. An. V 5 3, Hell. III 4 21; imp. Hdt. VII 217. 

ποτιδέγμενος, Od. 2 205, 21 156. 

προσμένω, pres. Hdt. I 199; aor. Hdt. VIII 4. 

πτολεμίζω, fut. 1]. 2 328. 

πωλέομαι, pres. Od. 2 55, 17 534. 

péw, pres. Hdt. II 149. 

σιτέομαι, pres. Hdt. I 94. 

στρατοπεδεύομαι, aor. Hdt. ΙΝ 89. 

συμμένω, fut. Hell. VII 1 2; aor. Thuc. 118 3,1V 744. . 

τρέφω, pres. Hdt. I 192; imp. Thuc. III 52 3} perf. Hell. 
II 3 24. 

ὑπομένω, aor. Hell. V τ 8, Thuc. II 92 1. 

᾿ φρουρέω, pres. Hdt. IX 106, aor. Hdt. II 30, ΙΝ 133. 

2. The second group is made up of verbs each of which 
possesses several meanings. Since not all of these mean- 
ings have to an equal degree the idea of duration, there is 
given with the instances cited the particular meaning em- 
ployed, which contains as strong an element of continuance 
as those of the verbs in the preceding group. 

ἄγω (καὶ φέρω), imp. Hell. III 2 30. 

ἀκροβολίζομαι, to skirmish, aor. Thuc. IV 34 1. 

ἀναπειράομαι, to drill, to practice (intr.) imp. Thuc. VII 51 2. 

ἁρπάζω, to plunder, imp. Hell. IV 3 22. 

διαρκέω, to hold out, to endure, aor. Hell. V 3 21. 

εἶμι, to go, to march, imp. Hdt. IV 123. 

ἔλπομαι, to hope, pres. Il. 24 491. 

éréxw, to wait, to delay, aor. Hdt. I 132, V τό, 89 (2), 
VI 1ro2, VIII 113, Thuc. IV 31 1, 124 4, An. III 4 36, Hell. 
I 6 6. 

ἐπιτρέχω, to run after, to hasten after, aor. Il. 23 418. 

épvxw, to detain (a guest), pres. Od. 4 594; fut. Od. 15 
68; aor. Il. 6 217, Od. 17 515. 

éxw, to detain (a guest), imp. Od. 4 360, 17 515; to have 
as wife, fut. Od. 6 281; to occupy (to have in possession), 
pres. Thuc. VI 25; imp. Hell. IV 4 15. 


καθέζομαι, to sit, pres. An. V 8 14. 

καταδαρθάνω, to sleep, aor. Thuc. VI 61 2. 

κατέχω, to detain, imp. Hdt. V 106, VI 128; to wait, aor. 
Hdt. VIII 114. 

κεῖμαι, to lie, to remain, imp. Od. 9 75, 10 143. 

μιμνήσκομαι, to remember, pres. Od. 15 54; perf. Od. 4 
592, 8 431. 

παίζω, to play (a game), pres. Hdt. I 94. 

παρασκευάζομαι, to make preparation, imp. Thuc. I 31 1, 
VIII 103 2. 

περιάγω, to carry about, pres. Hdt. IV 73. 

περίειμι, tO survive, to remain alive, imp. Hdt. IX 63. 

πλάζομαι, to be driven hither and thither, imp. Od. 6 389. 

προσκαθίζομαι, to besiege, pres. Hell. I 5 21. 

προσφέρομαι, to bear down upon (of a ship), pres. Thuc. 
VII 70 5. 

συνοικέω, to live with (a wife), fut. Hdt. IX 111. 

ταριχεύω, to pickle, pres. Hdt. II 86, 88. 

φέρομαι, to be borne along, imp. 1]. 1 592. 

φιλέω, to entertain (a guest), imp. Od. 10 14. 

χειμάζει, it is storming, imp. Hdt. VII τοι. 

χέω, to throw up a mound, imp. Thuc. II 75 3. 

xpdopat, to make use of, pres. Thuc. V 47 6. 

A few examples from the above groups will suffice to 
show that there is little left for the case ending to do, when’ 
added to a noun of time modified by a word of measure and 
dependent on a verb expressing duration. 

οὐ γὰρ οἷοί τε πολλὸν χρόνον εἰσί τοι ἀντέχειν of Ἕλληνες. 
Hdt. VIII 688. πολλόν excludes the thought of a point in 
time, and the meaning of the verb that of a limit within 
which the action of the verb may occur. 

ὧς τότε μὲν πρόπαν ἦμαρ és ἠέλιον καταδύντα 
δαίνυντ᾽ κτλ.----1]. 1 601-2. 


πρόπαν with its meaning of extent, because of its dependence 
on ἦμαρ, is reenforced by the meaning and the tense of the 
verb, and also by the. prepositional phrase. All taken 


together make absolutely certain the idea of extent of {{π|6.---- 
ἐδήουν τὴν γῆν ἡμέρας μάλιστα ἑἕπτά. Thuc. 1V 54 4. The car- 
dinal numeral expresses the measure or number of the days* 
during which the action continues, not the time within which 
it takes place and is completed, an idea which cannot be 
expressed by this form of the verb.—évrat@a ἔμεινεν ἡμέρας 
ἑπτά. An. 126. Is it possible to find better examples 
than these with μένω, a verb which under all conditions must 
express duration? No other meaning can be conceived for 
the temporal construction accompanying it than that of 
extent.—évradda δὲ ’Ayacias ὃ Στυμφάλιος λοχαγὸς τιτρώσκεται, τὸν 
πάντα χρόνον μαχόμενος πρὸς τοὺς πολεμίους. An. VII ὃ 19. ᾽Αθη- 
ναΐων δὲ οἱ λοιποὶ τὰ αὐτὰ φρονήσαντες ἐπολιόρκεον αὐτοὺς ἡμέρας δύο. 
Hdt. V 72. καὶ τὴν μὲν ἄλλην ἡμέραν οἱ στρατιῶται καὶ σκεύη ἐκ 
τῶν κωμῶν καὶ σῖτον ἥρπαζον. Hell. IV 5 22. 

ἀλλ᾽ ἦ τοι κεῖνός γε σέθεν ζώοντος ἀκούων 

χαίρει τ᾽ ἐν θυμῷ ἐπί τ᾽ ἔλπεται ἤματα πάντα 

ὄψεσθαι φίλον υἱὸν ἀπὸ Τροίηθεν ἰόντα.---1]. 24 490ο--2. 


χειρωσάμενοι δὲ τὴν ᾿Ερετρίαν καὶ ἐπισχόντες ὀλίγας ἡμέρας ἔπλεον ἐς 
τὴν ᾿Αττικὴν. Hdt. VI 102. καὶ τὸ μὲν λοιπὸν θέρος καὶ τὸν 
ἐπιόντα χειμῶνα ὑπὸ τοῦ Λυσίππου καὶ τῶν περὶ αὐτὸν ἐφέρετο καὶ ἤγετο 
ἡ τῶν ᾿Ηλείων χώρα. Hell. III 2 30. ἣν δὲ πλέονα βούλωνται χρό- 
vov τῇ στρατιᾷ χρῆσθαι, ἡ πόλις ἡ μεταπεμψαμένη διδότω σῖτον κτλ. 
Thuc. V 47 6. καὶ ἐς τὴν ναυμαχίαν πέντε ἡμέρας παρεσκευάζοντο. 
Thuc. VIII 103 2. κατὰ ταύτην δὴ τὴν ἀτραπὸν καὶ οὕτω ἔχουσαν 
ot Πέρσαι τὸν ᾿Ασωπὸν διαβάντες ἐπορεύοντο πᾶσαν τὴν νύκτα. Hat. 
VII 217. οὕτω μὲν δὴ τοὺς ὀκτὼ μῆνας διατελέει χειμὼν ἐών. Hat. 
IV 28. μετὰ ταῦτα οὗ πολλόν τινα χρόνον βιοὺς ἀπέθανε. Hat. 
ΙΧ το. τὰς οὖν ναῦς ἐπλήρουν καὶ ἀνεπειρῶντο ἡμέρας ὅσαι αὐτοῖς 
ἐδόκουν ἱκαναὶ εἶνα. Thuc. VII 51 2. The ὅσαι of the relative 
clause takes the place of a word of measure modifying the 
noun directly. 

3. The third group consists of verbs which, though more 
or less vague in expressing the idea of duration, are abund- 
antly assisted by the context, which leaves no doubt that 
continuance is a prominent element. 


ἀμύνομαι, pres. Hdt. ΙΧ 102; imp. Thuc. I 137 4. 

ἀναπαύω, aor. Hell. IV 5 8. 

ἀνιάω, fut. Od. 2 115. 

ἁνδάνω, imp. Hdt. VIII 29. 

ἀντερείδω, imp. Hell. V 2 5. 

ἀντιποιέομαι, imp. An. V 2 τι. 

ἄπειμι, pres. Od. το 169. : 

ἀπέχομαι, pres. Il. 14 206, 305, Hdt. VII 13; aor. Thuc. 
VII 40 4. 

ἀποδημέω, pres. Hdt. IV 152. 

ἀποίχομαι, pres. Od. 21 70. 

ἀπολαύω, pres. Thuc. VII 27 4. 

ἀποκρούομαι, aor. Thuc. IV 115 1. 

ἀρρωστέω, imp. Hell. V 4 58. 

dpxw, pres. Thuc. II 2 1; imp. Hdt. 1 18; aor. Hdt. I 7, 
86, 102, Il 159, IV 1, 159, V 48. 

ἀφίστημι, 2 perf. Thuc. VI το 5. 

βασιλεύω, aor. Hdt. I 14, 16, 25, 102, 106, 214, II 127 (2), 
139, 157, III 10, 14, 66, 67, VII 4. 

βοηθέω, imp. An. VII 4 το. 

βουλεύομαι, pres. Thuc. I 86 4; aor. Hdt. I 164. 

γίγνομαι: ἀφόρητος γίνεται, Hdt. IV 28; λύκος γίνεται Hdt. 1V 
1053; γίγνεσθαι τὴν ἐπίστασιν, An. II 4 26; ἄσιτος γενέσθαι, Hell. 
Vii4; ἐν τῇ γῇ τῇ ᾿Αττικῇ ἐγένοντο, Thuc. I1 57 2; ὅτι δέοι yeve- 
σθαι αὑτὸν (τὸν πόλεμον), Thuc. V 26 4; ἐγένετο Μεσσήνη Λοκρῶν, 
Thuc. V 5 τ; ὃ πρῶτος πόλεμος γενόμενος, Thuc. V 24 2; ἡ ἀνά- 
βασις ἐγένετο καὶ κατάβασις, An. ΙΝ 1 το; γεγονώς, Hdt. I 119, 
ΠῚ 50. 

δέω, plup. Il. 5 387. 

εἰμί: ἔσται φύλοπις, 1]. 19 157; ἔνδον ὄντας, Hell. VI 4 36; 
ἐνθάδ᾽ ἐόντες, Il. 2 3433 ἔμπεδον ἦεν, Il. 12 9; ἦεν ἄπυστος μύθων, 
Od. 4 675; ἀμφὶς ἔσεσθον φυλόπιδος, Od. 16 267; ἀμφὶς ἐόντα, 
Od. Ig 221, 24 218; ἀθανάτους καὶ ἀγήρως εἶναι, Il. 8 539, Od. 
94; πάις εἴην, 11. 13 826; καταφείῃ καὶ ὄνειδος ἔσσομαι, 1]. τό 
498; φίλον ἔμμεναι, Od. 24 25; ἐν τῇ ᾿Αττικῇ ὄντων, Thuc. II 47 
3; ἦσαν ἐν τῇ γῇ, Thuc. 1Π 57 τ; ἦν περὶ Δεκέλειαν, Thuc. VIII 
5 3; εἶναι τὰς σπονδάς, Thuc. V 18 3; ξύμμαχοι ἔσονται (εἶναι), 


4 


Thuc. V 23 1, 47 3, 79 1; ἀνὴρ δόκιμος ἐών, Hdt. III 75; δια- 
φόρους εἶναι, Hdt. VI 52; ἦν ταῦτα, Hdt. VIII 100; ἦν ἔλασσον 
(τὸ φῦμα), Hdt. III 133; σύνοικοι ἐόντες, Hdt. VII 73; τυφλὸν 
εἶναι, Hdt. Il 111; ψύχεά ἐστι, Hdt. IV 28; ἐπιμειξίαι ἦσαν, 
Thuc. V 35 2. 

εἴργω, pres. Hell. I 1 35. 

ἐκλείπω, aot. Thuc. III 87 1. 

ἐλινύω, imp. Hdt. VIII 71; aor. Hdt. VII 56. 

ἐντείνω, perf. pass. Hdt. II 173. 

ἐπαναβάλλομαι, aor. Hat. I gt. 

ἐρύκω, pres. Od. 17 408. 

ἔρχομαι, aor. An. VI 6 38. 

ἐφίστημι, aor. An. II 4 26. 

εὐχετάομαι, pres. Od. ὃ 467. 

ἔχειν πόλεμον, fut. Il. 24 670. 

θαλασσεύω, pres. Thuc. VII 12 3. 

iepdw, perf. Thuc. II 2 1. 

ἱκετεύω, imp. Hdt. III 48. 

ἰσχύω, aor. Thuc. III 104 2. 

κρατέω, aor. Thuc. | 13 6, 117 1. 

κρύπτω, aor. Hdt. II 86. 

οἰκοφθορέω, aor. Hdt. VIII 142. 

παρθενεύομαι, Hdt. III 124 (2). 

πάσχω, pres. Il. 3 157; fut. Hdt. II 13. 

mew, aor. Hell. II 3 41. 

πίπτω, pres. Il. 19 227. 

mow, imp. Hell. II 1 24. 

σπονδὰς ποιεῖσθαι, aor. Thuc. III 114 3, IV 21 3, V 41 2, 
47 1. 

προΐστημι, 2 aor. Thuc. II 65 5. 

προσβάλλω, imp. Hell. VI 5 32. 

προτίθημι, pres. Hdt. V 8. 

σπένδομαι, pres. Thuc. V 60 1; aor. Hdt. VII 148, Thuc. 
Ii 73 1, IV 63 1, Vi 71. 

στασιάζω, aor. Thuc. I 24 4. 

συμπολιτεύω, aor. Thuc. VI 4 1. 

σύνειμι, pres. Hdt. IV 9g. 


—5I— 


συρμαΐζω, pres. Hdt. II 77. 

τέρπομαι, pres. Od. 6 46; imp. Il. 21 45. 

τυραννεύω, imp. Hdt. 1 163; aor. Hdt. VII 154, 155, Thuc. 
VI 59 4. 

idiornm, aor. Thuc. IV 54 2. 

φεύγω, to be an exile, pres. Thuc. V 26 5; to shun, imp. 
Hdt. VI 123. 

φονεύω, imp. Thuc. III 8r 4. 

φωνέω, imp. Hdt. I 85. 

χηρεύω, pres. Od. 9 124. 

ὑπόβρυχα θῆκε, Od. 5 319. 

ἐκ θυμοῦ πεσέειν, 1]. 23 595. 

τιθέναι ἀθάνατον καὶ ἀγήραον, fut. Od. 5 136, 7 257, 23 336. 

χάριν ἰδέω, 11. 14 235. 


Some illustrations will make this class clearer. 

ἀλλ᾽ οὐδὲν γὰρ μέγα ἀπ᾽ αὐτοῦ ἄλλο ἔργον ἐγένετο βασιλεύσαντος 
δυῶν δέοντα τεσσεράκοντα ἔτεα. Hdt. 114. “Τὸ be (a) king”’ 
is rather colorless. But add to it a temporal phrase with a 
word of measure in it, and at once the idea of continuance 
comes forward.—érei δὲ οὐδενὶ ἐνέτυχον πορευόμενοι τὴν ὀρθὴν ὁδόν, 
ὥστε ἔχοντές τι εἰς τὴν φιλίαν ἐλθεῖν, ἔδοξεν αὐτοῖς τοὔμπαλιν ὑποστρέ- 
ψαντας ἐλθεῖν μίαν ἡμέραν καὶ νύκτας An. VI 6 38. ἐλθεῖν may 
often be devoid of any notion of duration, as the first one in 
the sentence seems to be; but the second takes on from the 
context an entirely different meaning. We have a prepara- 
tion for it in the setting. The army has been moving 
straight ahead, but has met with neither booty nor forage; 
so they determined to turn sharp around and go back one 
day and night. The participle, ὑποστρέψαντας, and the ad- 
verb, τοὔμπαλιν, coupled with the situation described in the 
first clause leave no doubt that ἐλθεῖν is equivalent to zopeve- 
σθαι and means “το march.’’—ésov μὲν yap χρόνον εἶχον τὰ ἀγάλ- 
ματα ἐν τῇ χώρῃ; ἐπιτελέειν τὰ συνέθεντο. Hdt. V 84. The ἐν τῇ 
χώρῃ gives a more specialized meaning to the verb than is 
connoted by the English “to have,” and coupled with the 
temporal phrase containing a word of measure and the 


5 2— 


imperfect tense, duration is quite certain.—ratra δὲ ποιήσαντες 
Tapixevovor Aitpw, κρύψαντες ἡμέρας ἑβδομήκοντα. Hdt. II 86. 
κρύψαντες must be interpreted in the light of the context. 
Herodotus 18 describing the process of embalming as em- 
ployed by the Egyptians. One part of it was the pickling of 
the body in λίτρον. κρύψαντες with the accompanying tem- 
poral phrase then means concealing or keeping the body in 
this solution for seventy days, thus compelling but one inter- 
pretation, extent of time.—éjv γὰρ αὐτοῖς, εἰ τούτου γ᾽ ἐδέοντο, 
καὶ μηδένα λιπεῖν ὀλίγον ἔτι χρόνον τῷ λιμῷ πιέσαντας. Hell. II 3 
41. That πιέσαντας denotes continuance is apparent from 
the presence of ἔτι with ὀλίγον χρόνον.----συρμαΐζουσι τρεῖς ἡμέρας 
ἐπεξῆς μηνὸς ἑκάστου, ἐμέτοισι θηρώμενοι τὴν ὑγιείην καὶ κλύσμασι 
κτλ. Hdt. Il 77. The adverb immediately following the 
temporal expression gives abundant evidence that the action 
of the verb is a repeated one and continues for three days at 
a time.—oav γὰρ οἱ λοχαγοὶ πλησίον ἀλλήλων Ot πάντα τὸν χρόνον 
ἀλλήλοις περὶ ἀνδραγαθίας ἀντεποιοῦντο. An. V 211. The πάντα 
in the temporal phrase and the imperfect tense of the verb 
decide unmistakably for the existence of continuance in the 
verb and the meaning of extent of time for the construction. 
- ὥστε χρὴ σκοπεῖν τινα αὑτὰ Kal μὴ μετεώρῳ TH πόλει ἀξιοῦν κινδυ- 
νεύειν καὶ ἀρχῆς ἄλλης ὀρέγεσθαι πρὶν ἣν ἔχομεν βεβαιωσώμεθα, εἰ Χαλ- 
κιδῆς γε οἱ ἐπὶ Θράκης, ἔτη τοσαῦτα ἀφεστῶτες ἡμῶν, ἔτι ἀχειρωτοί 
εἶσι καὶ ἄλλοι τινὲς κατὰ τὰς ἠπείρους ἐνδοιαστῶς ἀκροῶνται. Thuc. 
VI 10 5. The second perfect with the force of a present, 
“‘ being in a state of revolt,’ together with τοσαῦτα ἔτη gives 
with distinctness the notion of duration.—Aéyovra: yap ὑπὸ 
Σκυθέων καὶ Ἑλλήνων τῶν ἐν τῇ Σκυθικῇ κατοικημένων ws ἔτεος Exdo- 
του ἅπαξ τῶν Νευρῶν ἕκαστος λύκος γίνεται ἡμέρας ὀλίγας καὶ αὗτις 
ὀπίσω ἐς τὠυτὸ κατίστατα. Hdt. IV 105. γίνεται not only 
means “to become,” but also has the additional notion of 
“to be,” which modified by ὀλίγας ἡμέρας indicates duration. 
—hi γὰρ τὸ στενὴν εἶναι τὴν ὁδὸν ὅλην τὴν ἡμέραν ἣ ἀνάβασις αὐτοῖς 
ἐγένετο καὶ κατάβασις. An. 1V 1 το. The verbal idea is not 
so much in the verb as it is in the subject; and the same 


thought might have been expressed by ἀνέβησαν καὶ κατέβη- 
cov. The verbal idea in the nouns, “going up, going 
down,” which is plainly the meaning from the context, 
implies the duration which is definitely expressed in the tem- 
poral phrase with the word of measure.—doov δὲ χρόνον οἵ τε 
Πελοποννήσιοι ἦσαν ἐν τῇ γῇ TH ᾿Αθηναίων καὶ οἱ ᾿Αθηναῖοι ἐστράτευον 
ἐπὶ τῶν νεῶν, ἡ νόσος ἔν τε τῇ στρατιᾷ τοὺς ᾿Αθηναίους ἔφθειρε κτλ. 
Thuc. II 571. The predicate, ἐν τῇ γῇ; and ὅσον χρόνον give 
to ἦσαν the force of ἔμειναν. 
εἰ yap ἐγὼν οὕτω ye Διὸς πάις αἰγιόχοιο 


εἴην ἥματα πάντα.----ἰ]. 13 825-6. 


Nothing could be more colorless than πάις---εἴην, yet the 

meaning of the combination when joined with ἤματα πάντα 
“forever,” contains the element of duration.—déka μὲν δὴ 

ἔτεα εἶναί μιν τυφλόν, ἑνδεκάτῳ δὲ ἔτεϊ κελ. Hdt. I] 111. This is 
another something like the preceding. τυφλὸν εἶναι is here 

a state of being and in itself denotes the continuance limited 

in the δέκα éry.—6é δ᾽ ἐπεὶ τοῦτο ἤκουσε, θέσθαι κελεύσας τὰ ὅπλα καὶ 
ὀλίγον χρόνον ἀναπαύσας, ἀπῆγε πάλιν τὸ στράτευμα ἐπὶ τὸ Ἥραιον. 

Hell. IV 5 8. ἀναπαύσας in this passage means “‘to cause 

to halt.” The temporal phrase is not dependent on the idea 

of causation but upon its result, the being in a state of rest, 

which of itself expresses duration, and if in addition it is 

taken with ὀλίγον χρόνον, it is still more evident.—xol ὃ "Ayis 

δεξάμενος τοὺς λόγους αὐτός, καὶ ov μετὰ τῶν πλειόνων οὐδὲ αὐτὸς 
βουλευσάμενος ἄλλ᾽ ἢ ἑνὶ ἀνδρὶ κοινώσας τῶν ἐν τέλει ξυστρατευομένων, 

σπένδεται τέσσαρας μῆνας. Thuc. V 60 I. σπένδομαι is somewhat 

like the verb, ἀναπαύω, Hell. IV 5 8, in that the temporal 

phrase does not depend upon the idea of making in “to make 

a truce,’ but upon that of the truce, as if it were “he makes 

a truce lasting four months.” Yet it is quite probable that. 
the case of the temporal phrase under such circumstances is 

of more importance than in the other instances cited, because 

if the genitive of the same phrase were used we should doubt- 

less be forced to consider it as depending on the causative 

part of the verb. 


In the same manner the rest might be explained. The 
notion of duration is plain enough, when the context and 
the meaning of the verb do not exclude it, and there is 
added a temporal phrase denoting measure. The whole 
setting tends to give the verbal idea this or that turn, and 
in all the examples studied, though many of the component 
parts of the sentence may be neutral, there are none that 
are not consonant with the idea of extent. 

Given then a noun whose primary meaning is that of 
time, a modifier expressing measure, a verb denoting con- 
tinuance, which may or may not be in a tense of the same 
character, with here and there the addition of another ele- 
ment indicative of duration, we are limited to but one inter- 
pretation of the whole, namely, that of extent of time, and 
that without resorting to the inflectional ending. But this 
is not saying that the case ending has no weight at all. 
It naturally does aid, inasmuch as the accusative case is 
regularly accompanied by the notion of extent. The attrib- 
utive word of measure excludes all possibility of considering 
the period of time designated as a point in time. And such 
an attributive, though not in itself debarring the idea of a 
period of time within the limits of which an action takes 
place, yet in connection with a verb denoting continuance 
does away with all likelihood of causing this notion to arise 
in the mind. For to anticipate a later discussion, the geni- 
tive of a temporal noun modified by a word of measure, 
when expressing the limits of the time within which an 
action is performed, depends upon verbs of momentary or 
completed action, or if upon one that denotes continuance, it 
is evident from the general context that continuance or repe- 
tition is not thought of. 

Turning now to the second division of the modified nouns 
of time in the accusative, namely, to those that are modified 
by words that do not indicate measure, we see that the modi- 
fying words (see p. 43) are all of a more or less demonstra- 
tive character, pointing out a particular period. These cases 
must be examined more closely than the preceding, as an 


important element in determining the meaning of the con- 
struction is not present. For in the former class it was 
found that the word of measure gave very material aid, but 
in this the modifying word is neutral. The aids upon which 
we have to rely in the present instance are the word itself, 
its number, and the context, in which the verb in general 
is most important. Since then by reason of the nature of 
the modifying word nothing may be gained from a further 
subdivision on that basis, a classification will be made 
according to the meaning of the verb along the same lines 
as before, but with some necessary additional sub-classes. 

I. The first main class consists of verbs all of which 
plainly contain the element of duration. But since no assist- 
ance is forthcoming from the neutral modifier of the tem- 
poral noun, they cannot all limit the meaning of the phrase 
to extent of time. As a result they must be divided into 
sub-classes, one of which will contain those verbs capable 
in themselves of determining the meaning, another those 
which with the aid of the context are able to do so, and 
still a third, those verbs which, being neither aided by the 
context nor strong enough of themselves to limit the mean- 
ing, compel us to call upon the case ending to decide it. 

i. The first subdivision is of verbs whose element of dura- 
tion is so strong that when accompanied by a temporal 
phrase they exclude every meaning but that of extent of 
time. 

διαγίγνομαι, aor. An. 1 το 19, IV 5 5. 

διανυκτερεύω, aor. Hell. V 4 3. 

διατελέω, pres. (with suppl. part.) Hdt. V 86. 

διαχειμάζω, imp. Thuc. VI 88 5. 

διημερεύω, aor. Hdt. V 4 3. 

ἐμμένω, aor. Thuc. III 1 2; fut. Thuc. IV 118 14. 

μένω, pres. Hell. III 2 6; aor. Hdt. VIII 9, Thuc. V 65 
§, An. Illa 1, 4 18, LViegSoVealde, Hell. fs. ga ν 6 αὶ 

oixew, imp. Hdt. VI 86a. 

περιμένω, pres. An. II τ 3; aor. Thuc. VII 741. 

περιοικέω, imp. Hdt. V 58. 

ὑπομένω, pres. Hdt. VI 51. 


διεγένοντο δὲ τὴν νύκτα πῦρ καίοντες. An. IV 55. ἐπεὶ δὲ εἰσῆλ- 
θον εἰς τὴν πόλιν, διενυκτέρευσαν μὲν ἐκείνην τὴν νύκτα παρὰ Χάρωνί 
τινι; καὶ τὴν ἐπιοῦσαν δὲ ἡμέραν διημέρευσαν. Hell. V 43. These 
verbs together with νυκτερεύω and διαχειμάζω are evidently 
followed by a double construction, since the noun that fol- 
lows them is expressed in the verb and denotes the time spent 
as well. They are used alone with the same meaning. (cf. 
Thuc. VI 74 2,An. ΙΝ 4 11,5 11, Hell. V 44.) éppetvavres 
δὲ χρόνον ov εἶχον τὰ σιτία ἀνεχώρησαν καὶ διελύθησαν κατὰ πόλεις. 
Thuc. III 1 2. The relative clause takes the place οἵ a 
modifying word.—xai λέγει ὅτι ταύτην μὲν τὴν ἡμέραν περιμένοιεν 
αὑτούς. An. II 1 3. 

2. The second sub-class is made up of verbs which denot- 
ing continuance themselves are aided by the plural number 
of the temporal phrase. With one exception, πενθέουσ Hdt. 
VI 58, they express repeated action indicated by the tense 
and the number of the noun of time. These factors taken 
together limit the meaning to extent of time. (cf. Hdt. I 
186, p. 61.) 

βόσκομαι, pres. Hdt. IX 93. 

δαίνυμαι, pres. Hdt. III 18. 

καταφοιτέω, pres. Hdt. VII 125. 

πενθέω, pres. Hdt. VI 58. 

πορεύομαι, pres. Hdt. IX 37. 

φυλάττω, imp. An. VII 2 21. 

χιλόω, imp. An. VII 2 21. 

λειμών ἐστι ἐν τῷ προαστείῳ ἐπίπλεος κρεῶν ἑφθῶν πάντων τῶν 
τετραπόδων, ἐς τὸν τὰς μὲν νύκτας ἐπιτηδεύοντας τιθέναι τὰ κρέα τοὺς 
ἐν τέλεϊ ἑκάστους ἐόντας τῶν ἀστῶν, τὰς δὲ ἡμέρας δαίνυσθαι προσιόντα 
τὸν βουλόμενον. Hdt. II] 18. καταφοιτέοντες γὰρ οἱ λέοντες τὰς 
νύκτας καὶ λείποντες τὰ σφέτερα ἤθεα ἄλλου μὲν οὐδενὸς ἅπτοντο οὔτε 
ὑποζυγίου οὔτε ἀνθρώπου, οἱ δὲ τὰς καμήλους ἐκεράϊζον μούνας. Hdt. 
VII 125. ἐπεὰν δὲ θάψωσι, ἀγορὴ δέκα ἡμερέων οὐκ ἵσταταί σφι οὐδ᾽ 
ἀρχαιρεσίη συνίζει, ἀλλὰ πενθέουσι ταύτας τὰς ἡμέρας. Hdt. VI 58. 
This verb denoting continued not repeated action and the 
plural of the temporal phrase are almost conclusive evidence 
that the meaning is extent of time ; but they do not altogether 


exclude the meaning of the genitive, though it is probably 
true that the genitive plural of a word of time with a demon- 
strative pronoun is not used. But since the demonstrative 
pronoun stands for the numeral in the first of the sentence, 
this does not differ materially from the class of phrases with 
a word of measure. 

3. The third sub-class consists of verbs which, though 
denoting continuance in themselves and with two exceptions 
being reenforced by the tense, are not strong enough to 
exclude the meanings of other constructions, and are not 
aided by anything in the context. Consequently we must 
fall back upon the case as the final deciding factor. 

ἀντικαθέζομαι, pres. Thuc. I 30 4. 

ἀντιστρατοπεδεύομαι, perf. Hell. VII 4 13. 
᾿δῃόω, imp. Thuc. III 91 5. 

ἐπαναχωρέω, imp. An. III 5 13. 

ἐσθίω, imp. An. II 1 6. 

ἡσυχάζω, imp. Thuc. II 81 8. 

καθεύδω, imp. An. VI 3 21. 

οἰκοδομέω, imp. Hdt. II 125. 

ὁρτάζω, imp. Hdt. IX 7. 

πολεμέω, pres. Thuc. V 56 4. 

πολιορκέω, aor. Thuc. VIII τος 1. 

πορεύομαι, pres. Hdt. VII 50, Thuc. IV 68 5; aor. An. IV 
i 1: 

pew, pres. Hdt. II 25. 

ὕει, Hdt. ΠΠ| 117, IV 28, 50. 

φυλάττω, pres. An. IV 21, Thuc. VII 28 2. 

χορεύω, pres. Hdt. I τοι. 

χωρέω, imp. Thuc. IV 103 1. 

For example, the inflectional ending is necessary in deter- 
. mining the difference in the meaning of the following. 

καὶ δειπνοποιησάμενος ἐχώρει τὴν νύκτα, Thuc. IV 103 1. οὗτοι 
δὲ διὰ τῶν φυλάκων βιασάμενοι ἐχώρουν τῆς νυκτὸς ἣ ἐδύνατο. Thuc. 
VII 83 4.—xat γὰρ ot ἀπὸ τῆς ᾿Ελευσῖνος κατὰ τὸ ξυγκείμενον τετρα- 
κισχίλιοι ὁπλῖται τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων καὶ ἱππῆς ἑξακόσιοι τὴν νύκτα πορευό- 


μενοι παρῆσαν. Thuc. ΓΝ 68 5. ἐπεὶ δ᾽ ἀπηγγέλθη ὅτι εἴησαν αἱ 


σπονδαί, παρήγγειλαν οὗ πολέμαρχοι δειπνήσαντας συνεσκευάσθαι πάν- 
τας; ὡς τῆς νυκτὸς πορευσομένους, ὅπως ἅμα τῇ ἡμέρᾳ πρὸς τὸν Κιθαι- 
pave. ἀναβαίνοιεν. Hell. VI 4 25.----καὶ στρατοπεδευσάμενοι ταύτην 
τὴν ἡμέραν ἐν τῇ Τανάγρᾳ ἐδήουν καὶ ἐνηυλίσαντο. Thuc. III οἱ 5. 
ὅμως ἐκείνῃ τῇ ἡμέρᾳ τῶν μὲν συμμάχων ὡς ἀλκιμώτατοι ὄντες ἡγοῦντο. 
Hell. VII 4 30.—ois πᾶσι χρώμενοι κρέα ἕψοντες ἤσθιον ἐκείνην τὴν 
ἡμέραν. An. II 16. For all practical purposes either one 
of the other oblique cases would have expressed the idea in 
the writer’s mind. But the accusative was chosen because 
by reason of its close connection with the notion of extent 
it best expressed the writer’s point of view, namely, that at 
the meals during that day meat was the food.—rod δὲ θέρεος 
ἡ χιὼν ἡ ἐν τῷ χειμῶνι πεσοῦσα, ἐοῦσα ἀμφιλαφής, τηκομένη πάντοθεν 
ἐκδιδοῖ ἐς τὸν Ἴστρον. αὕτη τε δὴ ἡ χιὼν ἐκδιδοῦσα ἐς αὐτὸν συμπλη- 
θύει καὶ ὄμβροι πολλοί τε καὶ λάβροι σὺν airy: ὕει γὰρ δὴ τὸ θέρος. 
Hdt. IV 50. 

II. The second class contains those verbs each of which 
has two or more meanings. Of these meanings the particu- 
lar one employed expresses duration. These verbs will be 
subdivided like those of the preceding class. 

1. The first subdivision includes those verbs in which the 
element of continuance is so strong in the particular mean- 
ing used that any temporal noun, though modified by a 
demonstrative pronoun, must denote extent of time. 

dvéxw, to hold out, imp. Hell. I 6 20. 

αὐλίζομαι, to bivouac, to pass the night, pres. Hdt. IX 37; 
imp. Thuc. VII 29 3, An. VI 4 1; aor. Thuc. IV 45 1, 
Pe χὰ seks pe 

διάγω, to continue (with part.) imp. Hell. IV 8 7. 

éréxw, to wait, to delay, aor. Hdt. IX 92, Thuc. VII 74 1. 

κατοικέω, perf. Hdt. IV 23. 

περιγίγνομαι, to hold out, aor. Thuc. VIII 2 2. 

τὴν μὲν οὖν ἡμέραν οὕτως ἀνεῖχον, εἰς δὲ τὴν ἑσπέραν, ἐπεὶ σκότος εἴη, 
ἐξεβίβαζεν, ὡς μὴ καταδήλους εἶναι τοῖς πολεμίοις ταῦτα ποιοῦντας. 
Hell. 1 6 2ο. καὶ τὸν μὲν χειμῶνα ἐν τοιούτοις ὄντες διῆγον. Hell. 
ΙΝ 87. οἱ δὲ Ἕλληνες ἐπισχόντες ταύτην τὴν ἡμέρην τῇ ὑστεραίῃ 
ἐκαλλιερένντο. Hdt. ΙΧ 92. ὑπὸ δενδρέῳ δὲ ἕκαστος κατοίκηται 


τὸν μὲν χειμῶνα ἐπεὰν τὸ δένδρεον περικαλύψῃ πίλῳ στεγνῷ λευκῷ, τὸ 
δὲ θέρος ἄνευ widov. Hdt. 1V 23. Perhaps the verb here is not 
quite strong enough; but since the two seasons are given 
thus embracing the whole year, there seems to be no doubt 
that the meaning may be ascertained without calling upon 
the case. 

2. The second division of this class is made up of a few 
verbs, which, though the contained notion of duration and 
the tense are not strong enough of themselves to limit the 
meaning of the case construction to extent of time, yet taken 
together with some word or words of the context do so limit 
the meaning. 

ἄγω, to lead, pres. Thuc. V 54 3. 

ἀναστρέφομαι, to dwell, pres. Hell. VI 3 17. 

λῃστεύω, to plunder, imp. Thuc. IV 45 2. 

κοιμάομαι, to sleep (διασκηνήσαντες), aor. An. IV 5 29. 

παρασκευάζομαι, to make preparation, imp. Thuc. I 31 1. 

φέρω καὶ ἄγω, imp. Hell. III 2 30. 

᾿Αργεῖοι δ᾽ ἀναχωρησάντων αὐτῶν, τοῦ πρὸ τοῦ Καρνείου μηνὸς ἐξελ- 
θόντες τετράδι φθίνοντος καὶ ἄγοντες τὴν ἡμέραν ταύτην πάντα τὸν 
χρόνον, ἐσέβαλον ἐς τὴν ᾿Επιδαυρίαν καὶ ἐδήουν. Thuc. V 54 3. 
In this passage in addition to the present tense of the par- 
ticiple and the element of duration in the verb there is the 
phrase, πάντα τὸν χρόνον, supplementing τὴν ἡμέραν ταύτην, 
which quite debars any meaning but that of extent.—xai τὸ 
μὲν λοιπὸν θέρος καὶ τὸν ἐπιόντα χειμῶνα ὑπὸ τοῦ Λυσίππου καὶ τῶν 
περὶ αὐτὸν ἐφέρετο καὶ ἤγετο ἡ τῶν ᾿Ηλείων χώα. Hell. III 2 30. 
Here too besides the tense of continuance and the element 
of duration in the verb is the presence of τὸ λοιπὸν θέρος con- 
nected by καί with τὸν ἐπιόντα χειμῶνα. It has already been 
shown that such a combination as the first phrase and the 
verb gives extent of time. Hence the second member joined 
as it is must have the same force. Thuc. I 31 1 may be 
explained in the same way.—xkat φρούριον καταστησάμενοι ἐλῃ- 
στευον τὸν ἔπειτα χρόνον τήν Te Tpolyviay γῆν καὶ ᾿Αλιάδα καὶ ᾽᾿Ἐπιδαυ- 
ρίαν. Thuc. 1V 45 2. The verb in this sentence contains 
the same elements as the above and is so reenforced by the 


BOE eae 


character of the temporal phrase as to leave little doubt that 

extent of time is the meaning. The peculiar character of 
the phrase consists first, in the word χρόνος “‘time,” which 
by reason of its indefiniteness and the difficulty of conceiv- 
ing it as a unit like day or month implies a period of more 
or less extension. In the second’ place, the attributive, 
ἔπειτα “following, future,’ and the article do not alter this 
conception but rather favor it, so that all taken together 
the phrase seems pretty clearly to denote duration. For a 
similar expression compare Hell. VI 3 17, τὸν παρελθόντα 
χρόνον. 

3. The third subdivision has in it two verbs denoting 
duration, which are insufficient in themselves to determine 
the meaning and receive no assistance from the context. As 
a result the case is the deciding factor. 

νέμω, to tend flocks, imp. Hdt. II 128. 

στρατεύομαι, to campaign, aor. Hell. V. 2 43. 

καὶ τοῦτο μὲν στρατευσάμενος τὸ θέρος διῆκε καὶ τὸ Μακεδονικὸν 
στράτευμα καὶ τὸ τοῦ Δέρδα. Hell. V 2 43. 

III. The third main class comprises verbs that have in 
them a more or less vague notion of duration. These are 
subdivided (1) into those that are aided by one thing or 
another in the context—both together restricting the mean- 
ing to extent of time; and (2) into those that are not 
thus assisted. 

I. ἀνιέναι vov, pres. Hdt. Ν᾽ 28. 

ἀπαειρέεσκον, Hdt. I 186. 

ἀπολείπω, imp. Thuc, III 21 4. 

dpxw, pres. An. VI 6 13, Hell. III 2 6. 
ἀφίημι, pres. An. V 8 24. 

δίδημι, pres. An. V ὃ 24. 

εἶναι ἄτοκος, pres. Hdt. V 41. 

ἐλινύω, pres. Hdt. I 67. 

ἔχειν ἐν φυλακῇ, imp. Thuc. IV 38 4. 
ἔχειν ἑαυτὸν κατ᾽ οἶκον, pres. Hdt. III 79. 
καταδύνω, pres. Hdt. IX 37. 
καταφρονέω, pres. Hell. VII 4 30. 


ἜΑ τὸ ἜΡΟΝ 


κλέπτω, pres. Hdt. I 186. 
λάμπω, pres. Hdt. IT 44. 
παύομαι, (with part.) perf. An. VII6 9; pluperf. Thuc. 
He Ee + 
παρακαίω, pres. Hdt. II 130. 
προσβολὰς ποιεῖσθαι, imp. Hdt. IV 128. 
πράττω, imp. An. VI τ 18. 
συγκατακληίω, pres. Hdt. I 182. 
τίθημι, pres. Hdt. III 18. 
χράομαι, pres. Hell. V τ τ. 
Some illustrations of the principle applied in these cases 
will be in point. 
τὸ δὲ θέρος ὕων οὐκ ane. Hdt. IV 28. The verb signifies 
“cease” and has with it the supplementary participle. The 
negative makes it equivalent to d&dyw with a participle (cf. 
Hell. IV 87). The idea of duration so explicit in the verbs 
is all that is needed to give to τὸ θέρος the force of “‘ through- 
out the summer.’’ Like this are τοῦτον τὸν ἐνιαυτὸν ... διαπεμ- 
πομένους μὴ ἐλινύειν, Hdt. 1 67, and τὸν δεινὸν χειμῶνα στρατευό- 
μενοι... ov πεπαύμεθα, An. VII 6 ο. 
τὰς δὲ νύκτας τὰ ξύλα ταῦτα ἀπαειρέεσκον τοῦδε εἵνεκα, ἵνα μὴ δια- 
φοιτέοντες τὰς νύκτας κλέπτοιεν παρ᾽ ἀλλήλων. Hdt. 1186. This 
sentence presents a verb in the imperfect tense denoting 
repeated action with a temporal phrase in the plural number 
assisting in expressing the repeated action. This does not 
differ materially from Hell. Il 1 24, ταῦτα δ᾽ ἐποίει τέτταρας 
ἡμέρας, in which ταῦτα refers to the reconnaissance under 
Lysander’s orders by certain triremes previous to the battle 
of Aegospotami. This reconnaissance was not made through- 
out the whole of the four days, nor was the taking up of 
the planks of the bridge throughout the whole of a day. 
Yet in the one with a definite number of days there is no 
hesitation in deciding that extent of time is the meaning; 
why need there be when the number is indefinite? The 
deciding factors are the repeated action of the verb and the 
number of the noun. Other instances of the same general 


niall fica 


nature are: τὰς νύκτας καταδύνων, Hdt. 1X 37; διαφοιτέοντες τὰς 
νύκτας κλέπτοιεν, Hdt. I 186; λάμποντος τὰς νύκτας, Hdt. II 44; 
ἐποιέοντο. .. Tas νύκτας προσβολάς, Hdt.1V 128; ovyxaraxAnierar τὰς 
νύκτας, Hdt. I 182; τὰς νύκτας ἐπιτηδεύοντας τιθέναι, Hdt. III 18; 
τὰς νύκτας ἀπέλειπον, Thuc. III 21 4; τὰς μὲν ἡμέρας διδέασι, τὰς δὲ 
νύκτας ἀφιᾶσι, An. V 8 24. 

καὶ ταύτην μὲν τὴν ἡμέραν καὶ τὴν ἐπιοῦσαν νύκτα ἐν φυλακῇ εἶχον 
αὐτοὺς οἱ ᾿Αθηναῖοι. Thuc. IV 38 4. εἶχον with its adjunct, ἐν 
φυλακῇ © to have or to keep under guard,” gives a convinc- 
ing indication of duration. But when followed not by one 
temporal phrase but by two connected by καί, the two 
periods being consecutive, extent of time is the only rational 
interpretation.—ravrynv τὴν ἡμέρην θεραπεύουσι Πέρσαι κοινῇ μάλιστα 
τῶν ἡμερέων καὶ ἐν αὐτῇ ὁρτὴν μεγάλην ἀνάγουσι, ἢ κέκληται ὑπὸ Περ- 
σέων μαγοφόνια, ἐν τῇ μάγον οὐδένα ἔξεστι φανῆναι ἐς τὸ φῶς, ἀλλὰ 
κατ᾽ οἴκους ἑωυτοὺς οἱ μάγοι ἔχουσι τὴν ἡμέρην ταύτην. Hdt. III 79. 
As the verbal idea is like that of the above example, Thuc. 
IV 38 4, and the clause, ἐν τῇ κτλ., is repeated in the one 
beginning ἀλλὰ κτλ., it is quite clear that the whole of the 
day is meant. 

θυμιήματα δὲ παρ᾽ αὐτῇ παντοῖα καταγίζουσι ἀνὰ πᾶσαν ἡμέρην, 
νύκτα δὲ ἑκάστην πάννυχος λύχνος παρακαίεται. Hdt. I] 130. This 
is peculiar in that it is the only example of a noun of time 
modified by ἕκαστος in the accusative case—all others being 
in the genitive, with one in the dative. The writer, as if 
the sense were not altogether clear considering the regular 
use of ἕκαστος, has added πάννυχος, which takes all weight from 
the case of ἑκάστην νύκτα. 

The following may be explained as was τὸν ἔπειτα χρόνον 
ἐλήστευον, Thuc. IV 45 2 (see p. 59): τὸν πρότερον χρόνον 
droxos ἐοῦσα, Hdt. V 41; ἄρχουσι τὸν viv χρόνον, An. VI 6 13. 
τὸν πρόσθεν χρόνον καταφρονούμενοι, Hell. VII 4 30; τὸν πρόσθεν 
χρόνον ἔπραττον, An. VI 1 18; ἐπιμειξίᾳ χρωμένων τὸν πρόσθεν 
χρόνον, Hell. V τ 1. 

2. Verbs not assisted by the context. 

ἀγρυπνέω, aor. Hell. VII 2 το. 

ἀκμάζω, imp. Hdt. II] 57, VI 127. 


—63— 


dxovw, imp. Hdt. V 83. 

ἀνθεύω, aor. Hdt. VI 127. 

ἀνθίστημι, pres. Thuc. III 39 8. 

ἀπελαύνω, pres. Hdt. II 24. 

ἀφίημι, fut. An. V 8 24. 

γίγνομαι, pres. Hdt. ΓΝ 181, VIII 15; imp. Hdt. VIII 107. 

déw, fut. An. V 8 24. 

εἰμί: ἐούσης ἐπιμιξίης, Hdt. 1 68; od εἶναι τὰς γεφύρας ταύτας, 
Hdt. 175; ἦν ἔθνος οὐδὲν ἐν τῇ ᾿Ασί, Hdt. 1 79; ἦν ἀνδριάς, Hdt. 
I 183; ἦν χρηστήριον, Hdt. II 52; ἐν λόγοισι ἐών, Hdt. III 148; 
ἦν ἀκήρατον, Hdt. 1V 152; ἐὼν ἐν Σάμῳ, Hdt. 1V 163; ἦσαν 
φίλοι, Hdt. VI 89; εἶναι σφίσι οἰκέτας, Hdt. VI 137; ἐοῦσαν 
dpOpinv, Hdt. IX 37; ἐν φυλακῇ ἦσαν, Thuc. III 74 3; ἡσυχία 
qv, Thuc. V 35 8; ἄχρηστοι ἦσαν, An. III 4 26; ἦσαν ἐπὶ τοῦ 
ὄρους, An. IV 3 7; ἐν Γορδίῳ ὄντες, Hell. I 4 1. 

ἔχειν μετὰ χεῖρας, imp. Hdt. VII τ6β. 

ἰέναι ἐς λόγους, imp. Thuc. V 17 2. 

ἐπικρατέω, imp. Hdt. IV 162. 

ἔρχομαι, aor. An, III 1 3. 

καθίστημι, 2 pluperf. Thuc. VIII 76 1. 

καίω, pres. Hdt. III 104. 

κατέχω, pres. Hdt. I 65. 

καταλείπω, Hdt. IV 172. 

μεταχειρίζω, aor. Thuc. VII 87 1. 

παύομαι, aor. An. VI 4 13. 

πιέζω, pres. Hdt. II 25. 

ἀριθμὸν ποιεῖσθαι, imp. Hdt. VII 59. 

προέχω, imp. Hdt. I 1. 

ῥύομαι, pres. Hdt. IV 135. 

πρὸς θέην τρέπεσθαι, aor. Hdt. VIII 25. 

τυγχάνω, (with pres. part.) imp. Hdt. I 29, IV 144, V 30; 
aor. Thuc. VII 73 2; (with perf. part.) aor. Hdt. VII 208. 

τυραννεύω, pres. Hdt. 1 59; imp. Hat. I 73, 77. 

φαίνομαι, pres. (with pres. part.) Thuc. III 88 3; (with 
aor. part.) Thuc. VIII 97 2. 

χράομαι, pres. Hdt. II 95. 

ἔωθε ποιέειν, Hdt. 11 25. 


—64— 


The accusative temporal phrases with these verbs need 
the inflectional ending as the deciding factor in determin- 
ing the meaning of the case construction. For example 
compare the following with one another. 

ἐπὶ δὲ τὰ ὅπλα πολλοὶ οὐκ ἦλθον ταύτην τὴν νύκτα. An. III τ 3. 
ὥστ᾽ ἐκείνης τῆς νυκτὸς οὐδεὶς ἐκοιμήθη. Hell. II 2 5. ταύτῃ μὲν 
οὖν τῇ ἡμέρᾳ οὐκ ἐμαχέσατο βασιλεύς. An. 1.7 17. These are so 
much alike that either one of the other cases might have been 
used in the first instance and still the sense would have been 
virtually the same. The reason that seems to have induced 
Xenophon to use the accusative was the fact it was a 
stronger form of expression because of its close connection 
with the idea of extent of time.—é δὲ Νεῖλος, ἐὼν ἄνομβρος, 
ἑλκόμενος δὲ ὑπὸ τοῦ ἡλίου, μοῦνος ποταμῶν τοῦτον τὸν χρόνον 
οἰκότως αὐτὸς ἑωυτοῦ ῥέει πολλῷ ὑποδεέστερος ἢ τοῦ θέρεος: τότε 
μὲν γὰρ πάντων τῶν ὑδάτων ἴσον ἕλκεται, τὸν δὲ χειμῶνα μοῦνος 
πιέζετα. Hidt. I] 25. Here again the difference is so slight, 
that Herodotus seems to use whatever case comes first to 
hand, not only here but throughout this section.—vopiovor 
δὲ of ἐκείνῃ ἄνθρωποι ἐν τῇ Ἱερᾷ ws ὃ Ἥφαιστος χαλκεύει, ὅτι τὴν 
νύκτα φαίνεται πῦρ ἀναδιδοῦσα πολὺ καὶ τὴν ἡμέραν καπνόν. Thuc. 
III 88 3. ᾿Αθηναῖοι μὲν δυοῖν νεοῖν ἐναντίαιν αἰεὶ τὴν νῆσον περιπλέον- 
τες τῆς ἡμέρας (τῆς δὲ νυκτὸς καὶ ἁπάσαις περιώρμουν, πλὴν τὰ πρὸς 
τὸ πέλαγος, ὁπότε ἄνεμος cin. Thuc. IV 23 2.--- συνέπιπτε δὲ ὥστε 
τὰς αὐτὰς ταύτας ἡμέρας τάς τε ναυμαχίας γίνεσθαι ταύτας καὶ τὰς πεζο- 
μαχίας τὰς ἐν Θερμοπύλῃσι. Hdt. VIII 15. It is a question 
whether this might not be classed with the preceding group, 
since continuance is expressed in the meaning of the subjects 
of the infinitive and the temporal phrase is plural. Yet it 
is probably better as it is, since there is no notion of repeti- 
tion, and without falling back upon the case there might 
be a confusion with the meaning of the genitive plural, not- 
withstanding the probability that the genitive plural of such 
phrases was not used. Another example of the same kind 
though with a stronger element of duration in the verb 
is: ἡμεῖς δὲ τὰς πρὸ τοῦ ἡμέρας ταύτην τὴν στρατηλασίην καὶ τὸ κάρτα 
εἴχομεν μετὰ χεῖρας. Hdt. VII 168. cf. Thuc. VII 87 1.— 


--ὖς-.- 


ταύτην μὲν οὖν τὴν ἡμέραν ἐπαύσαντο. An. VI 4 13. In this 
sentence it is the case of the temporal phrase that gives 
the meaning, “they rested from marching the whole of 
that day ;” for otherwise it would not be distinguished from 
“they stopped marching on that day.” 

IV. There are still remaining (1) a few verbs employed 
by Herodotus with the accusative that do not express dura- 
tion, and (2) some others which, though they possibly may 
do so, yet by reason of the setting do not convince one that 
the writer had extent of time in mind when using with 
them an accusative temporal phrase, but a desire to date. 

1. ἐμπίπτω, aor. Hdt. VI 27. 

πέμπω, to send, pres. Hdt. VI 22; aor. Hdt. VII 151. 
στέλλω, imp. Hdt. IV 147. 

For the sentences containing these verbs see p. 39. 

2. οὗτος μέν νυν ταῦτα ἔπρησσε, τὸν αὐτὸν δὲ τοῦτον χρόνον ἐγίνετο 
ἐπὶ Λιβύην ἄλλος στρατιῆς μέγας στόλος Hdt. Ν᾿ 145. εἰ μέν 
νυν οἱ παρεόντες Λακεδαιμονίων ὅμοιοι ἐγένοντο ταύτην τὴν ἡμέρην 
᾿Αρχίῃ τε καὶ Λυκώπῃ, αἱρέθη ἂν Σάμος. Hat. IIL 55. νηυσὶ μέν 
νυν Ἴωνες ἄκροι γενόμενοι ταύτην τὴν ἡμέρην ὑπερεβάλοντο τοὺς Φοίνι- 
Kas, καὶ τούτων Σάμιοι ἡρίστευσαν. Hdt. V 112. ἡ δὲ Αἰγιναίη 
(τριήρης); τῆς ἐτριηράρχεε ᾿Ασωνίδης, καί τινά σφι θόρυβον παρέσχε 
Πυθέω τοῦ ᾿Ισχενόου ἐπιβατεύοντος, ἀνδρὸς ἀρίστου γενομένου ταύτην 
τὴν ἡμέρην. Hdt. VII τὅτ. ἔφη δὲ Δίκαιος 6 Θεοκύδεος ἀνὴρ 
᾿Αθηναῖος, φυγάς τε καὶ παρὰ Μήδοισι λόγιμος γενόμενος τοῦτον τὸν 
χρόνον, ἐπείτε ἐκείρετο ἣ ᾿Αττικὴ χώρη ὑπὸ τοῦ πεζοῦ στρατοῦ τοῦ 
Ἐέρξεω. Hdt. VIII 65. τὸν χρόνον δὲ τοῦτον, ὡς λέγουσι Συβαρῖ- 
ται, σφέας τε αὐτοὺς καὶ Τῆλυν τὸν ἑωυτῶν βασιλέα ἐπὶ Κρότωνα μέλ- 
λειν στρατεύεσθαι. Hdt. V 44. 

In Hdt. III 55 no ambiguity would have arisen had the 
dative been used. There is nothing besides the case in this 
passage nor in the two following, V 112, VII 181, to show 
that the contests lasted throughout the day. Hdt. VIII 
65 is very similar in meaning. Such passages as the above 
open up the question of Herodotus’ use of the phrase τοῦτον 
tov χρόνον. Did he in every instance intend to express 
extent of time? It may be a purely subjective feeling on 


5 


Ὅν Fa 


the part of the writer, but it scarcely seems possible that 
he did, especially when it is considered that the dative of 
this phrase is not used either by him or by any of the 
other authors drawn from in this study. Hence it appears 
that the phrase is stereotyped with Herodotus, a catch-all 
for anything like “during, throughout, or at this time.” 
The classification as given above is most conservative, and 
where there was a hint that it might have the meaning of 
extent of time it has been classed accordingly. This much 
may be said in support of the view that it expresses duration, 
namely, that the verbs are all in tenses of continuance or 
are copulative. The following will show some of the 
peculiarities. 

6 δὲ Νεῖλος, ἐὼν ἄνομβρος, ἑλκόμενος δὲ ὑπὸ τοῦ ἡλίου, μοῦνος ποτα- 
μῶν τοῦτον τὸν χρόνον οἰκότως αὐτὸς ἑωυτοῦ ῥέει πολλῷ ὑποδεέστερος 
ἢ τοῦ θέρεος. Hdt. I] 25. Note that τοῦτον τὸν χρόνον corre- 
sponds to τοῦ θέρεος. τοῦτον δὲ τὸν χρόνον (ὃ ἥλιος) καίει πολλῷ 
μᾶλλον ἢ τῇ μεσαμβρίῃ τὴν Ἑλλάδα. Hdt. II] 104. Here the 
accusative and dative are together, with a genitive, μεσαμ- 
Bpins, in the sentence preceding. γενόμενος yap ἐν Βυζαντίῳ 
ἐπύθετο ἑπτακαίδεκα ἔτεσι πρότερον Καλχηδονίους κτίσαντας τὴν χώρην 
Βυζαντίων, πυθόμενος δὲ ἔφη Καλχηδονίους τοῦτον τὸν χρόνον τυγχάνειν 
ἐόντας τυφλούς. Hdt. IV 144. τοῦτον τὸν χρόνον evidently 
refers to the time when they settled there. cf. Hdt. V 30 
(see p. 40). 

There are some that clearly may express extent of time, as: 
ὅσοι τὴν Λακεδαίμονα τοῦτον τὸν χρόνον οἴκεον. Hdt. VI 86a. ἐν 
δὲ τῇ Σπάρτῃ τὄῦτον τὸν χρόνον ὑπομένων Δημάρητος ὃ ᾿Αρίστωνος 
διέβαλλε τὸν Κλεομένεα. Hdt. VI 51. περιοίκεον δέ σφεας τὰ 
πολλὰ τῶν χώρων τοῦτον τὸν χρόνον Ἑλλήνων Ἴωνες. Hdt. V 58. 
σοφισταί, οἱ τοῦτον τὸν χρόνον ἐτύγχανον ἐόντε. Hat. I 29. 

Some may lean both ways. ἦν δὲ τοῦτον τὸν χρόνον ἔθνος 
οὐδὲν ἐν τῇ ᾿Ασίῃ οὔτε ἀνδρηιότερον οὔτε ἀλκιμώτερον τοῦ Λυδίου. 
Hdt. 179. ὡς λέγεται... τοὺς τὸ μέσον οἰκέοντας... . χορεύειν τε τοῦτον 
τὸν χρόνον καὶ ἐν εὐπαθείῃσι, ἐς ὃ δὴ καὶ τὸ κάρτα ἐπύθοντο. Hat. 1 
1901. τὸ γὰρ δὴ μαντήιον τοῦτο νενόμισται ἀρχαιότατον τῶν ἐν Ἕλλησι 
χρηστηρίων εἶναι, καὶ ἣν τὸν χρόνον τοῦτον μοῦνον. Hdt. II 52. 


—67— 


τὰ δὲ τῶν Σιφνίων πρήγματα ἤκμαζε τοῦτον Tov χρόνον. Hat. III 57 
(VI 127). ὁ δὲ ᾿Αρκεσίλεως τοῦτον τὸν χρόνον ἐν Σάμῳ συνήγειρε 
πάντα ἄνδρα ἐπὶ γῆς ἀναδασμῷ. Hdt. ΙΝ 163. ὃ δὲ ἐν τῷ Δορίσκῳ 
τοῦτον τὸν χρόνον τῆς στρατιῆς ἀριθμὸν ἐποιέετο. Hdt. VII 59. 

In this connection there must also be taken the examples 
of τὸν αὐτὸν τοῦτον χρόνον, which plainly do not present the 
idea of extent. (See p. 39.) 

Before leaving this division of the study of the accusative, 
which deals with the words that are modified, there is a 
small section which must be looked at separately, namely, 
those expressions in the singular with an ordinal numeral, 
that are usually translated by “so many days or years ago.” 
Because of the exceedingly small number of cases found in 
the sources used, additional instances have been supplied 
from Demosthenes. 

Since the accusative case was felt to be connected so inti- 
mately with the relation of extent of time, it is natural to 
suppose that this particular relation grew out of it. If this 
is true, it must have come from an accusative of a noun of 
time limited by an ordinal which clearly indicated extent 
of time. Accordingly a comparison of the two must be 
made to discover what differences exist, and how they may 
have brought about the given idiom. 

1. The instances of extent of time are: ἡ μὲν yap ἐπιτροπὴ 
τούτῳ πρὸς Tov Παρμένοντα τρίτον eros γέγονε Kal ἡ γνῶσις Tod ᾽Αρισ- 
τοκλέους. Dem. 33 23. οὗτος γὰρ ἐπειδὴ ἀφίκετο εἰς Θάσον ἤδη 
μου τέταρτον μῆνα ἐπιτριηραρχοῦντος κτλ. Dem. 50 29. ἔχει δεύ- 
τερον ἔτος τὰ ἡμέτερα καὶ χρῆται τοῖς χρήμασι. Dem. 56 τό (56 
45). ἡ μὲν οὖν σπουδὴ περὶ τῶν ἐν Χερρονήσῳ πραγμάτων ἐστὶ καὶ τῆς 
στρατείας, ἣν ἑνδέκατον μῆνα τουτονὶ Φίλιππος ἐν Θρᾷάκῃ ποιεῖται. 
Dem. 8 2. ἀλλὰ δεύτερον ἔτος τουτὶ καρπούμενος τὰ ἡμέτερα. Dem. 
56 4 (56 34). ἐπειδὴ γὰρ οὐ καθεστηκότος χορηγοῦ τῇ Πανδιονίδι 
φυλῇ τρίτον ἔτος τουτί κτλ. Dem. 21 13. καταλαμβάνει πάντας 
ἔνδον τοὺς κωμήτας. .. καὶ τὴν θυγατέρα τοῦ κωμάρχου ἐνάτην ἡμέραν 
γεγαμημένην. An. Ν᾽ 5 24. This last example may be called 
doubtful. For if Xenophon in writing thought merely of 
the completion of the act, it would mean, “having been 


δι τ ΔΝ 


married eight days ago’; but if he had in mind the con- 
tinuance of the state after the act of completion it should 
be classed as it is, with the meaning, “having been married 
for eight days.”” The same may be said of Thuc. VIII 23 1, 
καὶ τρίτην ἡμέραν αὐτοῦ ἥκοντος ai ᾿Αττικαὶ νῆες πέντε καὶ εἴκοσι ἔπλεον 
ἐς Λέσβον. If the participle contains the concept of comple- 
tion only, the meaning is “two days ago”’; but if it is equiva- 
lent to “having come and now remaining,” then it is plainly 
extent. 

2. The phrases of this class that do not express extent of 
time are: of μὲν τὸ δεξιὸν ἔχοντες ovs ὑμεῖς ἡμέραν πέμπτην τρεψά- 
μενοι ἐδιώξατε. Hell. ΠῚ 4 13. μέμνησθ᾽ ὦ ἄνδρες ᾿Αθηναῖοι, ὅτ᾽ 
ἀπηγγέλθη Φίλιππος ὑμῖν ἐν Θρᾷκῃ τρίτον ἢ τέταρτον ἔτος τουτὶ 
“Hpaiov τεῖχος πολιορκῶν. Dem. 3 4. ἔχοντος δέ μου οὕτως ὡς 
λέγω, κατέπλευσαν δεῦρο τρίτον ἔτος οὗτός τε καὶ πολίτης αὐτοῦ Παρ- 
μένων. Dem. 33 5. ἐξῆλθον ἔτος τουτὶ τρίτον εἰς Πάνακτον φρουρᾶς 
ἡμῖν προγραφείσης. Dem. 54 3. 

A comparison of the two groups shows an exact formal 
likeness in the temporal phrase but a marked difference in 
the verb. In the first all the verbs do or may denote con- 
tinuance, indicated by the tense if not by the meaning; 
and since the thought of the writer was extent of time, 
instead of employing a cardinal numeral and the plural, he 
employs the common inclusive method of counting and uses 
an ordinal with the singular. In the second group the verbs 
denote occurrence only, which is evident from the fact that 
the notion of continuance is not in harmony with the setting. 
But this does not explain how it came about that in the 
latter cases the counting began with the time of the state- 
ment and went backward, just the opposite of the instances 
of extent of time, in which the counting began with the be- 
ginning of the action and came up to the time of the state- 
ment. May not the explanation or connecting link lie in 
those perfects or expressions of completion (such as An. 
IV 5 24 and Thuc. VIII 23 1) which, if the meaning of 
the verb allows, may denote a state of continuance after the 
completion? It was this latter condition of affairs that 


Seth 


connected them with the instances of such phrases clearly 
expressing extent. But an analysis of the thought also 
shows that the completion of the act occurred the given num- 
ber of days or years (counting inclusively) previous to the 
time of the statement. Out of this there seems to have 
grown the use with verbs expressive of occurrence only, by 
reason of which duration was out of the question; but 
because of the analogy to the above connecting link the 
occurrence was conceived as happening this or that many 
days, months or years ago. It is needless to say that the 
inflectional ending is necessary in determining the meaning 
of such instances. 

The second main division in the study of the accusative 
is that of the words that are unmodified. The first, it will 
be remembered, included the modified words, which were 
subdivided into two classes according as the modifying word 
aided in expressing extent or not. 

The first point that is observed in any collection of 
material of this sort is that some instances imply a modi- 
fier. For instance, χρόνος is too general a word to allow 
itself to be used in such a manner as ἡμέρα and νύξ in the 
phrase, καὶ ἡμέραν καὶ νύκτα, “both day and night’’; but 
whenever used alone there is implied an indefinite word of 
measure, stich as twa. For example, οὗτοι τῶν περὶ Kapiny 
ἀνδρῶν μοῦνοί τε ἀντέσχον χρόνον ‘Apréyw κτλ. Hdt. 1175. (cf. 
IX 49.) Od. 4 598-9 implies a little stronger word than τινὰ. 

ἀλλ᾽ ἤδη μοι avidLovow ἑταῖροι 
ἐν Πύλῳ ἠγαθέῃ, σὺ δέ με χρόνον ἐνθάδ᾽ ἐρύκεις. 


Of the other words ἡμέρα and νύξ, as sometimes used by 
Xenophon and Thucydides, and ἐνιαυτός, wherever it is 
found, indicate by their number assisted by the general 
context of the sentences, that they are the same as when the 
accusative of «is is expressed. This characteristic excludes 
the notion of “time when,” and it will be found that the 
nature of the verb or context will in every case shut out the 
meaning generally attributed to the genitive. With regard 


ον. 


DRS BRA RE 
MO ea i es ae ςς 


--γο-- 


to the instances of νύκτα in Homer and Herodotus it is a 
little hard to decide whether they are the same as the ordinary 
τὴν νύκτα OF μίαν νύκτας But since the evidence with some is 
against understanding the numeral and with others not 
convincing, they have all been classed as if the article were 
expressed. The article, it seems, must be understood to 
be implied in the noun, because the concept, night time, is 
too vague and indefinite to give the time of duration. 
The Attic evidently having this feeling never used, as far as 
I can learn, νύκτα or ἡμέραν alone to express this relation, 
but always with the article, though it did if the two nouns 
were used together connected by “both—and,” a question 
treated later. So it is that the material falls into two parts, 
one with the modifier understood, the other wholly free. 

Let us look first at the former, which will be subdivided 
according as (1) a word of measure is understood, or (IT) 
the article. 

I. The first deals with the phrase ἡμέραν καὶ νύκτα, and the 
single words, ἡμέραν, νύκτα, μῆνα, ἐνιαυτόν, and χρόνον. The 
similarity in meaning existing between these and the nouns 
modified by an expressed word of measure leads to the same 
method of classification. The implied word of measure, 
while a strong factor in determining the meaning, is not 
enough, and we are forced as in the other case to turn to the 
verb. The verbs found with the above expressions may be 
classified as follows. 

1. The verbs that plainly express duration. 

ἀντέχω, aor. Hdt. 1 175. 

ἀποσαλεύω, aor. Thuc. I 137 2. 

ζάω, pres. An. II 6 29. 

μένω, aor. Od. 14 244, An. I 2 21. 

πλέω, imp. An. VI 1 14. 

πολιορκέω, imp. Thuc. I 109 4. 

φυλάσσω, pres. Hdt. ΙΧ 93. 

These verbs have so strong an element of duration that 
when joined with a noun whose number together with the 
meaning of the verbs determines that some word of measure 


---γι--- 


is understood with it, there is nothing left for the noun 
of time to denote but extent. 

ὃ δὲ ναύκληρος ποιεῖ τε ταῦτα Kal ἀποσαλεύσας ἡμέραν καὶ νύκτα 
ὑπὲρ τοῦ στρατοπέδου ὕστερον ἀφικνεῖται ἐς Ἔφεσον. Thuc. I 137 
2. This cannot mean “day and night,”’ else xof—xai would 
probably have been used, and a little more than ὕστερον 
would have been called for.—éAcov ἡμέραν καὶ νύκτα πνεύματι 
καλῷ ἐν ἀριστερᾷ ἔχοντες τὴν Παφλαγονίαν. τῇ δ᾽ ἄλλῃ ἀφικνοῦνται 
εἰς Σινώπην. An VI 1 14. This example is interesting in 
that the following sentence beginning τῇ ἄλλῃ κτλ., proves 
conclusively that one day and night is meant.—xat ἐπολιόρκει 
(αὐτοὺς) ἐν αὐτῇ ἐνιαυτὸν καὶ ἕξ μῆνας. Thuc. 1109 4. διὸ ἔμει- 
ναν ἡμέραν ἐν τῷ πεδίῳ. An. 1 2 21. 

2. The second group of these verbs consists of those that 
have several meanings, of which the one used expresses 
duration as strongly as those of the preceding class. 

βόσκω, to maintain, pres. Thuc. VII 48 5. 

éréxw, to delay, aor. Hdt. VI 129, VII 223, IX 49, Thuc. 
I 137 4. 

ἐρύκω, to detain (a guest), Od. 4 599. 

κατέχω, to detain, pres. Hdt. VI 128. 

mepipepw, to hold out, fut. Thuc. VII 28 3. 

tAdw, to endure, aor. Od. 1 288, 2 219. 

No examples need be given, as these do not differ from 
those of the preceding group. 

3. The third division of these verbs comprises those which, ἡ 
expressing duration in a more or less vague way, are aided 
by the context. 

ἄρχω, aor. Hell. VI 4 34. 

γίγνομαι, aor. Hdt. V 116. 

δορυφορέω, imp. Hdt. II 168. 

εἰμί: ὄντος ἐν βασιλείᾳ, Hell. III] 3 4; τὴν ἐκεχειρίαν εἶναι, 
Thuc. IV 118 12; at σπονδαὶ ἔσονται, Thuc. IV 118 10. 

ἔχω, pres. Hdt. ΠῚ 24. 

σπένδομαι, aor. Thuc. ΓΝ 114 2. 

6 δ᾽ ad πολύφρων ἦρξε μὲν ἐνιαυτόν, κατεσκευάσατο δὲ τὴν ταγείαν 


τυραννίδι ὁμοίν. Hell. VI 4 34. The general setting of the 


—72— 


sentence shows that ἦρξε is not “became governor’’ but 
“governed,” which easily limits the meaning to extent of 
time.—Ka2Aacipiwy χίλιοι καὶ Ἑρμοτυβίων ἐδορυφόρεον ἐνιαυτὸν Exac- 
τοι τὸν βασιλά. Hdt. I] 168. ἐνιαυτόν dependent on the verb 
meaning “to attend upon, to keep watch over” with its 
notion of duration cannot mean “within a year.’”’—ovtrw δ᾽ 
ἐνιαυτὸν ὄντος ἐν τῇ βασιλείᾳ ᾿Αγησιλάου κτλ. Hell. III 3.4. The 
prepositional phrase and οὔπω are the principal aids in 
this sentence. 

II. Coming now to the unmodified nouns that are equiva- 
lent to the same nouns with the article in Attic Greek, 
there is not the additional aid of an implied modifying word 
of measure. As a result it may be necessary to fall back 
upon the case to determine the meaning. There have been 
included in this group all the Homeric examples of ἥματα 
and νύκτας, when used separately, because of their similarity 
to those instances already treated of τὰς ἡμέρας and τὰς νύκτας. 
For examples compare the following with Hdt. I 186 (see 
Ὁ. 61) and III 18 (see p. 56). 

ἀλλ᾽ ἦ τοι νύκτας μὲν ἰαύεσκεν καὶ ἀνάγκῃ 

ἐν σπέσσι γλαφυροῖσι παρ᾽ οὐκ ἐθέλων ἐθελούσῃ " 

ἥματα δ᾽ ἂμ πέτρῃσι καὶ ἠιόνεσσι καθίζων 

[δάκρυσι καὶ στοναχῇσι καὶ ἄλγεσι θυμὸν ἐρέχθων,] 

πόντον ἐπ᾽ ἀτρύγετον δερκέσκετο δάκρνα λείβων.---Οἀ. 5 154-8. 
κνισῆεν δέ τε δῶμα περιστεναχίζεται αὐλῇ 

ἤματα" νύκτας δ᾽ αὖτε παρ᾽ αἰδοίῃς ἀλόχοισιν 

εὕδουσ᾽ ἔν τε τάπησι καὶ ἐν τρητοῖσι λέχεσσιν.---Οα. I0 10-12. 


The classification of the verbs must continue to follow 
the same lines as before. 

1. The verbs that distinctly denote duration. 

deca, Od. 3 151, 490, 15 40, 188, τό 367. 

ἀναμένω, aor. Hdt. VII 42. 

ἐναυλίζομαι, pres. Hdt. I 181; aor. Hdt. IX t5. 

evow, pres. Od. το 12. 

iavw, imp. Il. 9 470. 

iaveoxov, Od. 5 154. 


iw, imp. Od. 16 365. 

κλαίω, pres. Od. 20 84. | 

φυλάσσω, pres. Il. 10 312, 399; fut. Od. 22 195. 

In the sentences containing the last verb, φυλάσσω, the 
case of νύκτα seems necessary in determining the meaning. 
Though it must be said that in Il. 10 312, 399 the general 
trend of the thought points out pretty plainly that all night 
is meant—especially οὐδ᾽ ἐθέλουσιν and καμάτῳ ἁδηκότες. 

νηῶν ὠκυπόρων σχεδὸν ἐλθέμεν ἔκ τε πυθέσθαι, 

ἠὲ φυλάσσονται νῆες θοαὶ ὡς τὸ πάρος περ, 

ἢ ἤδη χείρεσσιν ὑφ᾽ ἡμετέρῃσι δαμέντες 

φύξιν βουλεύουσι μετὰ σφίσιν οὐδ᾽ ἐθέλουσιν 

νύκτα φυλασσέμεναι, καμάτῳ ἁδηκότες αἰνῴ.----1], το 208--12. 


In the instances which contain ἄεσα, ἐναυλίζεσθαι, ἀναμένειν 
the meaning is sufficiently determined by these words, as 
ἅμα δ᾽ ἠελίῳ καταδύντι 

οὔ ποτ᾽ ἐπ᾽ ἠπείρου νύκτ᾽ aoapev.—Od. 16 366-7. 


οὐδὲ νύκτα οὐδεὶς ἐναυλίζεται ἀνθρώπων ὅτι μὴ γυνὴ μούνη τῶν ἐπιχω- 
ρίων, τὴν ἂν ὃ θεὸς ἕληται ἐκ πασέων. Hdt. 1 181. καὶ πρῶτα μέν 
οἱ ὑπὸ τῇ Ἴδῃ νύκτα ἀναμείναντι βρονταί τε καὶ πρηστῆρες ἐπεσπίπ- 
τουσι. Hdt. VII 42. 

With the others there is not only a verb expressing con- 
tinuance, but also a plural of the noun of time, which 
together with the tense mark the action as repeated. These 
may be explained in the same way as τὰς ἡμέρας and τὰς 
νύκτας (see p. 61; cf. Od. 5 154 p. 72). 

2. A second group contains verbs which in the given 
cases have meanings that clearly denote duration. 

καθίζω, to sit, pres. Od. 5 156. 

φαίνω, to shine, pres. Od. 7 102. 

πείρω, to Cleave a way through the waves, imp. Od. 2 434. 

The first two are the same as the last examples men- 
tioned in the preceding group. Od. 2 434 is different, 


Tavvuxin μέν ῥ᾽ 1 γε Kal ἠῶ πεῖρε κέλευθον. 


Since the verbal idea is the same as ἔπλει and the noun of 
time is so closely connected with the adjective expressing 
extent of time, the temporal noun must also do the same. 

3. A third group is made up of verbs that are more or 
less vague in denoting duration but receive some aid from 
the context. 

ἀλλύεσκεν, Od. 2 105, 19 150, 24 140. 

ἔχω, pres. Od. 20 85; fut. Il. 18 274. 

περιστεναχίζομαι, pres. Od. το το. 

τέρπομαι, pres. Od. 19 513. 


εἰ δ᾽ ἂν ἐμοῖς ἐπέεσσι πιθώμεθα κηδόμενοί περ 
νύκτα μὲν εἰν ἀγορῇ σθένος Lopev.—ll]. 18 273-4. 


The idea of continuance inherent in σθένος ἕξομεν is not capa- 
ble of determining the meaning without calling upon the 
case of the noun. With the rest there is the combination 
of the plural noun and the verb denoting repeated action. 


+ a 3 7 Ν ε ’ Ld ε / 
ἔνθα καὶ ἡματίη μὲν ὑφαίνεσκεν μέγαν ἱστόν, 
νύκτας δ᾽ ἀλλύεσκεν, ἐπεὶ δαΐδας παραθεῖτο.---Οα. 2 104-5. 


This is a good example of the rather large number of 
instances of ἥματα and νύκτας. Of course it cannot be said 
that Penelope spent the whole of each night in unraveling 
the web, but that it was something she did night after night. 
The plural number with the repeated action in the verb 
gives all but as definite an idea of duration as there would 
be if ἑκατόν were added to νύκτας. 

The second division of the unmodified words in the accu- 
sative has to do with those instances in which the word has 
no implied modifier. And here it is that the words ἡμέρα 
and νύξ so used have the meaning of “‘daytime”’ and 
“night time.” It can readily be seen that such words are 
altogether too vague to be used alone to denote extent, 
but must be used together. The three examples found in 
the prose authors studied are connected by καί---καί and τε 
καί, and are in the singular; those from the Iliad and 


Odyssey are joined by τε καί or καί and are in the plural 
with the exception of ἦμαρ in the instances of the phrase 
νύκτας Te καὶ ἦμαρ, always found at the close of the line and 
not to be distinguished in meaning from the νύκτας Te καὶ 
ἤματα. 

Taking up the latter first and dividing them according as 
‘the verb expresses duration or not, we have: 


I. ἀμφὶ δὲ σὲ Tpwai καὶ Aapdavides βαθύκολποι 
κλαύσονται νύκτας τε καὶ ἤματα δάκρυ χέουσαι.---Ἴ]. 18 339-40. 
οὐδέ τί μοι εἶπες πυκινὸν ἔπος, οὗ τέ κεν αἰεὶ 
μεμνήμην νύκτας τε καὶ ἤματα δάκρυ χέουσα.----Ἴ]. 24 744-5. 
ἐννῆμαρ μὲν ὁμῶς πλέομεν νύκτας τε καὶ Huap.—Od. το 28. 


Also Od. το 80, 15 476. 

In all of these there is the verb expressing duration and 
the plural of the noun, sufficient in themselves to render the 
idea of extent. But in Il. 24 744-5 there is in addition the 
adverb, αἰεί, which leads one to believe that the phrase is 
the poet’s way of saying πάντα χρόνον ; and in Od. το 28, 80, 
15 476 there is the introductory adverb, ἐννῆμαρ (ἐξῆμαρ), 
which certainly defines the time through which the action 
of the verb is extended, only to be further expanded into the 
phrase, νύκτας τε καὶ ἦμαρ. 

2. The second group, containing verbal ideas that take 
their element of duration from their connection with the 
temporal phrase and the rest of the sentence, is made up of 
the following: 


σοὶ δὲ χρὴ τάδε πάντα μέλειν νύκτας τε Kal Huap.—Il]. 5 490. 
ὅ μοι νύκτας τε καὶ ἦμαρ 

εὐχωλὴ κατὰ ἄστυ πελέσκεο.----1], 22 432-3. 

ἀλλὰ κύνας μὲν ἄλαλκε Διὸς θυγάτηρ ᾿Αφροδίτη 

npata καὶ νύκτας.----Ἶ]. 23 185-6. | 

ἢ γάρ οἱ αἰεὶ 

μήτηρ παρμέμβλωκεν ὁμῶς νύκτας τε καὶ ἦμαρ.---1]. 24 72-3. 
ἷ ἐν δὲ γυνὴ ταμίη νύκτας τε καὶ ἦμαρ 

ἔσχ᾽, ἢ πάντ᾽ ἐφύλασσε νόου πολυϊδρείῃσιν.---Οα. 2 345-6. 


In Il. 24 72-3 there is again present the adverb, αἰεί, 
which clearly gives the notion of duration and is explained 
in the following line by the νύκτας re καὶ ἦμαρ. The others 
do not essentially differ from the preceding except in the 
above mentioned particular of the verb. The lack of a 
distinct idea of continuance in the verb is not felt, seeing 
that it is so adequately supplied by the close connection of 
the two nouns and the fact that the plural is present in 
every phrase; though even where the second noun is singu- 
lar there is no difference in meaning from the phrases in 
which both are plural—the change to the singular apparently 
being made because of the position in the verse. 

The three examples from the prose authors are the fol- 
lowing. ἔνθα δὴ ἡμεῖς μὲν τὸν δεινὸν χειμῶνα στρατευόμενοι καὶ 
νύκτα καὶ ἡμέραν οὐδὲν πεπαύμεθα. An. VII 6 9. ὡς δὲ ἅπαξ ἤρξατο, 
ἔρρει αὐτῷ νύκτα τε καὶ ἡμέραν τὸ αἷμα, καὶ πάντα ποιοῦντες οὐκ ἐδύ- 
vavTo σχεῖν τὸ ῥεῦμα πρὶν ἐλιποψύχησε. Hell. V 4 58. σπουδὴ 
δὲ ὁμοίως καὶ νύκτα καὶ ἡμέραν ἔσται τῆς ὁδοῦ. Thuc. VII 77 6. 

The explanation for An. VII 69 on p. 61 will also serve 
here. In Hell. V 4 58 the os ἅπαξ ἤρξατο prepares us for the 
idea of continuance in ἔρρει and νύκτα τε καὶ ἡμέραν, and no 
matter what the case might be, it would be understood that 
the blood kept flowing all the time. But this is not all, for 
the thought of continuance is further reenforced by the 
second clause.—Thuc. VII 77 6 comes nearest to being like 
the phrase καὶ ἡμέρας καὶ νυκτός ; but comparing it with the 
two following passages a difference is at once apparent. 
πολεμικὸς δὲ αὖ ταύτῃ ἐδόκει εἶναι ὅτι φιλοκύνδυνός τε ἦν Kal ἡμέρας 
καὶ νυκτὸς ἄγων ἐπὶ τοὺς πολεμίους καὶ ἐν τοῖς δεινοῖς φρόνιμος. An. 
Il 6 7. ἡγήσαντο οὖν, εἰ ἕνα ἕλοιντο ἄρχοντα, μᾶλλον ἂν ἢ πολυαρ- 
χίας οὔσης δύνασθαι τὸν ἕνα χρῆσθαι τῷ στρατεύματι καὶ νυκτὸς καὶ 
ἡμέρας. An. ΝῚ 118. The Thucydidean passage refers to 
a particular case with the verbal idea mostly in the subject, 
the two just quoted are of the nature of general statements. 
The settings are entirely different. Thucydides puts into 
the mouth of Nicias, in his speech to the soldiers before 
Syracuse, that haste in the retreat will be both day and night 


alike, all the time. But in An. II 6 7 the phrase καὶ ἡμέρας 
καὶ νυκτὸς ἄγων κτλ., is in explanation of φιλοκίνδυνος, which 
surely does not consist in going against the enemy all the 
time, but by night as well as by day. And so it is with the 
second passage from the Anabasis. In both of them the 
connective, xai—xai, has a different force, being almost a 
disjunctive, while in Thucydides it is purely copulative. In 
short it is the whole general trend of the thought which 
finally differentiates the two. 

This brings us to the end of our investigation of the accu- 
sative case. It is hoped that most if not all the factors that 
aid in determining the meaning of its construction have 
been discovered. Without going into detail, the results may 
be summed up in some such way as this. First of all as an 
essential fundamental factor was the meaning of the nouns, 
all of which primarily signified time. A second important 
influence at work was the modifying word when indica- 
ting measure. Next in order was the verb, which, if not 
distinctly expressing a continued act or state, was abun- 
dantly able to do so under the favorable conditions created 
by the rest of the sentence. Close upon the verb came the 
number of the noun when plural, and after that the various 
elements present in the context, of which other temporal 
expressions gave most assistance. And the last to be men- 
tioned, though one cannot say it was the least important 
because it was a variable factor, is the inflectional ending, 
whose influence was by no means slight because of its con- 
stant association with the relation of extent of time, though 
the burden it carried changed greatly with the circum- 
stances. When the noun was limited by a word of measure 
expressed or implied and dependent on a verb denoting con- 
tinuance, it was practically nil. When the modifying word 
was neutral the importance of the case became a variable 
quantity; at one extreme it was of little weight or none 
at all because of the strong durative element in the verb, 
or the frequentative character of the verb and the number 
of the noun; at the other it was the deciding factor because 


of the colorless character of the verb and context. Yet 
at times with these phrases it even got beyond these two 
extremes and was not able to exert any influence as regards 
the relation of extent of time, being held in check by the 
meaning of the verb, which demanded some other relation. 
And finally, with the unmodified words also the need of 
the case ending varied according to the number of the noun 
and the nature of the verb. 


Ill. THE GENITIVE. 


The second case to be studied is the genitive. Like the 
nouns in the accusative, the words of time in this case are 
used with and without modifiers; and consequently the 
investigation will divide in the same way, into that of the 
instances without modifying words and of those with them. 
But unlike the discussion just ended, this one will begin with 
the unmodified cases, which seem to be the simpler. 

It will be remembered that in the earlier part of this study 
it was shown that only words denoting a time of day or a 
season of the year were used in this case without a modi- 
fier. The factors then besides the case ending to which we 
may go in determining the meaning of the construction are 
the meaning of the word itself, its number, and the con- 
text. But is there any need of considering the context or 
any particular word or words in it, except in so far as a 
context is necessary for the setting of the word? May it 
not be said that the meaning of the word and the number 
determine the meaning of the construction in nearly every 
instance? The exceptions that will be considered later are 
the few cases of καὶ ἡμέρας καὶ νυκτός and καὶ θέρους καὶ χειμῶνος, 
which might be confused with the accusative of the same ex- 
pressions, and in addition one instance of νυκτός equivalent 
tO μιᾶς νυκτός... 

Leaving out of consideration for the present the cases just 
mentioned, the words, ἡμέρας, νυκτός, θέρους, etc., by their num- 
ber, always singular, and their indefiniteness, are adapted 
for the expression of the time to which the verbal idea be- 
longs and for that alone. They do not and cannot express 
extent of time. For in the first place, in the great majority 
of the instances of the use of these words they are either 
unaccompanied by any other noun of time or, if so, the two 
are joined by a disjunctive. Since it is evident that such 
words by reason of their vagueness and indefiniteness must 


Ae te 


be used in connection with one another, as καὶ ἡμέραν καὶ 
νύκτα, in order to express extent of time, it will readily be 
granted that this relation cannot be expressed by them when 
in the singular used alone or joined by a disjunctive. 
νυκτός “‘night time,’ ἡμέρας “‘daytime,” δείλης “‘after- 
noon,” θέρους “summer (time)’’ cannot possibly express 
extent, unless from the nature of the verb and the rest of the 
context some form of εἷς be understood with them, which 
could never happen without a verbal idea like that of μένω, 
ζάω, etc., and the presence of such verbs with the genitive of 
the given nouns is apparently never the case. Again, such 
genitive forms do not and cannot date an act with exactness, 
because their indefiniteness and lack of any modifying word 
to mark off a particular day time or night time excludes that 
possibility. Thus it is that the very characteristic by which 
these words are adapted for telling a time of day or year 
within which an action takes place precludes the possibility 
of their denoting the time of duration of an action or dating 
with precision. They can give in a loose sort of way the 
time of an act or state but cannot date. The exact day or 
exact night, if the verb refers to a particular act, must be 
learned from some other source, often not given or, if so, not 
in the same sentence. A number of examples are given 
below in illustration of the above. It will be noted that 
the verbs are of varying character. They express con- 
tinued action, instantaneous action, a general statement, etc. 
The only class that is excluded is of those whose element 
of duration is so strong that it forces any accompanying 
temporal expression into the meaning of extent. And so 
far we may say perhaps that the verb assists in determining 
the meaning in that its aid is of a negative character. 

ὥστε οὕτω γ᾽ ἐχόντων οὐκ οἶδα ὅ τι ἄν τις χρήσαιτο αὐτοῖς εἴτε νυκ- 
τὸς δέοι εἴτε καὶ ἡμέρας. An. III 1 40. Though here there are 
both νυκτός and ἡμέρας, the disjunctive, εἴτε---εἴτε, so separates 
them that continuance is out of the question. καὶ ἡμέρας μὲν 
ἀδύνατα ἐδόκει εἶναι λαθεῖν προσελθόντας τε καὶ ἀναβάντας. Thuc. 


SE sina 


VII 43 2. πεπλανῆσθαι αὗται μάλιστα ἐώθασι ai ὄψεις τῶν ὀνειρά- 
των, τά τις ἡμέρης φροντίζε. Hdt. VII τ6. καὶ ἐλίνυον οὐδένα 
χρόνον οἱ βοηθήσαντες ἐργαζόμενοι, οὔτε νυκτὸς οὔτε ἡμέρης. Hadt. 
VIII 71. In this passage, if any, the accusative with extent 
of time would be expected in οὔτε xrA., as just before there 
is οὐδένα χρόνον clearly denoting that relation. It is prob- 
ably true that had xai—xaf been used, with the verb refer- 
ring to a particular act, as it does, the second temporal phrase 
would have denoted extent and would naturally have been 
in the accusative. But here again the disjunctive is so 
strong that it does not allow the notion of extent; it is just 
as though one or the other, ἡμέρης or νυκτός, were not pre- 
sent. καὶ ᾧχετο ἀπιὼν νυκτὸς σὺν ἀνθρώποις ws εἴκοσι. An. IIT 3 5. 
πονηρὸν γὰρ νυκτός ἐστι στράτευμα Περσικό. An. III 4 35. 
ἐντεῦθεν ἔπεμψαν νυκτὸς Δημοκράτην Τημνίτην ἄνδρας δόντες ἐπὶ τὰ 
ὄρη. An. 1V 415. σκέψαι τοίνυν, εἴπερ νυκτὸς πορευσόμεθα, εἰ ὃ 
Ἑλληνικὸς νόμος κάλλιον ἔχε. An. VII 3 37. ἐν δὲ ταῖς ᾿Αθήναις 
τῆς Παράλου ἀφικομένης νυκτὸς ἐλέγετο ἡ συμφορά. Hell. II 2 3. 
εἰ οὖν προσπέσοιμεν ἄφνω τε καὶ νυκτός, κλ. Thuc. III 30 3. 
ἐλόχησαν τὴν ἐν Πηδάσῳ ὁδόν, ἐς τὴν ἐμπεσόντες of Πέρσαι νυκτὸς 
διεφθάρησαν. Hdt. V 121. κεῖθεν δὲ πλαγχθέντες ἱκάνομεν ἐνθάδε 
νυκτός. Od. 13 278. τῷ δ᾽ ἐπιόντι ἔτει [ᾧ ἡ τε σελήνη ἐξέλιπεν 
ἑσπέρας κτλ]. Hell. I 6 1. 
τάων οὔ ποτε καρπὸς ἀπόλλυται οὐδ᾽ ἀπολείπει 
χείματος οὐδὲ θέρευς, ἐπετήσιος.---()α. 7 117-8. 
ὥς τ᾽ ἀστέρ᾽ ἐπεσσύμενον πεδίοιο, 


ὅς ῥά T ὀπώρης εἶἷσιν.---Ἰ]. 22 26—7. 


θέρους γὰρ δι ἀνυδρίαν ἀδύνατα ἦν ἐπιστρατεύειν. Thuc. III 88 1. 
ἀλλὰ τὸ θέρος τοῦτο ἀντικαθεζόμενοι χειμῶνος ἤδη ἀνεχώρησαν ἐπ᾽ οἴκου 
ἑκάτερο. Thuc. I 30 4. The adverb ἤδη does not hinder 
but rather aids the interpretation ; for otherwise rod χειμῶνος 
might be expected, that is, the particular winter following 
τοῦτο τὸ θέρος. But the writer leaves that to be understood 
and simply says, “they retreated homeward winter time 
already,” that is when they had already entered upon the 
winter season, the time during which active campaigning 
6 


desea ake 


ceased. Both ἤδη and ἔτι are used in this way, though in 
other examples the conditions are simpler. ot δὲ ᾿Αργεῖοι 
γνόντες ἐβοήθουν ἡμέρας ἤδη ἐκ τῆς Νεμέας. Thuc. V 59 1. (cf. 
Thuc. III 106 3.) καὶ ἀφικόμενος νυκτὸς ἔτι καὶ περὶ ὄρθρον τῷ 
στρατῷ ἐκαθέζετο πρὸς τὸ Διοσκόρειον. Thuc. IV 110 1. βρονταί 
τε ἦμος τῇ ἄλλῃ γίνονται, τηνικαῦτα μὲν οὐ γίνονται, θέρεος δὲ ἀμφιλα- 
φέες - ἢν δὲ χειμῶνος βροντὴ γένηται, ὡς τέρας θωμάζεται: ὡς δὲ καὶ 
ἣν σεισμὸς γένηται, nv τε θέρεος ἤν τε χειμῶνος, ἐν τῇ Σκυθικῇ τέρας 
νενόμιστα. Hdt. IV 28. θερμότατος δέ ἐστι ὃ ἥλιος τούτοισι τοῖσι 
ἀνθρώποισι τὸ ἑωθινόν, od κατά περ τοῖσι ἄλλοισι μεσαμβρίης. Hat. 
III 104. παρὰ δὲ Μαντίνειαν ἐξ ᾿Ορχομενοῦ ὄρθρου ἀναστὰς ἔτι σκο- 
ταῖος παρῆλθεν. Hell. ΓΝ 5 τ8. ἀλλὰ δείλης ἀφίκοντο εἰς τὰς 
κώμας. An. IIT 3 11. 

ἠοῦς δὴ καὶ μᾶλλον ὑπερμενέα Kpoviwve. 

ὄψεαι, αἴ x’ ἐθέλησθα, βοῶπις πότνια Ἥρη, 

ὀλλύντ᾽ ᾿Αργείων πουλὺν στρατὸν aixuntawv.—ll]. 8 470-2. 

μῦθος δ᾽, ὃς μὲν νῦν ὑγιής, εἰρημένος ἔστω, 

τὸν δ᾽ ἠοῦς Τρώεσσι μεθ᾽ ἱπποδάμοις ἀγορεύσω.---1]. 8 524-5. 


These two examples of ἡοῦς are somewhat unlike the other 
instances of this genitive in that they plainly refer to the 
following morning, and might have been expressed with the 
article. τὸν (μῦθον)---ἀγορεύσω does not have in it the notion 
of duration throughout a period designated by ἠοῦς; which 
fact taken together with the meaning of the word Jeads to 
the idea “in the morning.’”’ But because it is so well defined 
by the context, the genitive dates as exactly as any dative 
limited by a demonstrative. In the other, ὄψεαι is colorless 
with regard to duration, yet perhaps a little more depends 
upon the inflectional ending. 

As was said above, the instances of καὶ ἡμέρας καὶ νυκτός and 
καὶ θέρους καὶ χειμῶνος must be examined closely to see 
whether there is anything by which to distinguish them 
from the accusative of the same phrases. They are: 
ot προστάτεω (αὐτοῦ) ἐπιλαβόμενοι ποιήσουσι τοῦτο τὸ ἂν κεῖνος ἐξηγέη- 
ται καὶ ἡμέρης καὶ νυκτός. Hdt. V 23. καὶ ἡμέρας καὶ νυκτός, 
An. II 6 7 (see p. 76). καὶ νυκτὸς καὶ ἡμέρας, An. VI 1 18 


—83— 


(see p. 76). πρὸς yap TH ἐπάλξει τὴν μὲν ἡμέραν κατὰ διαδοχὴν of 
᾿Αθηναῖοι φυλάσσοντες, τὴν δὲ νύκτα καὶ ξύμπαντες πλὴν τῶν ἱππέων, 
οἱ μὲν ἐφ᾽ ὅπλοις ποιούμενοι, οἱ δ᾽ ἐπὶ τοῦ τείχους, καὶ θέρους καὶ χει- 
μῶνος ἐταλαιπωροῦντο. Thuc. VII 28 2. 

Though no absolutely sure conclusion may be obtained 
because of the few examples in each instance, yet comparing 
them with the accusative phrases (see p. 76) it is seen that 
the main difference lies in the kind of statement made. 
Those with the genitive are general, those with the accusa- 
tive are particular. Secondly, the connectives seem to have 
a different force determined by the subject matter. With 
the accusative they are the pure “both—and,” but with 
the genitive they shade into “not only—but also,” “both— 
as well as,”’ giving to the words a separateness that is some- 
what akin to the force of the disjunctive. These facts 
seem to necessitate the same meaning as when the words 
are used alone. 

A notable exception in meaning to all the above citations 
is found in Hdt. IV 86, νηῦς ἐπίπαν μάλιστά κῃ κατανύει ἐν pa- 
κρημερίῃ ὀργυιὰς ἑπτακισμυρίας, νυκτὸς δὲ ἑξακισμυρίας. The subject 
matter, the distance a ship can travel in a given period, and 
the use of ἐν μακρημερῴ in the first clause give to νυκτός the 
force of “a night,” that is, “one night.” The verb denoting 
completed action and the meaning of the temporal noun 
limit the meaning of the construction to the time which is 
necessary for the performance of the action. Other cases 
of the same nature will be noted in considering the nouns 
in the genitive modified by words of measure. 

The second large division in the discussion of the geni- 
tive comprises all instances in which a modifying word is 
present. These various modifiers will be classified in the 
same way as in the case of the accusative, that we may study 
separately the instances in which there is a limiting word 
signifying measure, and those in which there is a word of 
more or less demonstrative character. 

Considering first the smaller and simpler class, namely, 
that characterized by the presence of a word of measure, 


a 4— 


it is observed that the number of such words of measure 
as compared with those found in the accusative is limited 
by the quantity of material that can be obtained from the 
sources used in this investigation. Yet at any rate they are 
enough to show that any one of the larger number might 
be used, if the conditions demanded them. They are πολύς, 
ὀλίγος, πλεῖστος, τοσοῦτος, λοιπός, ὅλος, and a cardinal numeral. 
The question to be answered is the same as has been put 
before. Is there anything by which this construction is 
differentiated from those of the dative and accusative cases 
other than by the inflectional ending? 

This much is sure, that a noun of time limited by a 
word of measure signifies a period of time in extension, 
excluding the thought of “time when’ or mere dating, the 
main function of the dative case. In this the phrase runs 
parallel with what is found in the accusative. Hence in the 
endeavor to discover how it differs from the construction in 
that case, we must look elsewhere for some mark of dif- 
ferentiation, and as with the accusative the attention is 
turned to the word next in the order of relationship, the 
verb. Now the verb which accompanied the notion of 
extent of time always denoted duration either in itself or 
with the assistance of the context. Accordingly if it can 
be shown that the verbs which are followed by the genitive 
phrase do not express duration or, if they may do so, that 
that element is by reason of the setting latent, a distinct 
mark of differentiation will have been discovered. The 
verbs that were found to be used with such phrases may 
be classified as follows. 

1. Verbs that denote completion or accomplishment either 
in themselves or with the aid of the context. 

τὰ μὲν πρὸς θάλασσαν τοσαύτη ἦν, és ἤπειρον δὲ ἀπὸ Βυζαντίου és 
Λαιαίους καὶ ἐπὶ τὸν Στρυμόνα (ταύτῃ γὰρ διὰ πλείστου ἀπὸ θαλάσσης 
ἄνω ἐγίγνετο) ἡμερῶν ἀνδρὶ εὐζώνῳ τριῶν καὶ δέκα ἁνύσαι. Thuc. II 
97 2. This is a good illustration showing that a verb like 
ἁνύσαι, which means “‘to accomplish’”’ and by its meaning 
excludes the idea of extent, followed by a temporal phrase 


-ὃς-- 


containing a word of measure limits the meaning of the 
temporal phrase to the time which is necessary for the per- 
formance of the act.—od μέντοι (τὸ ὄνομα Ἕλληνες) πολλοῦ γε 
χρόνου ἐδύνατο καὶ ἅπασιν ἐκνικῆσαι. Thuc. I 3 2. The verb, 
ἐκνικῆσαι, takes on from the preceding context not the mean- 
ing of the continuance of a state, but the accomplishment 
only implied in “to prevail, to get the upper hand, to come 
into vogue’’; so that this like the preceding excludes from 
the temporal phrase the relation of extent of {{π|6.---ἀθυμίαν 
τε πλείστην ὃ χρόνος παρεῖχε παρὰ λόγον ἐπιγιγνόμενος, οὗς ᾧοντο 
ἡμερῶν ὀλίγων ἐκπολιορκήσειν, ἐν νήσῳ τε ἐρήμῃ καὶ ὕδατι ἁλμυρῷ 
χρωμένους. Thuc. IV 264. There is no thought of continu- 
ance in the verb, ‘to take by siege.’’ ὀλέγων ἐτῶν καθαιρήσειν, 
Thuc. V 14 3. καὶ ταῦτα ὀλίγου χρόνου ἔσται τελεύμεαι Hat. 
III 134. ἐλθὼν δ᾽ ἐκεῖνος λέγει ὅτι ἄξει αὐτοὺς πέντε ἡμερῶν εἰς 
χωρίον ὅθεν ὄψονται θάλατταν. An. 1V 7 20. The verb in itself 
does not denote completion, but with the prepositional 
phrase it does, meaning “he will lead them, bring them 
to a place, get them there.” 

These citations seem to point out conclusively that verbs 
denoting completion or accomplishment only, and not a state, 
do not harmonize with extent of time, but with a period 
considered as the limits within which the act is accom- 
plished. 

2. A verb of momentary or instantaneous action. 

λέγων ὅτι οὔπω δὴ πολλοῦ χρόνου τούτου ἡδίονι οἴνῳ émurdxou. AN. 
I 9 25. ἐπιτυγχάνω “to happen upon”’ differs perceptibly 
from verbs like “to march” and “to accomplish” in that 
the time occupied is unappreciable. Accordingly if it is 
limited by a temporal phrase containing a word of measure, 
by its own meaning it gives to the phrase the force of “time 
within which,’ excluding duration and the time ἽΤΗΥ 
for the accomplishment of an act. 

3. A third class contains those verbs which may be fol- 
lowed by a phrase indicative of the length of duration, (a) 
whose general setting keeps the element of continuance 


rik" Gv 


latent, or (b) to which an accompanying negative gives 
the force of non-occurrence. 

(a) ὁ δ᾽ αὖ ᾿Επαμεινώνδας, ἐνθυμούμενος ὅτι ὀλίγων μὲν ἡμερῶν 
ἀνάγκη ἔσοιτο ἀπιέναι διὰ τὸ ἐξήκειν τῇ στρατείᾳ τὸν χρόνον. Hell. 
VII 5 18. While it is conceivable that ἀπιέναι could have 
the meaning that ἐλθεῖν takes in An. VI 6 38 (see p. 51), 
yet it is out of the question for it to mean that here. The 
setting is entirely different. ‘To return, to retire, to with- 
draw, to start back” in this context is wholly colorless and 
cannot put forward the idea of duration. That this is so is 
further supported by the following διὰ τὸ ἐξήκειν xrrA.—6 δὲ 
θέμενος τὰ ὅπλα ἐγγὺς κήρυκα προσπέμπει αὐτοῖς λέγοντα, εἰ βούλονται 
ἐξιέναι ἐκ τῆς Σικελίας πέντε ἡμερῶν λαβόντες τὰ σφέτερα αὐτῶν, ἑτοῖ- 
μος εἶναι σπένδεσθα. Thuc. VII 3 1. This is of the same 
character as the preceding. ἐξιέναι ἐκ τῆς Σικελίας, as is evi- 
dent from the situation described by the writer, is equivalent 
to “to go out,” not “to keep going out of Sicily.” The 
notion of continued marching is wholly foreign to the general 
setting, and the verb is as colorless as the verb “to leave,” 
by which it might be translated. The other elements in the 
context, which can scarcely be described otherwise than by 
the general trend of the thought, do not allow the indefinite- 
ness of the verb with regard to the kind of action to develop 
into the definiteness of duration in the presence of a tem- 
poral phrase of measure, as was the case with the colorless 
verbs with expressions of extent of time. So it is, if the verb 
cannot under the circumstances express duration or repeated 
action and is limited by a temporal phrase denoting a more or 
less extended period of time, this period must necessarily be 
the time within which that action takes place. The indefi- 
niteness of the verb leaves the question open whether the 
whole or only a part of the time is occupied. 

Others like the above are: αὐτὸν δέ σε καὶ τοὺς σοὺς συμπλό- 
ous τριῶν ἡμερέων προσαγορεύω ἐκ τῆς ἐμῆς γῆς ἐς ἄλλην τινὰ μετορ- 
μίζεσθαι, εἰ δὲ μή, ἅτε πολεμίους περιέψεσθα. Hdt. I1 115. μηνῶν 
τεσσάρων, Thuc. VI 21 2. 

(0) The passages in which the genitive depends on a 


—87— 


negatived verb are: εἶπεν αὐτῷ ὅτι βασιλεὺς οὐ μαχεῖται δέκα Hue- 
ρῶν, Κῦρος δ᾽ εἶπεν : Οὐκ ἄρα ἔτι μαχεῖται, εἰ ἐν ταύταις οὐ μαχεῖται 
ταῖς ἡμέραις. Απ.1 718. Note that the prepositional phrase 
of the second part is a repetition of the genitive phrase of 
the first. ἑπτακαίδεκα γὰρ σταθμῶν τῶν ἐγγυτάτω οὐδὲ δεῦρο ἰόντες 
ἐκ τῆς χώρας οὐδὲν εἴχομεν λαμβάνει. An. 112 11. ταῦτα ἕξ τε 
καὶ ἑκατὸν λογίζονται ἔτεα, ἐν τοῖσι Αἰγυπτίοισί τε πᾶσαν εἶναι κακότητα 
καὶ τὰ ἱρὰ χρόνου τοσούτου κατακληισθέντα οὐκ ἀνοιχθῆνα. Hdt. IL 
128. ἑπτὰ δὲ ἐτέων μετὰ ταῦτα οὐκ ὗε τὴν Θήρην. Hdt. IV 151. 
ἐπεὰν δὲ θάψωσι, ἀγορὴ δέκα ἡμερέων οὐκ ἵσταταί σφι οὐδ᾽ ἀρχαιρεσίη 
συνίζει, ἀλλὰ πενθέουσι ταύτας τὰς ἡμέρας. Hdt. ΝῚ ς-8. ἑκατόν τε 
ἐτέων μὴ ζητῆσαι κάτοδον ἐς Πελοπόννησον. Hdt. ΙΧ 26. διὰ τὸ 
δυοῖν ἐτοῖν μὴ εἰληφέναι καρπὸν ἐκ τῆς γῆς. Hell. V 4 56. 

In all of these the particle negatives the verb only and 
brings it about that the meaning is that of simple non-occur- 
rence; so that when a temporal phrase including a word 
of measure follows, the relation is not one of extent, since 
that is not consonant with non-occurrence, but is the time 
in which that non-occurrence falls; for non-occurrence does 
not differ essentially from momentary action. There can be 
no confusion with the accusative construction; for there 
is a distinct mark of differentiation between the given 
phrases in the genitive limiting a negatived verb and the 
same phrases in the accusative with a negative present in 
the sentence. In sentences containing the latter the parti- 
cle negatives the whole though more especially the word of 
measure modifying the noun of time. This is fully illus- 
trated by comparing the following with the above. 


μείναντες οὐ πολλὰς Hucpas.—Hell. VII τ 22. 
τὸ καὶ οὔ τι πολὺν χρόνον ἔμπεδον Hev.—I]. 12 9. 
μηκέτι, ᾿Ατρέος vie, πολὺν χρόνον ἀσκελὲς οὕτως 
κλαῖ᾿.---Οα. 4 543-4. 
᾿Ατρεΐδη, μὴ δή με πολὺν χρόνον ἐνθάδ᾽ ἔρυκε. 
—Od. 4 594. cf. 15 68. 
οὐδ᾽ ἄρα Πηνελόπεια πολὺν χρόνον ἦεν ἄπυστος 
μύθων.----Οα. 4 675-6. 


eon Aa 


οὐ μέν τοι κείνω ye πολὺν χρόνον ἀμφὶς ἔσεσθον 
φυλόπιδος Kpatepns.—Od. 16 267-8. 

ἐπεὶ οὐκ ὀλίγον χρόνον ἔσται 
φύλοτπις.----1]. 19 157-8. 
ov yap ἀνὴρ πρόπαν pap ἐς ἠέλιον καταδύντα 
ἄκμηνος σίτοιο δυνήσεται ἄντα μάχεσθαι.----1]. 19 τ62--5. 


καὶ ὄντων αὐτῶν οὗ πολλάς πω ἡμέρας ἐν τῇ ᾿Αττικῇ. Thuc. II 47 3. 
οὐκ ὀλίγον χρόνον ἐπλανᾶτο. Thuc. II 102 6. οὐ γάρ τινα πολλὸν 
χρόνον ἦρξε ὁ Κλεομένης. Hdt. V 48. νῦν ὦν μηκέτι πλεῦνα χρόνον 
ζόην τοιήνδε ἔχωμεν. Hdt. ΙΝ 114. οὔτε γὰρ ἄν τοι δοίην θυγατέρα 
τὴν ἐμὴν γῆμαι, οὔτε ἐκείνῃ πλεῦνα χρόνον συνοικήσεις. Hdt. ΙΧ 111. 
καὶ Μοίρι οὔκω ἦν ἔτεα εἰνακόσια τετελευτηκότι. Hdt. IL 13. μετὰ 
ταῦτα οὐ πολλόν τινα χρόνον βιοὺς ἀπέθανε. Hdt. ΙΧ το. 

There are no exceptions to this rule among all the. cases 
gathered, and it even holds good in the instances of the 
demonstrative accusative phrases with one exception, An. ITI 
I 3 (see p. 64), in which the desire of the writer to make’ 
the idea of “throughout the night” emphatic was so strong 
that the accusative was employed. Note that in every case 
with the genitive the negative directly precedes the verb, 
while in not a single instance is this true when the accusa- 
tive is used. By reason of this precise use of the negative 
particle the possibility of confusing the meaning of the two 
constructions is eliminated. 

4. A fourth class is miscellaneous in character. 

ἐντεῦθεν δὲ ἔτι πολλῆς νυκτὸς παραπλεύσαντες Kal ἀφικόμενοι τῆς 
ἠπείρου és Αρματοῦντα καταντικρὺ Μηθύμνης. Thuc. VIII ror 3. 
This contains a phrase that does not differ from the regular 
use of νυκτός in that when modified by πολλῆς it equals 
“much darkness,’ or with ἔτι, “while it was still very 
dark.’’ The meaning of νυκτός modified by such a word as 
πολλῆς forbids both extent of time and exact dating, and 
limits the meaning of the construction to the time within 
which the action falls.—rod δὲ λοιποῦ χρόνου ἐβούλετο τριώβολον 
διδόναι, ἕως ἂν βασιλέα ἐπέρηται. Thuc. VIII 29 1. This is quite 
unlike any of the other cases dealt with. The ἕως ἄν clause 


--οῦο.--- 


gives the limit of τοῦ λοιποῦ χρόνου expressing measure, and 
both together seem to compel the phrase to be interpreted 
as extent of time. (see p. 39.) 

In summing up with regard to the genitive temporal 
phrases characterized by a word of measure, it may be said, 
that when the verb, either by itself or with the help of the 
context, expresses completion or accomplishment, when it 
expresses momentary action, or in case the verb, though 
able to denote continuance when modified by such a phrase 
as the above, is prevented from doing so by the general trend 
of the thought or a negative, the case ending need not be 
called upon to decide the meaning, but these elements coupled 
with the meaning of the word itself and the modifying word 
are sufficient. And lastly in exceptional cases there may be 
found an instance such as Thuc. VIII 29 1, in which there 
are strong indications of extent of time. 

A second part of the study of the modified nouns of time 
in the genitive deals with those limited by words not indic- 
ative of measure. Most of these except ἕκαστος are of a more 
or less demonstrative character, that is, they mark off a par- 
ticular period of time. It will perhaps be simpler, and more 
satisfactory results will be gained, if a slight subdivision 
be made based on the degree of the demonstrative nature in 
the modifying word. Accordingly we shall first consider 
those instances which have the article only; these comprise 
a large part of the material and come near in many cases 
to the use of the same words without the article. But even 
among the examples with the article there will be noticed a 
difference, which brings about a further division. In 
most cases the article has its customary meaning, but in 
some it has a distributive force.* 

Taking up the former first, we have as our problem to 
answer the question whether there is anything besides the 


* In connection with the separation along this line is the interesting 
fact that the words used with the article in its ordinary meaning 
are all used in the genitive without any modifier, but those with the 
distributive article are not so used. 


ae. 


case ending by which to differentiate the meaning of the 
genitive of a noun and article from the meanings of the 
constructions of the other two oblique cases, or in other 
words, how much depends upon the case ending. As factors 
exerting an influence upon the meaning of the case there 
are the meaning of the word ‘itself, the article, and the verb 
with the general context. The nouns, seven in all, with the 
meaning of “daytime,” “night-time,” “early morning,” 
“afternoon,” “spring,” “summer,” and “winter,” are too 
indefinite when modified simply by the article to give the 
exact time of an action. Such phrases as τῆς νυκτός, τοῦ θέρ- ᾿ 
ovs, etc., lie midway between those that contain a demon- 
strative word and the use of the same nouns when employed 
by themselves. At one time, by reason of the definite nature 
of the context they are all but equivalent to the demonstra- 
tive expressions, but this through no particular virtue of 
their own; at another because of the general character of 
the statement in which they stand, they are like the same 
words used alone; but in most instances they are neither 
the one nor the other, neither so indefinite as when employed 
without the article nor so definite as those with the addi- 
tional element of the demonstrative. For even though a 
particular daytime or night-time is indicated by the context, 
yet the article is not strong enough to present its noun as 
a unit, considered, so to speak, as a point in time, but pre- 
sents it as a period more or less extended, as τῆς νυκτός, “ the 
night-time.” The temporal relation that exists between a 
phrase of this sort and the rest of the sentence is a vague 
one. As will presently be shown, it does not indicate extent ; 
because of lack of definiteness, the inability of the article to 
give to the phrase the connotation possessed by the demon- 
strative phrase, it has not the power to designate the point 
of time at which an act takes place, but can simply tell the 
time in which an action falls, leaving to the context to point 
out or not what night, summer, etc., is meant. It is the 
meaning of the word itself, which is always one that may 
be used alone in the genitive, together with the modifying 


μ᾽ ἡ aaa 


word that differentiates this from the dative construction. 
To distinguish it from the accusative, as the same words are 
found in that case, some mark of distinction must be discov- 
ered in the verb. For a better examination of the verbs 
they will be classified according to the kind of action signi- 
fied. 

1. The first class is of verbs denoting completion or 
accomplishment, in meaning or in tense. 

διέρχομαι, aor. An. III 3 11. 

nw, pres. An. II 21, VII 2 16; fut. An. VI 3 25. 

καταλαμβάνω, to capture, aor. pass. An. IV 2 14. 

Avo, to destroy, aor. An. II 4 17. 

οἴχομαι, imp. An. IV 6 3, VII 2 17. 

παρέρχομαι, perf. Hell. IV 5 3. 

Such verbs as these by their meaning exclude the notion 
of extent of time. 

ἀλλ᾽ εἰ βούλεσθε συναπιέναι, ἥκειν ἤδη κελεύει τῆς νυκτός. εἰ δὲ μή, 
αὔριον πρῷ ἀπιέναι φησίν. An. II 2 1. The following αὔριον 
allows the rather indefinite phrase, τῆς νυκτός, to be em- 
ployed, although it is equivalent to the definite expression, 
“to-night.”’ καὶ παρὰ τὴν γέφυραν τοῦ Τίγρητος ποταμοῦ πέμψαι 
κελεύουσι φυλακήν, ὡς διανοεῖται αὐτὴν λῦσαι Τισσαφέρνης τῆς νυκτός. 
An. 14 τῇ. ἐκ δὲ τούτου ἐκεῖνος τῆς νυκτὸς ἀποδρὰς ᾧχετο κατα- 
λιπὼν τὸν υἱόν. An. ΙΝ 6 5. αἰσθόμενος δὲ ὃ ᾿Αγησίλαος τῆς νυκ- 
τὸς παρεληλυθότας αὐτούς, ὑποστρέψας ἅμα τῇ ἡμέρᾳ εἰς τὸ Πείραιον 
ἦγε. Hell. IV 5 3. Thereis absolutely nothing in the con- 
text to show that any continued action was thought of in 
the perfect tense, which simply expresses the fact that the 
detachment of troops had got by. 

2. The second class comprises verbs which for want of 
a better term have been called verbs of instantaneous or 
momentary action, which either may signify the beginning 
or end of an act, or do not contain an appreciable temporal 
element. Such verbs cannot be followed by a temporal 
expression indicating the relation of extent, unless they 
express repeated action, which is not the case in any of the 
instances; but by reason of the character of the temporal 


en ἐύπαπη 


phrase the relation is limited to the time within which the 
action falls. It will be seen, if not in the following list, at 
least in later ones, that a clear-cut division cannot always 
be maintained between this class and the preceding, and 
some may appear to belong to both: 

dviornm, 2 aor. An. VII 4 6, Hell. V 4 28; 1 aor. Thuc. 
V 58 2. 

ἀποπέμπω, aor. pass. Thuc. VII 31 3. 

ἀποστέλλω, aor. pass. Thuc. VII 50 1. 

ἀφικνέομαι, pres. Hell. II 4 το; aor. An. VII 3 το, Hell. 
Vil 2 23. 

ἐπιπίπτω, aor. Hell. IV 8 30. 

ἐπιτίθεμαι, to attack, aor. An. II 4 16. 

κελεύω, aor. Hdt. VIII 107. 

παραγίγνομαι, to arrive, aor. Thuc. II 5 τ. 

τοῦ δ᾽ ὄρθρου ἀναστὰς ἐφύλαττε μὴ λάθοι αὐτὸν ὁ πατὴρ ἐξελθών. 
Hell. V 4 28. ἀφικνεῖται τῆς νυκτὸς εἰς τὸν Πειραιᾶ. Hell. II 
4 το. ὀργισθέντες οἱ ᾿Ασπένδιοι τῆς νυκτὸς ἐπιπεσόντες κατακόπτουσιν 
ἐν τῇ σκηνῇ αὐτόν. Hell. 1V 8 30. ὁ δὲ Γύλιππος ἄλλην τε στρα- 
τιὰν πολλὴν ἔχων ἦλθεν ἀπὸ τῆς Σικελίας καὶ τοὺς ἐκ τῆς Πελοποννήσου 
τοῦ ἦρος ἐν ταῖς ὁλκάσιν ὁπλίτας ἀποσταλέντας. Thuc. VII 50 τ. 
ταύτην μὲν τὴν ἡμέρην ἐς τοσοῦτο ἐγίνετο, τῆς δὲ νυκτὸς κελεύσαντος 
βασιλέος τὰς νέας οἱ στρατηγοὶ ἐκ τοῦ Φαλήρου ἀπῆγον ὀπίσω ἐς τὸν 
Ἑλλήσποντον. Hdt. VIII 107. 

3. The third class contains verbs that may denote continu- 
ance. In some cases this element is prominent, in others it 
plays no part whatever. 

ἀγρεύω, pres. Hdt. II 95. 

ἀναβαίνω, pres. Hell. VII 4 13. 

. ἀναπαύομαι, aor. Hell. VII 4 32. 

dvaxwpéw, pres. Thuc. VII 72 2. 

ἀπάγω, pres. Thuc. VII 73 3. 

ἀποβαίνω, aor. Hell. V 1 το. 

droxwpéw, pres. Thuc. VII 73 1; 73 3. 

βουλεύομαι, aor. Hdt. VII 12. 

γίγνομαι, pres. An. IV 4 8; aor. Thuc. I 541, II 5 2, An. 
VII 4 14. 


Amhara 


διαβαίνω, aor. Hell. ΓΝ ὃ 35. 

διεξέρχομαι, aor. Thuc. VII 85 2, Hell. VI 5 17. 

εἰμί, Hdt. IV 50 (2). 

ἐπιγίγνομαι, pres. Hell. II 4 3. 

ἐπιλείπω, pres. Hdt. II 25. 

ἔρχομαι, pres. An. V 7 14; aor. An. VII 8 9. 

καταβαίνω, pres. Hell. II 4 5. 

κατακομίζω, pres. Thuc. IV 67 3. 

κομίζομαι, imp. Thuc. III 81 1. 

νίφεται, Hdt. IV 31. 

ὁράω, i Hdt. VIII 78; aor. Hell. 1 6 28. 

παραρτέομαι, imp. Hdt. VIII 76. 

πειράομαι (κακουργεῖν), imp. An. VI 1 1. 

περιορμέω, imp. Thuc. ΙΝ 23 2. 

περιπλέω, pres. Thuc. IV 23 2. 

πλέω, pres. Thuc. IV 32 1; imp. Hell. V 1 το. 

πληρόω, aor. Thuc. VII το 5. 

πορεύομαι, fut. Hell. VI 4 25. 

pew, pres. Hdt. II 25. 

συλλέγομαι, imp. An. VI 3 6. 

τήκω, pres. Hdt. IV so. 

verat, Hdt. IV 50. 

φεύγω, to flee, pres. Hell. V 4 21, Thuc. IV 133 3. 

χρηΐίσκομαι, pres. Hdt. III 117. 

χωρέω, imp. Thuc. VII 83 4. 

Though all these verbs may denote continuance under 
favorable circumstances, and though some of them do in 
‘the references cited, yet none of them possesses an element 
of duration so strong as to give to the temporal phrase the 
meaning of extent of time. Hence it is that when such 
a verb is modified by a temporal phrase not indicating 
measure, consisting merely of one of the seven given nouns 
and the article, the meaning that naturally follows is that 
of the time during or in which the action takes place. For 
“time when” is excluded by the weak demonstrative nature 
of the article, and there is nothing to lead toward extent 
of time except the notion of continuance more or less in 


ΟΣ 


the background. The seemingly weak point in this argu- 
ment is that the accusative of the same expression is used 
with some of the same verbs. But in the case of the accusa- 
tive the inflectional ending had to be called in to decide the 
meaning. If that had not been done, the result would have 
been exactly the same as in the cases of the genitive. The 
one needs the case ending to make the chain complete, 
because we know that the accusative case regularly denotes 
extent of time, and because we see that such a meaning is 
consonant with the context. In the other, knowing in the 
same way the general meaning of the genitive, we may obtain 
it without calling upon the additional factor. If this asser- 
tion seems too bold, it will at any rate be granted that the 
dependence on the inflectional ending in the case of the 
genitive is far less than with the accusative, that is, it is not 
necessary for obtaining the meaning, but only to show, as it 
were, that it is not accusative. 

Some illustrations of this class are the following. ἐκέλευον 
φράζειν Νικίᾳ μὴ ἀπάγειν τῆς νυκτὸς τὸ στράτευμα, ὡς Συρακοσίων τὰς 
ὁδοὺς φυλασσόντων, ἀλλὰ καθ᾽ ἡσυχίαν τῆς ἡμέρας παρασκευασάμενον 
ἀποχωρεῖν. Thuc.’ VII 73 3.---οἶ μέντοι ᾿Αρκάδες καὶ οἱ μετ᾽ αὐτῶν 
οὕτως ἐπεφόβηντο τὴν ἐπιοῦσαν ἡμέραν ὥστε οὐδ᾽ ἀνεπαύσαντο τῆς 
νυκτὸς ἐκκόπτοντες τὰ διαπεπονημένα σκηνώματα καὶ ἀποσταυροῦντες. 
Hell. VII 4 32. If the negatived verb with the participles 
in this sentence means “they did not cease cutting down 
etc.,” then we have a good example of a genitive used where 
there might have been an accusative. (cf. An. VII 6 9 
p. 61; also see p. 41.) The reason for the use of the 
genitive rather than the accusative would be that the writer 
was drawn to the former because of the prevalence of the 
phrase τῆς νυκτός and the fact that the negative with the 
verb did away with all ambiguity, since “they did not cease 
during the night” is equivalent to “they continued through- 
out the night.”’ But if the verb means “to take rest,” which 
to me seems more likely, and the participles are exegetical 
of this thought, then the genitive is the more natural, as it 
limits the leading verb only, and not the combination of the 


a) ha 


verb and supplementary participles as in the former case.— 
ἀλλ᾽ ὥσπερ τῆς ἡμέρης ἐβουλεύσαο ποιέειν, ταύτην ἴθι τῶν ὁδῶν. Hat. 
VIL 12. τὰ κατύπερθε ταύτης τῆς χώρης αἰεὶ νίφεται, ἐλάσσονι δὲ 
τοῦ θέρους ἢ τοῦ χειμῶνος, ὥσπερ καὶ οἰκός. Hdt. IV 31. 6 δὲ 
Θρασύβουλος, ἤδη συνειλεγμένων εἰς τὴν Φυλὴν περὶ ἑπτακοσίους, λαβὼν 
αὐτοὺς καταβαίνει τῆς νυκτός. Hell. ΠῚ 4 κ5.---᾿Αθηναῖοι μὲν δυοῖν 
νεοῖν ἐναντίαιν αἰεὶ τὴν νῆσον περιπλέοντες τῆς ἡμέρας (τῆς δὲ νυκτὸς 
καὶ ἁπάσαις περιώρμουν, πλὴν τὰ πρὸς τὸ πέλαγος, ὁπότε ἄνεμος εἴη). 
Thuc. ΓΝ 23 2. Here again the accusative might well be 
expected; but the αἰεί takes its place and the nouns are 
attracted to the more usual genitive construction—not only 
that with the article exerting an influence, but also that 
without, which in this instance could have been used. 
τοῦ δὲ θέρεος ἡ χιὼν .. . τηκομένη, Hdt. IV 50 (see p. 58). τῶν δ᾽ 
ἐντυχόντων τινὲς τῆς νυκτὸς φεύγοντες εἰς τὸ ἄστυ ἀπήγγελλον τοῖς 
᾿Αθηναίοις ὅτι στράτευμα πάμπολυ προσίο. Hell. V 4 21. καὶ τὸ 
ὕδωρ τὸ γενόμενον τῆς νυκτὸς ἐποίησε βραδύτερον αὐτοὺς ἐλθεῖν. Thuc. 
Π 5. 2. τοῦ μὲν χειμῶνός ἐστι (ὁ Ἴστρος) ὅσος περ ἐστί, ὀλίγῳ τε 
μείζων τῆς ἑωυτοῦ φύσιος γίνετα. Hdt. IV 5ο. ἐπιγίγνεται τῆς 
νυκτὸς χιὼν παμπληθὴς καὶ τῇ ὑστεραίᾳ. Hell. II 43. This last 
is a good example of the effect of usage. Here are a dative 
and an accusative connected by καί dependent on the same 
idea and virtually expressing the same relation. τῆς νυκτός, 
because it is followed by τῇ ὑστεραίᾳ, dates as precisely as 
the dative, which, had some demonstrative been inserted, 
might have been used ; but the force of usage was too strong 
to allow either to change its case. 

Passing to the instances of the genitive modified by the 
distributive article, it will be seen that they may be divided 
into two groups. 

1. In the first belong: pera τοῦτο ἐπορεύθησαν ἑπτὰ σταθμοὺς 
ἀνὰ πέντε παρασάγγας τῆς ἡμέρας. An. 1V 6 4. ov προΐει πλέον 
τῆς ἡμέρας ἢ δέκα ἢ δώδεκα σταδίων. Hell. 1V 65. δόντος βασι- 
λέως αὐτῷ Μαγνησίαν μὲν ἄρτον, ἣ προσέφερε πεντήκοντα τάλαντα τοῦ 
ἐνιαυτοῦ. Thuc. I 138 5. 

In each of these the temporal phrase signifies the time 
necessary for the action of the verb. To these should be 





—96— 


added two instances from Herodotus whose verbs are dif- 
ferent from the preceding, but in which the numeral adverb 
makes it evident that “time within which’ is the relation. 
πανηγυρίζουσι δὲ Αἰγύπτιοι οὐκ ἅπαξ τοῦ ἐνιαυτοῦ, πανηγύριας δὲ συχνάς. 
Hdt. ΠῚ 59. τοῦτο δὲ τὸ δεῖπνον παρασκευάζεται ἅπαξ τοῦ ἐνιαυτοῦ. 
Hdt. IX rio. 

2. To the second group belong: οἷς ἀργύριον Λέσβιοι ταξά- 
μενοι TOD κλήρου ἑκάστου τοῦ ἐνιαυτοῦ δύο μνᾶς φέρειν αὐτοὶ εἰργάζοντο 
τὴν γῆν. Thuc. III 502. τοῦ μὲν δημοσίου δραχμὴν τῆς ἡμέρας 
τῷ ναύτῃ ἑκάστῳ διδόντος. Thuc. VI 31 3. δραχμὴν γὰρ τῆς 
ἡμέρας ἕκαστος ἐλάμβανε. Thuc. VII 27 2 (11| 17 3). εἰ δέ τις 
τῶν πόλεων ἐκλίποι τὴν στρατείαν, ἐξεῖναι Λακεδαιμονίοις ἐπιζημιοῦν 
στατῆρι κατὰ τὸν ἄνδρα τῆς ἡμέρας. Hell. V 2 22. ὑπισχνοῦμαι 
δὲ ὑμῖν, ἂν ἐκπλέητε, ἀπὸ νουμηνίας μισθοφορὰν παρέξειν κυζικηνὸν 
ἑκάστῳ τοῦ μηνός. An. V 6 23. καὶ λέγει ὅτι δαρεικὸς ἑκάστῳ 
ἔσται μισθὸς τοῦ μηνός. An. VIL 6 τ. καὶ δαρεικὸν ἕκαστος οἴσει 
τοῦ μηνὸς ὑμῶν. An. ΝἼ]] 6 7. τοῦ μηνός, An. I 3 21, Hell. I 
5 5; Lhuc. VIII 29 2. 

Let us take as a typical example Thuc. VI 31 3. The 
temporal phrase, τῆς ἡμέρας, can scarcely be connected with 
such as μισθὸν τεττάρων μηνῶν An. I 2 12, as an analysis 
shows a marked difference. In the latter we have a word 
denoting indefinite pecuniary value, which is measured by 
the temporal unit or units in the genitive phrase, and this 
must depend upon the noun. In the former there is always 
present a definite unit of pecuniary value, while the tem- 
poral phrase indicates the temporal unit, the equivalent of 
the pecuniary unit. In other words, it is the temporal unit 
according to which the pay is given. It hardly seems possi- 
ble that the Greeks thought of this phrase as intimately con- 
nected with the verb, but rather with the noun, just as in 
English we say, I shall give you a dollar a day. Yet we 
cannot get rid of the fact that this distributive phrase was 
intimately connected with the verb (compare the first three 
examples in group 1). With this fact these instances must 
be connected in some way or other. It is apparently quite 
evident that in the instances under discussion the phrase is 


rere. τ τ΄ 


altogether formulaic, and the speaker never stopped to think 
of its relation. In the historical period he certainly did 
not think of the phrase as denoting the time in which the 
action falls, to which category some grammars refer it 
(Kuehner, Gramm. d. Griech. Spr. 3 ed. p. 387, Hadley- 
Allen § 759). Since it cannot logically depend upon the 
noun, we are thrown back upon the verb. But as it can 
scarcely be supposed that the pay was given and received 
some time during each day, may it not be thought that the 
phrase goes back to a period. when such was the case? 
(cf. Lev. XIX 13, Deut. XXIV 15.) This general phrase 
could have been used then when its relation by reason of 
the facts was perfectly clear; but in the course of time the 
conditions changed, yet the phrase remained. While of 
course this explanation is not proved, yet it is one that best 
correlates these cases with those first given and those with 
ἕκαστος to follow. 

This class of genitive temporal phrases just mentioned, 
namely those with ἕκαστος, must be dealt with separately. 
An interest attaches itself to them because out of twenty- 
five instances found in the sources for this study only two of 
them are not in the genitive case, one being in the accusative 
and one in the dative. Since these phrases are so generally 
used in the genitive case, it is natural to suppose that there 
must be something in the modifying word itself or in the 
context to differentiate them from the customary uses of 
the accusative and dative. Let us see whether anything 
in this line may be discovered. 

It may fairly be said that there is nothing in the meaning 
of the distributive itself to exclude extent of time. For 
instance, the following sentence would be called good Greek, 
ἐν τῷ στρατοπέδῳ ἑκάστην νύκτα ἔμενον.υ But the difference 
between this sentence and the examples collected is that the 
verbs, though able in some cases to express duration, yet 
are not strong enough like μένω to limit the meaning to 


7 


US — 


extent of time. In some instances it is expressly stated that 
the action does not continue throughout the whole period, 
as Hell. I 1 30 (see below) ; and in others it is impossible 
to conceive it as continuing throughout the period, as Hdt. 
IV 98 (see below). That Herodotus felt this difficulty 
seems implied in II 130 (see p. 62), in which πάννυχος is 
added to the accusative case. Hence it may be granted that 
the verbs in the examples cited below cannot give to the 
phrase the significance of extent of time. 

The answer to the second question, how such phrases are 
differentiated from the dative, is twofold. In the first place, 
every dative with exceedingly rare exceptions—of which but 
one is in point here and will be noted presently—designates 
a particular day, month, year, etc., something which a dis- 
tributive cannot do. In the second place, the verbs in the 
sentences with the ἕκαστος phrases denote customary action, 
either by their meaning, ἐνόμισε Hdt. VII 120, or by their 
tense, the present or imperfect, or by both, as ἐφοίτα Hdt. 
V 17. This is of course demanded by the meaning of the 
distributive. But out of all the great number of instances 
of the dative there is but one in which this is so, and that, 
strange to say—and yet it is not strange—is one contain- 
ing ἕκαστος, Hdt. III 57 αὐτοὶ δὲ τὰ γινόμενα τῷ ἐνιαυτῷ ἑκάστς 
χρήματα διενέμοντο. This dative is the more strange because 
out of the twenty instances in which the author uses a simi- 
lar phrase, eighteen are in the genitive. The explanation 
for this deviation may be that with Herodotus the niceties of 
case usage are not so marked as in a precise author like 
Thucydides, and that he was prone to break away from what 
was customary, or the force of analogy may have attracted 
the phrase into the dative case. An example of the former 
has been seen in his use of τοῦτον τὸν χρόνον and will later be 
further illustrated in his use of ἡμέρα and χρόνος in the 
genitive case. 

Given then a noun of time limited by the distributive 
adjective, ἕκαστος, and a verb denoting customary action, 


Vac. eas 


the conditions do not permit a precise dating, but can give 
only in a general way the time to which the action belongs. 

Some examples of these phrases are the following. ἐξιόν- 
τες δ᾽ ἑκάστης ἡμέρας σὺν τοῖς ὑποζυγίοις καὶ τοῖς ἀνδραπόδοις ἐφέροντο 
ἀδεῶς πυροὺς κτλ. An. ΝῚ 6 τ. καὶ ἕωσπερ ἐτειχίζετο τὸ τεῖχος, 
ἑκάστης ἡμέρας παραπομπαὶ ἐγίγνοντο. Hell. VII 2 23. Τριταν- 
ταίχμῃ τῷ ᾿Αρταβάζου ἐκ βασιλέος ἔχοντι τὸν νόμον τοῦτον ἀργυρίου 
μὲν προσήιε ἑκάστης ἡμέρης ἁρτάβη μεστή. Hdt. I 192. ἐπεὰν 
ἐμὲ ἴδητε τάχιστα πορευόμενον ἐπὶ Σκύθας, ἀπὸ τούτου ἀρξάμενοι τοῦ 
χρόνου λύετε ἅμμα ἕν ἑκάστης ἡμέρης. Hdt. IV 98. πρῶτα μὲν 
γὰρ ἔχεται τῆς λίμνης τὸ μέταλλον ἐξ οὗ ὕστερον τούτων τάλαντον 
ἀργυρίου ᾿Αλεξάνδρῳ ἡμέρης ἑκάστης époira. Hdt. V 17. ἱερὸς ὃ 
χῶρος τῆς ᾿Αρτέμιδος. τὸν ἔχοντα καὶ καρπούμενον τὴν μὲν δεκάτην 
καταθύειν ἑκάστου érovs. An. V 3 13. ἐπὶ δὲ τοῦ μείζονος βωμοῦ 
καὶ καταγίζουσι λιβανωτοῦ χίλια τάλαντα ἔτεος ἑκάστου οἱ Χαλδαῖοι. 
Hdt. 1 183. ἔτεος δὲ ἑκάστου ἁμάξας πεντήκοντα καὶ ἑκατὸν ἐπινέ- 
ουσι φρυγάνων. Hdt. ΙΝ 62. ἑκάστης ἡμέρης, Hdt. II 37, III 
90, τῆς ἡμέρας ἑκάστης, Thuc. V 47 6. ἔτεος ἑκάστου, Hdt. I 
67, II 177, III 84, V 82, VI 46.—In the following the pres- 
ence of a multiplicative adverb, etc., aids in excluding the 
idea of extent of time. ὅτι βασιλεὺς Ἐέρξης οὐ δὶς ἑκάστης ἡμέρης 
ἐνόμισε σῖτον αἱρέεσθαι. Hdt. VII 120. λοῦνται δὲ δὲς τῆς ἡμέρης 
ἑκάστης ψυχρῷ καὶ δὶς ἑκάστης νυκτός. Ηαΐ. I] 27. συρμαΐζουσι 
τρεῖς ἡμέρας ἐπεξῆς μηνὸς ἑκάστους Hdt. 11 77. κατὰ κώμας éxdo- 
τας ἅπαξ τοῦ ἔτεος ἑκάστου ἐποιέετο τάδε. Hdt. 1 το6. ὧν γὰρ 
ἐγίγνωσκε τοὺς ἐπιεικεστάτους καὶ τριηράρχων καὶ κυβερνητῶν καὶ 
ἐπιβατῶν, ἑκάστης ἡμέρας πρῷ καὶ πρὸς ἑσπέραν συναλίζων πρὸς τὴν 
σκηνὴν τὴν ἑαυτοῦ ἀνεκοινοῦτο ὅ τι ἔμελλεν ἢ λέγειν ἢ πράττειν. Hell. 
I 1 30. ἔτεος ἑκάστου ἅπαξ, Hdt. 1V 105. ἅπαξ τοῦ ἐνιαυτοῦ 
ἑκάστου, Hdt. IV 66. 

We now pass to the consideration of those genitive phrases 
that are modified by a word of stronger demonstrative char- 
acter than the article. The question to be answered is the 
same as has been proposed before, namely, Is there anything 
to differentiate the use of these expressions from that of 
the same in the accusative and dative? Let us first com- 
pare them with the accusative. 


—100— 


In the first place, there is nothing in the nature of the 
modifying word to debar the meaning of extent of time, 
providing the conditions be favorable; and there is nothing 
in the nature of the word to influence the meaning of the 
construction in that direction. Consequently since no mark 
of differentiation can be found in the modifying word, as a 
second resort the verb, the element next in importance, must 
be examined to see whether there is any difference in it. 
This may best be discovered by a classification according to 
the kind of action expressed by the verbs. 

1. Verbs that denote of themselves or by the aid of their 
context completion or accomplishment. 

atpew, to take a town, aor. Thuc. V 35 1. 

διαφθείρω, to destroy, aor. Thuc. III 94 1. 

ἥκω, pres. Thuc. VII 10; imp. Thuc. VI ὃ 1. 

καθίστημι, imp. Thuc. V 82 1. 

κατακαίω, aor. pass. Thuc. IV 133 2. 

καταλαμβάνω, to take a city, aor. Thuc. ΙΝ 1 1. 

κατασκάπτω, aor. Thuc. IV tog 1. 

λαμβάνω, to take prisoner, aor. Thuc. V 84 τ. 

νικάω, pres. Hdt. VII 166. 

oixiLw, to found a city, aor. Thuc. VI 3 2. 

περιαιρέω (τὸ τεῖχος), aor. Thuc. IV 51 1. 

διαλύω, pluperf. Thuc. V 1. 

πείθω, pres. Thuc. II 33 1, 80 1, II] roo 1; aor. Thuc. V 
52 2. 

συλλαμβάνω, to take prisoner, pres. Thuc. IV 50 1. 

These verbs by their meaning exclude from the accom- 
panying temporal phrase the meaning of extent of time. 
Yet lest there be doubt with regard to some, the following 
illustrations of doubtful verbs are given. τοῦ δ᾽ αὐτοῦ θέρους, 
καὶ περὶ τὸν αὐτὸν χρόνον ὃν ἐν TH Μήλῳ οἱ ᾿Αθηναῖοι κατείχοντο, καὶ 
ot ἀπὸ τῶν τριάκοντα νεῶν ᾿Αθηναῖοι περὶ Πελοπόννησον ὄντες πρῶτον 
ἐν "EdAwpevd τῆς Λευκαδίας φρουρούς τινας λοχήσαντες διέφθειραν. 
Thuc. III 94 1. In this sentence, in addition to the verb 
expressing accomplishment, the nature of the object and 
the prepositional phrase, following close upon the genitive 


ὍΘΕ) δ Ὁ 


phrase and indicating that but a part of the period was 
occupied, forbid the interpretation that the lying in wait 
and the destruction of a few guards lasted throughout 
the summer. And further, the temporal phrase does not 
give to the verb its particular meaning.—rod δ᾽ ἐπιγιγνομένου 
θέρους ἅμα ἦρι ot τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων πρέσβεις ἧκον ἐκ τῆς Σικελίας καὶ ot 
Ἐγεσταῖοι μετ᾽ αὐτῶν ἄγοντες ἑξήκοντα τάλαντα κτλ. Thuc. VI ὃ 1. 
The completion implied in ἧκον together with the ἐκ Σικελίας, 
the implied εἰς ᾿Αθήνας and the rest of the sentence, espe- 
cially ἅμα ἦρι, carry absolutely no evidence of their taking 
the whole summer to accomplish the act (a relation reg- 
ularly expressed by the genitive) or their remaining in 
Athens afterward throughout the summer.—zpos δὲ καὶ τάδε 
λέγουσι, ws συνέβη τῆς αὐτῆς ἡμέρης ἔν τε TH DuKeAly Τέλωνα καὶ 
Θήρωνα νικᾶν ᾿Αμίλκαν τὸν Καρχηδόνιον καὶ ἐν Σαλαμῖνι τοὺς Ἕλληνας 
τὸν Πέρσην. Hdt. VII 166. The verb, whose meaning is 
not influenced by the temporal phrase, does not mean “‘to be 
victorious throughout the same day”; but the personal 
objects show that it is “to conquer, to win a victory from.” 
It might be possible, perhaps, to take the temporal phrase 
with συνέβη, which with the meaning, “to happen,’’ denotes 
mere occurrence, thus excluding the relation of extent of 
timé.—rod δ᾽ αὐτοῦ θέρους, οὐ πολλῷ ὕστερον τούτων, ᾿Αμπρακιῶται 
καὶ Χαόνες, βουλόμενοι ᾿Ακαρνανίαν τὴν πᾶσαν καταστρέψασθαι καὶ ᾿Αθη- 
ναίων ἀποστῆσαι, πείθουσι Λακεδαιμονίους ναυτικόν τε παρασκευάσαι ἐκ 
τῆς ξυμμαχίδος καὶ ὁπλίτας χιλίους πέμψαι ἐπ᾽ ᾿Ακαρνανίαν. Thuc. Il 
801. The verb is somewhat similar to that of the preceding, 
being equivalent to “to win over to” a course of action. 

2. The second class of verbs consists of those that denote 
momentary or instantaneous action, and thus cannot be 
accompanied by a temporal phrase with the meaning of 
extent of time. 

ἀποκτείνω, pres. Thuc. VIII 24 1. 

ἀποπέμπω, pres. Thuc. VIII 7 1. 

ἀφίστημι, to revolt, aor. Thuc. ΓΝ 11, V 82 1. 

εἰσπέμπω, aor. Thuc. V 56 1. 

ἐμπίπρημι, aor. pass. Hell. [I 3 1]. 


iar 


ἐπιπίπτω, aor. Thuc. III 87 1. 

ἐπιτίθεμαι, fut. Hdt. VIII 7. 

ἔρχομαι, to arrive, fut. Od. 14 161, 19 306. 
κοιμάομαι, to go to sleep, aor. pass. Hell. II 2 3. 
παρέρχομαι, aor. Thuc. VIII 29 1. 

προσαφικνέομαι, Pluperf. Thuc. VIII 30 τ. 
στέλλω, aor. Thuc. II 69 1, III gt t. 

συγκυρέω, to happen, aor. Hdt. IX go. 

συγχωρέω, aor. Hell. III 2 30. 

συμπίπτω,, to befall, imp. Hdt. V 36. 

ψηφίζομαι, aor. Thuc. V 34 τ. 

τοῦ δ᾽ ἐπιγιγνομένου χειμῶνος ἧ νόσος τὸ δεύτερον ἐπέπεσε τοῖς 


Αθηναίοις. Thuc. III 87 1. 


τοῦδ αὑτοῦ λυκάβαντος ἐλεύσεται ἐνθάδ᾽ ᾿Οδυσσεύς 
τοῦ μὲν φθίνοντος μηνός, τοῦ δ᾽ ἱσταμένοιο.----Οα. 19 306-7. 


τοῦ δ᾽ ἐπιγιγνομένου χειμῶνος ᾿Αθηναῖοι ναῦς ἔστειλαν εἴκοσι μὲν περὶ 
Πελοπόννησον καὶ Φορμίωνα στρατηγόν. Thuc. II 69 τ. dor 
ἐκείνης τῆς νυκτὸς οὐδεὶς ἐκοιμήθη. Hell. II 2 3. τοῦ δ᾽ ἐπιόντος 
θέρους πέμψας Θρασυδαῖος εἰς Λακεδαίμονα συνεχώρησε Φάας τε τὸ τεῖχος 
περιελεῖν kth. Hell. III 2 30. Ἱστιαῖος μέν νυν ταῦτα διανοεύμενος 
ἀπέπεμπε τὸν ἄγγελον, ᾿Αρισταγόρῃ δὲ συνέπιπτε τοῦ αὐτοῦ χρόνου 
πάντα ταῦτα συνελθόντα. Hdt. V 36. καὶ τοῦ αὐτοῦ θέρους. .. οἱ 
Λακεδαιμόνιοι ἐψηφίσαντο τοὺς μὲν μετὰ Βρασίδου EiAwras μαχεσαμέ- 
νους ἐλευθέρους εἶναι καὶ οἰκεῖν ὅπου ἂν βούλωνται. Thuc. V 34 1. 

3. The third group of the verbs followed by genitive tem- 
poral phrases of a demonstrative character comprises those 
that may be followed by an expression denoting continuance. 

ἀνάγομαι, aor. Hell. I 1 13. 

ἀναχωρέω, aor. Thuc. V. 116 1. 

ἀποπειράω, aor. Thuc. IV 135 1. 

ἀποχωρέω, aor. Thuc. IV 130 1. 

βούλομαι, imp. Thuc. VI 1 1. 

γίγνομαι: γίνεσθαι τὰς μάχας, Hdt. IX 101; σφενδονῆται ἐγένοντο, 
An. III 3 20; τάδε χρήσιμα ἐγένετο, Hdt. VI 42; ἐκεχειρία γίγνε- 
ται, Thuc. IV 58; πόλεμος éyevero, Thuc. V 53 1; ἐκλιπὲς ἐγέ- 
vero, Thuc. IV 52 1; ᾿Ολύμπια ἐγένετο, Thuc. V 49 1; μάχη 
ἐγένετο, Thuc. V 51 1. 


—I103— 


διανοέω (φυλάσσειν), imp. Thuc. VI 961. . 

διέρχομαι, aor. Thuc. V 13 τ. 

εἰμί: 6 ἀγών ἐστι, Hdt. III 85. 

εἰσβάλλω, aor. Thuc. II 71 1; III 26 1. 

ἐκλείπω, aor. Thuc. II 28. 

ἐκστρατεύομαι, pres. Thuc. III 105 1. 

ἐμβάλλω, aor. Hell. I 2 4. 

éxaipw, pluperf. pass. Thuc. VIII 2 1. 

ἐπιβουλεύω, pres. Thuc. III 20 1. 

ἐπιστρατεύω, aor. Thuc. II 79 1. 

ἔρχομαι, aor. Thuc. III 89 1. 

θύω, aor. Hdt. II 47. 

καθαίρω, aor. Thuc. III 104 1. 

καταδέω, pluperf. Hdt. III 86. 

κατακλήω, aor. Thuc. V 83 4. 

καταπλέω, pres. Thuc. VIII 35 τ. 

AavOdvw (σχόντες), aor. Thuc. VI 97 τ (?). 

μέλλειν κατασκευάζεσθαι, pres. Thuc. IV 75 1. 

ναυμαχέω, aor. Thuc. VII 40 2. 

ὁράω, aor. Hdt. VI 107. 

παραπέμπω, aor. Thuc. VIII 61 1. 

παραπλέω, imp. Thuc. VIII το 1. 

παρασκευάζομαι, imp. Thuc. VI 63 1, VIII 87 1. 

ποιεῖσθαι (λόγους), pres. Thuc. V 36 1; imp. Thuc. IV 66 
1; (ἀπόβασιν), aor. Τ πο. III 115 1. 

πολεμέω, imp. Thuc. III go τ. 

προσβάλλω, imp. Thuc. III 103 1. 

προσφέρειν (λόγους), pres. Thuc. II 70 1. 

στρατεύω, pres. Thuc. III 88 1, IV 109 1, VIII 22 1; aor 
Thuc. Il 58 1,:66 1, τὸ Ὁ ME sy ΤΥ 3V 42 2) ΘΟ Vi-33: 7, 
VI 95 1. 

ovykabiornm, imp. Thuc. V 52 2. 

συμβάλλω, pres. Hdt. V 77. 

τέμνω (γῆν), imp. Thuc. VI 7 1. 

τῆς ἐπιούσης νυκτὸς ἀνηγάγοντο, Hell. I τ 13 (see p. 28). τῆς 
ἐπιούσης νυκτὸς ἀπεχώρησαν, Thuc. IV 130 1 (see p. 29). τοῦ 
δ᾽ αὐτοῦ χειμῶνος ᾿Αθηναῖοι ἐβούλοντο αὖθις μείζονι παρασκευῇ τῆς 


—104— 


μετὰ Λάχητος καὶ Ἐϊρυμέδοντος ἐπὶ Σικελίαν πλεύσαντες καταστρέψ- 
ασθαι. Thuc. ΝῚ τ τ. σφενδονῆται ἐγένοντο, An. III 3 20 (see 
Pp. 30). τοῦ δ᾽ αὐτοῦ θέρους "Ἐπιδαυρίοις καὶ ᾿Αργείοις πόλεμος ἐγένετο. 
Thuc. V 53 1. ἐκλιπὲς ἐγένετο, Thuc. IV 52 1 (see p. 106). 
Ὀλύμπια δ᾽ ἐγένετο τοῦ θέρους τούτου. Thuc. V 49 1. ὃ ἀγών 
ἐστι, Hdt. III 85 (seep. 29). τοῦ δ᾽ αὐτοῦ θέρους... ἐξέλιπε, Thuc. 
II 28 (see p. 106). τῆς ἐπιούσης νυκτὸς ἐνέβαλον. Hell. 1.2 4 
(see p. 29). τοῦ δ᾽ ἐπιγιγνομένου χειμῶνος πρὸς τὴν ἐκ τῆς Σικελίας 
τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων μεγάλην κακοπραγίαν εὐθὺς οἱ Ἕλληνες πάντες ἐπηρμένοι 
ἦσαν. Thuc. VIII] 2 1. This pluperfect is rather a state 
of feeling which may be continued than a mere completed 
action, and for this reason it has been classed here. τοῦ 
δ᾽ αὐτοῦ χειμῶνος καὶ Δῆλον ἐκάθηραν ᾿Αθηναῖοι κατὰ χρησμὸν δή τινα. 
Thuc, II] 104 1. διεξελαυνόντων δὲ (αὐτῶν) κατὰ τὸ προάστειον, 
ὡς κατὰ τοῦτο τὸ χωρίον ἐγίνοντο ἵνα τῆς παροιχομένης νυκτὸς κατεδέ- 
Sero ἡ θήλεα ἵππος. Hdt. III 86. This pluperfect also might 
be followed by an accusative denoting a continuance of the 
state following upon the completion of the act. τῆς αὐτῆς 
ταύτης νυκτὸς... παρέπλεον, Thuc. VIII 102 1 (see p. 30). τοῦ 
δ᾽ ἐπιγιγνομένου χειμῶνος εὐθὺς τὴν ἔφοδον of ᾿Αθηναῖοι ἐπὶ Συρακούσας 
παρεσκευάζοντο, ot δὲ Συρακόσιοι καὶ αὐτοὶ ὡς ἐπ᾽ ἐκείνους ἰόντες. 
Thuc. VI 63 1. τοῦ δ᾽ αὐτοῦ θέρους ἐπολέμουν μὲν καὶ ἄλλοι, ὡς 
ἑκάστοις ξυνέβαινεν, ἐν τῇ Σικελίᾳ καὶ αὐτοὶ of Σικελιῶται κελ. Thuc. 
III 90 1. καὶ οἱ μὲν ἐν Σικελίᾳ ᾿Αθηναῖοι καὶ Ῥηγῖνοι τοῦ αὐτοῦ 
χειμῶνος τριάκοντα ναυσὶ στρατεύουσιν ἐπὶ τὰς Αἰόλου νήσους καλου- 
μένας. Thuc. III 88 1, τῆς δὲ αὐτῆς ταύτης ἡμέρης οἱ ᾿Αθηναῖοι 
διαβάντες ἐς τὴν Εὔβοιαν συμβάλλουσι καὶ τοῖσι Χαλκιδεῦσι. Hat. 
Vy 

A comparison of these verbs with those that are limited 
by phrases of extent of time shows that in the list there is 
not a single verb that contains an element of duration capa- 
ble of giving to the temporal phrase the force of extent of 
time. Further there is not found in the context of any of 
them any factor that aids or compels the interpretation that 
the action extended throughout the whole of the given 
period; but instead in many of them there is some word 
or phrase indicating that the action does not extend through- 


--τοῦ-- 


out the period. How then do the genitive phrases with 
the above verbs differ from those in the accusative with 
verbs of the same character? Perhaps all that can be said 
is that one phrase has the inflectional ending of the accusa- 
tive and the other that of the genitive. But in regard to 
the former it has been shown that the case ending was 
necessary to indicate that the analysis of thought had been 
carried to the point of thinking the given period to be that 
through which the action continued, as well as the time 
when it occurred; with the genitive, however, the analysis 
has stopped with a mere designation of the time, which idea 
is conveyed by the meanings of the words themselves in 
the phrase without referring to the ending; that is to say, 
a phrase such as τῆς ἐπιούσης νυκτός indicates in itself a 
particular time and nothing else, and the genitive ending 
serves as a mark, as it were, to show that it is not accusa- 
tive. 

Thus I hope it has been made clear that the verbs with 
the genitive demonstrative phrases either differ from those 
with the accusative of the same or like phrases in that they 
express completed or momentary action, or if they are the 
same, there is nothing to influence the meaning of the con- 
struction toward extent of time, and there is no danger of 
confusing the one with the other. 

The attempt to discover marks of differentiation distin- 
guishing the uses of the genitive and dative of the same or 
like phrases is a more difficult matter. One of the peculiar 
characteristics of the dative phrases is that they point out 
a particular day, night, month or year by reason of the 
definite character of the modifying words; but the same 
may be said of the genitive phrases, since they contain 
either the same modifying words or those of equivalent 
meaning. Again, the verbal ideas upon which the dative 
phrases depend denote some particular act, which may be 
one of completion, may be momentary, may be continued ; 
but the same is true of the genitive phrases. It may be said 
that a difference lies in the fact that in some of the exam- 


om OG 


ples there is present a secondary temporal expression de- 
fining the time more accurately and showing that the action 
occupied only a part of the time indicated by the genitive 
phrase. As for example: τοῦ δ᾽ ἐπιγιγνομένου θέρους ἅμα ἦρι ot 
τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων πρέσβεις ἧκον ἐκ τῆς Σικελίας καὶ ot ᾿Εγεσταῖοι μετ᾽ 
αὑτῶν ἄγοντες ἑξήκοντα τάλαντα κτλ. Thuc. ΨΝῚ 8 τ. τοῦ δ᾽ ἐπιγιγ- 
νομένου θέρους ἅμα τῷ ἦρι εὐθὺς ἀρχομένῳ, Thuc. VIII 61 τ. τοῦ 
δ᾽ ἐπιγιγνομένου θέρους περὶ σίτου ἐκβολὴν Συρακοσίων δέκα νῆες πλεύ- 
σασαι καὶ Λοκρίδες ἴσαι Μεσσήνην τὴν ἐν Σικελίᾳ κατέλαβον. Thuc. 
IV 1 1. τοῦ δ᾽ αὐτοῦ θέρους νουμηνίᾳ κατὰ σελήνην... ὃ ἥλιος ἐξέλιπε 
μετὰ μεσημβρίαν καὶ πάλιν ἀνεπληρώθη. Thuc. II 28 1. τοῦ δ᾽ 
αὐτοῦ θέρους καὶ ἅμα τῇ τῶν Ἰ]λαταιῶν ἐπιστρατείᾳ ᾿Αθηναῖοι ... ἐπε- 
στράτευσαν ἐπὶ Χαλκιδέας τοὺς ἐπὶ Θράκης καὶ Βοττιαίους ἀκμάζοντος 
τοῦ σίτου. Thuc. Il 79 1. τοῦ δ᾽ ἐπιγιγνομένου θέρους... ἅμα τῷ 
σίτῳ ἀκμάζοντι, Thuc. III] 1 1. τοῦ δ᾽ ἐπιγιγνομένου θέρους... περὶ 
νουμηνίαν, Thuc. IV 52 1.—But the same phenomenon may 
be paralleled with the dative, as: dOpda δὲ γενόμεναι ai νῆες 
ἅπασαι ἐν ἸΠαρίῳ ἕξ καὶ ὀγδοήκοντα τῆς ἐπιούσης νυκτὸς ἀνηγάγοντο, 
καὶ τῇ ἄλλῃ ἡμέρᾳ περὶ ἀρίστου ὥραν ἧκον εἰς IIpoxdwyoov. Hell. I 
113. τῇ δὲ τετάρτῃ πρῴ, Hell. VI5 20. τῇ ὑστεραίᾳ ἅμα τῇ 
ἡμέρᾳ, Hell. V 4 49. ἡμέρᾳ πέμπτῃ ἢ ἕκτῃ καὶ δεκάτῃ ἀφ᾽ ἧς εἰσέ- 
βαλε, θυσάμενος πρῳ διεπορεύθη πρὸ δείλης ἑξήκοντα καὶ ἑκατὸν στάδια 
ἐπὶ τὴν λίμνην κελ. Hell. ΓΝ 6 6. Λύσανδρος δὲ τῇ ἐπιούσῃ νυκτί, 
ἐπεὶ ὄρθρος ἦν, ἐσήμηνεν κτλ. Hell. ΠῚ τ 22. τῇ δ᾽ ὑστεραίᾳ ἅμα 
τῇ ἡμέρᾳ ἐθύετο μὲν πρὸ τοῦ στρατεύματος. Hell. V15 18. ὁ δὲ 
Θουκυδίδης καὶ αἱ νῆες ταύτῃ τῇ ἡμέρᾳ ὀψὲ κατέπλεον ἐς τὴν ᾿Ηιόνα. 
Thuc. IV 106 3. τῇ αὐτῇ ἡμέρᾳ ἐς ὀψέ. Thuc. VIII 23 2. τῇ 
δ᾽ ὑστεραίᾳ ἀνηγάγοντο μὲν νυκτὸς ἐπ᾽ ὀλίγας ναὺς τοὺς ὁπλίτας πάντας 
ἐπιβιβάσαντε. Thuc. ΙΝ 31 1. τῇ δὲ ὑστεραίᾳ περὶ δείλην τὸ 
τεῖχος ὅσον οὐκ ἀπετετέλεστου Thuc. IV 69 3. © 

There must be added to the above described external 
or formal similarity of the genitive and dative demonstra- 
tive phrases another point of resemblance, namely, the like- 
ness in meaning to be inferred from the examples given 
pp. 3098. 

If then it is admitted that the nouns in the given phrases 
are used in both cases, that the subordinate words in the 


phrases are equivalent in nature, that the verbs are alike in 
character, and finally that the phrases are equal in meaning, 
there still remains the question, Why is it that some phrases 
are found more often in one case than the other? For it 
is true that there is quite a marked difference in the relative 
use of the two cases. This is clear from the following per- 
centages, which are based on all the instances of both cases 
marked by the same or like modifiers found in the Anabasis 
and Hellenica of Xenophon, and in Thucydides and Herodo- 
tus. Taking the words in the order of their frequency in 
the genitive case, we have 97 per cent. of the phrases con- 
taining a word denoting a season in the genitive case (72 
in the genitive and 2 in the dative). Of those containing 
νύξ 61 per cent. are in the genitive (8 in the genitive, 5 in 
the dative). Of those with ἡμέρα only about 3 per cent. 
are in the genitive—only one case being found outside of 
Herodotus (7 in the genitive, 243 in the dative). With 
éros 6 per cent. are genitive (4 in the genitive, 56 in the 
dative). Of those with μήν 16 per cent. are genitive (2 in 
the genitive, 10 in the dative). With χρόνος 27 per cent. 
are genitives (3 in the genitive, 8 in the dative). In the 
case of νύξ, μήν and χρόνος, by reason of the small number 
of instances, conclusions may not have the weight that those ° 
drawn from the other words have; yet at least it may be said 
that the percentages show a leaning in a certain direction. 
At any rate it will be remembered that among the νύξ 
phrases three are immediately followed by similar dative 
phrases of ἡμέρα, An. III 3 20, Hell. I 1 13, Thuc. IV 
130 1, and also that the genitive phrases containing μήν and 
χρόνος are all from Herodotus, who in other particulars 
does not agree with the other sources used. The above per- 
centages are merely another way of indicating what has been 
shown earlier in the discussion (p. 14), that the words denot- 
ing the time of day and the season of the year are employed 
more often in the genitive case than in the dative, while those 
signifying day (twenty-four hours), month and year are 


—108— 


more often in the dative. This division, it will also be 
recalled, is the same that exists between the words that may 
be used alone in the genitive and those that are not. Now 
since the words for the time of day and season of the year 
were regularly put into the genitive when used alone and 
with the article, it is not irrational to suppose that when 
modified by a word of demonstrative character, giving the 
exact time of an act, they were attracted into that case; 
and also that those words which because of their meaning 
could not be used alone in the genitive were, when coupled 
with a word of demonstrative character, regularly employed 
in the dative, which had been adapted to the dating of an 
action. The fact that the latter are also found in the geni- 
tive—a rather rare exception—should not be wondered at, 
since expressions so similar in meaning were as a rule in 
the genitive. 

Since then these genitive and dative phrases, dividing 
along the given lines, are so similar in structure and mean- 
ing and depend on verbs of the same nature, we conclude 
that the resultant was the same, and that the dating element 
of the one was as prominent as that of the other. However, 
it should be said that this does not make the genitive of 
such phrases less able to express the time within which an 
action falls, since the conditions may be such as to bring 
about this meaning. But of all the instances of such geni- 
tive phrases collected, only four are certainly of that sort. 
One is found in Thucydides, who seems to be most consistent 
in his employment of the cases, two in Herodotus, one of 
which is quite different from all the others, and one in 
Homer, also entirely different. 

ὡς τῆς ye ἡμέρας ταύτης οὐκέτι οἰόμενοι ἂν ναυμαχῆσαι. Thuc. 
VII 40 2. The general situation described, and especially 
the οὐκέτι of this sentence, seem to point pretty definitely to 
the meaning “‘no longer during this day.’’—rod προτέρου 
ἔτεος ἐπεὰν ἀπολίπῃ ὃ Νεῖλος, of ἰχθύες ἐντεκόντες Ga ἐς τὴν ἰλὺν ἅμα 
τῷ ἐσχάτῳ ὕδατι ἀπαλλάσσοντα. Hdt. II 93. The temporal 
phrase depends upon ἀπολίπῃ, and the fact that ἐπεάν is 


indefinite, not referring to any particular time, distinctly 
favors the meaning of the “time within which.” 
ἐλθὼν γάρ ῥ᾽ ἐκάκωσε Bin Ἡρακληείη 
τῶν προτέρων ἐτέων.---Ἰ]. II 690-1. 

The plural temporal phrase does not lend itself to being 
gathered up as it were into a single period like the singular 
and so dating with exactness; nor does the verb contain an 
element of duration able to limit the meaning to extent. 
Thus by reason of the nature of the verb and the number of 
the phrase the meaning is quite clearly “time within which.” 
This case is interesting as the only instance of a genitive 
plural not modified by a word of measure-—The fourth to 
be cited is altogether different from all the other genitive 
phrases. ἐπεὰν δὲ γυναικὶ τὸ παιδίον ἁδρὸν γένηται, συμφοιτέουσι és 
τὠυτὸ οἱ ἄνδρες τρίτου μηνός, καὶ τῷ ἂν οἴκῃ τῶν ἀνδρῶν τὸ παιδίον, 
τούτου παῖς νομίζετα. Hdt. IV 180. The difference lies in 
the modifying word and the verb. This is the only case 
found in which the ordinal numeral is used with the geni- 
tive. In all other instances the ordinal refers to one particu- 
lar period and is regularly in the dative case, with here and 
there an example of one in the accusative. But in this case 
one particular month cannot be referred to because of the 
frequentative nature of the verb, which gives to the temporal 
phrase the meaning of “the third month in each case,”’ while 
the verb accompanied by a dative always refers to one par- 
ticular act. That the verb does not denote frequentative 
action within the month is made clear by the subject-matter. 
The genitive was chosen in this case because on account of 
the connection of the dative with the precise dating of a 
single act it was not adapted for expressing the time of an 
action occurring repeatedly. This single instance fits well 
with the genitive phrases containing the distributive adjec- 
tive, ἕκαστος. . 

As this finishes our study of the construction of nouns 
of time in the genitive, we are ready for a final summary.* 


* But two instances of nouns not primarily indicating time have 
been discovered in the genitive temporal construction. Both of 


-ἰτο-- 


Generally speaking, the results may be given as follows. If 
the noun is unmodified, the meaning may be ascertained 
without calling upon the inflectional ending, for the reason 
that the words so used, a time of day or season of the year, 
by reason of their indefiniteness, exclude the possibility of 
dating with precision, and cannot be used to denote the time 
of duration unless two of them be together and represent 
consecutive periods, as day and night. The few instances 
found of this combination were unable to express the accu- 
sative relation because of the character of the statement in 
which they stood. In practically all the examples in which 
there was a modifying word of measure, the meaning 
was gained without resorting to the case. The modifying 
word shut out the dating relation, and that of extent was 
debarred in some instances by the verbs, which expressed 
completion or momentary action, or if containing an element 
of duration this was held in abeyance by the general context, 
or by a negative which gave the effect of non-occurrence ; 
though it should be said that there can be conceived, and 
doubtless are, instances in which the case of such a phrase 
must bear the burden of the whole meaning in order to 
distinguish it from the accusative of the same. If the modi- 
fying word was the article, the lack of a more definite word 
distinguishes it from the dative construction, and in not a 
few instances the verb did likewise in case of the accusative ; 
but if the verb was one that might be accompanied by the 
regular accusative construction, the inflectional ending of 
the noun served as a distinguishing mark, though not abso- 
lutely necessary for ascertaining the meaning, as was true 
of the accusative, since the meaning of the noun itself with 
the article was sufficient. The marks of difference with the 
demonstrative phrases when in the genitive and accusative 
these are in the unmodified form and in meaning resemble those 
words that are used in the genitive without any limiting word, 
rather than those found more often in the dative. They are 
᾿ ψηνεμίης 1]. 5 523 and ἀπηλιώτου Thuc. III 23 5. The weak and vague 


temporal element makes it necessary to depend almost entirely upon 
the case for the meaning. 


er EET ones 


were found to be the same as those in the case of the noun 
with the article, and the inflectional ending often played the 
same role as it did with the noun modified by the article. 
But between these phrases in the genitive and the same in 
the dative no line of division was found in most instances ; 
by reason of the close resemblance in all particulars the 
meaning was practically the same. All this seems to elimi- 
nate in great degree the assistance rendered by the case 
ending. But as was said with regard to the accusative, this 
aid cannot be denied and did exert great influence because 
of the constant connection of this case with the relation of 
“time within which.” Notwithstanding, it is hoped that 
it has been shown that there were other elements which 
exercised a strong force in shaping the meaning of the con- 
struction, and at times took the burden from the case. 


IV. THE DATIVE. 


The third and last case to be studied is the dative. In 
this are found as compared with the genitive more examples 
of words which, though expressing a temporal relation, do 
not primarily have a temporal meaning. This fact makes 
the first line of separation, dividing the material into that 
which is marked by a noun of purely temporal meaning and 
that which is not so marked. In the former class a natural 
subdivision is into the modified and unmodified nouns, of 
which the latter are few and limited to Homer and Herodo- 
tus. The large subdivision of the modified forms must be 
further broken up into those limited by a word of more or 
less demonstrative character, and those upon which depends 
a word of measure. The great bulk of the material consists 
of words of time modified by some word of a demonstrative 
nature. It is on this division that the rule in the grammars 
is based, and to it our attention will be directed first. 

The disinguishing mark of this most extensive class is 
the word of demonstrative force, namely, a demonstrative 
pronoun, an ordinal numeral, αὐτός ““same,’’ ἄλλος “ next,”’ 
ὑστεραῖος, ὕστερος, προτεραῖος, πρότερος, τελευταῖος, ὕστατος, ἐπιών, 
ἐπιγιγνόμενος, αὔριον, πρόσθεν. ‘The fact that the ratio of the 
occurrences of such phrases in the dative to the occurrences 
of the same or like phrases in the genitive and accusative 
together is 2:1, induces the belief that there must be some- 
thing in the modifying word which is specially adapted for 
expressing what the dative case stands for, the time at which 
an action takes place. 

In the first place, as was said before, this kind of modify- 
ing word marks a particular, definite period, which certainly 
is a requisite in precise dating. Again, a word of demon- 
strative nature connotes no idea of duration; accordingly 
when a demonstrative was used and duration was the thought 
to be expressed, this notion of duration had to be given by 


the verb, by the context, and under certain conditions by 
the case alone. Unless there is something to prevent, such 
a demonstrative word brings before the mental vision the 
designated time, not as a period more or less extended, but 
contracted as it were into a point. That is, the analysis is 
not carried to the point of thinking “some time within” or 
“throughout” the given period, but is content with pointing 
out the period “when.” For instance, in the sentence, It 
rained that night, neither speaker nor hearer stops to con- 
sider whether it rained all night or only a part, and if so, 
what part. “That night’ is to them for the present an 
indivisible unit, a mere point. To be sure, if questions were 
asked, the answer would be that it rained throughout or 
sometime in the night; but the point is that no such ques- 
tions are raised. ‘That they are not is due to the definiteness 
in pointing out a particular time as the one when the act 
took place, which is entirely satisfactory to both speaker 
and hearer. That this analysis is correct is made more 
probable by the fact that such expressions are not found in 
the dative plural, since the plural number can hardly be 
thought of as a single unit. -Thus these demonstrative 
phrases are differentiated from the loose and rather indefinite 
phrases in which ‘the article is the only modifier and the 
still more vague expressions which lack any modifier. That 
in most cases demonstrative phrases in the genitive do not 
differ from the same in the dative has been shown. 

On the other hand, comparing them with the accusative 
expressions, it will be noticed that there is no danger of 
confusion on this point, as there are other marks of differ- 
entiation besides the mere fact that the demonstrative dative 
phrases outnumber the same phrases in the accusative four 
to one. In the first place, a word of demonstrative nature, 
though used in phrases denoting extent of time, does not 
have linked with it any notion of duration, and when joined 
to a noun of time it does not call up such an idea, but rather 
that of the time when an act occurs. In the second place, a 


8 


marked sign of distinction lies in the verbs, many of which 
could not be used with expressions denoting extent of time. 
This will best be seen from a classification of the verbs. 

1. Among the many verbs upon which such phrases 
depend there is quite a large class which denote completion 
or accomplishment, by their stem meaning or by the aid 
of the context or tense. It has already been seen that the 
relation of duration is not consonant with such a significa- 
tion, when that alone is the meaning, and not a continuance 
of the state following upon the act of completion. In this 
class of verbs are the following. 

aipew, to take, to capture, pres. Hdt. VI 18, 31, Thuc. 
III 96 2, Hell. ΤΙ 1 15; fut. Il. 2 37, 329; aor. Hdt. V 115, 
Thuc. IV 1301; pluperf. Hell. IV 4 19. 

ἁλίσκομαι, pres. Thuc. VII 3 5. 

ἀνίστημι, to make to emigrate, aor. Thuc. II 27 1. 

ἀποτελέω, pluperf. pass. Thuc. IV 69 3. 

ἀφαιρέω, to take off, pres. Hdt. IV 75. 

ἁρμόζομαι, to betroth to oneself, aor. Hdt. V 32. 

ἀφανίζω, pluperf. pass. Hdt. IX 84. 

ἐκπολιορκέω, to take by siege, aor. Thuc. I 117 3. 

ἐκφεύγω, to escape, pres. Hdt. VI 4o. 

ἐξέρχομαι, perf. Hell. V 2 2. 

ἐπινύσσω, imp. Il. 14 249. 

ἥκω, pres. An. II 3 25; imp. An. I 2 21, V 411, VII 1 
37, Hell. 11 13, I] 2 17, II] 4 21, 1V 4 9; fut. An. IV 5 το. 

θάπτω, pres. Il. 24 665; aor. Il. 24 612. 

καθίστημι, aor. Thuc. IV 103 4. 

κατακαίω, aor. An. VII 41. 

καταλαμβάνω, to seize, pres. An. III 4 37; to overtake, 
aor. Thuc. VII 83 1. 

καταλύω, aor. pass. An. VI 2 12. 

κτίζω, aor. Thuc. IV 102 3, VI 4 3. 

λαμβάνω, to take a city, aor. pass. Thuc. IV ror 1. 

ληίζομαι, to carry off, to steal, aor. Hdt. III 47. 

νικάω, imp. Thuc. I 100 1; aor. Hdt. III 59, Hell. IV 5 2. 


οἴχομαι (προφέρουσα), pres. 1]. 6 346. 


πέρθω, to destroy, imp. Il. 12 15; fut. Il. 21 584; aor. 1]. 
21 517; Od. 5 107, 14 241. 

ποιέω, (τύμβον) aor. Il. 24 666; (ἐκκλησίαν) Hell. I 1 14, 
II 2 4. 

προσλαμβάνω, to take in addition, aor. Thuc. VIII 28 1. 

mpoorraiw, aor. Hdt. V1 95. 

τελέω, aor. Od. 7 325, Thuc. IV 78 5. 

τρέπω, aor. pass. An. V 4 23. 

ὑπερβάλλω, to pass beyond, to surpass, aor. Hell. ΓΝ 3 9, 
Hdt. III 131. 

φεύγω, to escape, aor. Od. 6 170. 

φθάνω (παροικοδομήσαντες Kai παρελθόντες), aor. Thuc. VII 6 4. 

An examination of the following illustrations will show 
without further explanation that the idea of accomplishment 
or completion in the verb is not dependent for its existence 
on the temporal phrase, since in no case is the temporal 
adjunct necessary to make complete sense. If it were cut 
out of the sentence altogether, the meaning of the verb 
would remain the same. 

τῶν δὲ ἐν Κύπρῳ πολίων ἀντέσχε χρόνον ἐπὶ πλεῖστον πολιορκευμένη 
Soro, τὴν πέριξ ὑπορύσσοντες τὸ τεῖχος πέμπτῳ μηνὶ εἷλον οἱ Πέρ- 
σαι. Hdt. V τις. ἐλέγοντο δὲ καὶ ai σπονδαὶ ἐξεληλυθέναι τοῖς 
Μαντινεῦσι τούτῳ τῷ ἔτε. Hell. V 22. τῇ δ᾽ ὑστεραίᾳ κατακαύ- 
σας ὃ SevOns τὰς κώμας παντελῶς κτλ. An. VIL 4 τ. καὶ γὰρ 
θώρηκα ἐληίσαντο τῷ προτέρῳ ἔτεϊ ἢ τὸν κρητῆρα οἱ Σάμιο. Hdt. 
Ill 47. καὶ ἧκον τῇ ὑστεραίᾳ ἄγοντες τριακόσια πλοῖα μονόξυλα καὶ 
ἐν ἑκάστῳ τρεῖς ἄνδρας. An. V 411. τοῦ δὲ Δηλίου ἑβδόμῃ καὶ 
δεκάτῃ ἡμέρᾳ ληφθέντος μετὰ τὴν μάχην. Thuc. 1V τοι 1. ἐγέ- 
vero δὲ μετὰ ταῦτα καὶ ἡ ἐπ᾿ Εὐρυμέδοντι ποταμῷ πεζομαχία καὶ ναυ- 
μαχία ᾿Αθηναίων καὶ τῶν ξυμμάχων πρὸς Μήδους, καὶ ἐνίκων τῇ αὐτῇ 
ἡμέρᾳ ἀμφότερα ᾿Αθηναῖοι. Thuc. I 100 1. τῇ δὲ ὑστεραίᾳ ᾿Αλκι- 
βιάδης ἐκκλησίαν ποιήσας παρεκελεύετο αὑτοῖς ὅτι κτλ. Hell. I 1 
14. δείσαντες μάλιστα τὸν περίπλοον τοῦ Αθω, ὅτι τῷ προτέρῳ ἐτεὶ 
ποιεύμενοι ταύτῃ τὴν κομιδὴν μεγάλως προσέπταισαν. Hdt. VI 95. 
of δ᾽ ἄλλοι βάδην ἐπορεύοντο πρῶτον μὲν ἐπὶ τὸ χωρίον ἀφ᾽ οὗ τῇ 
προτεραίᾳ οἱ βάρβαροι ἐτρέφθησαν καὶ οἱ σὺν αὐτοῖς. An. V 4 23. 
καὶ τῇ ἐπιούσῃ νυκτὶ ἔφθασαν παροικοδομήσαντες καὶ παρελθόντες τὴν 


—116— 


τῶν ᾿Αθηναίων οἰκοδομίάν. Thuc. VII 6 4. Here the idea of 
accomplishment lies in the fact of carrying the wall beyond 
the line of fortification being made by the Athenians. 


καὶ μὲν οἱ ἔνθ᾽ ἦλθον, καὶ ἄτερ καμάτοιο τέλεσσαν 
ἤματι τῷ αὐτῷ καὶ ἀπήνυσαν οἴκαδ᾽ ὀπίσσω.---Οα. 7 325-6. 


2. A second and still larger class of verbs, with which 
these demonstrative phrases in the dative are often con- 
nected, consists of those which have been called verbs of 
instantaneous or momentary action. As has been said, such 
verbs cannot be followed by a temporal expression indicating 
the relation of extent, unless they express repeated action, 
which is not the case in any of our examples; but the 
temporal relation, because of the character both of the 
phrase and the verb, must be limited to the time when the 
action takes place. As it is difficult always to maintain a 
clear-cut division between this class and the preceding, some 
may appear to belong to both. But whether they are the 
one or the other, the statement still holds good that they 
are not followed by an expression of extent of time. 

aipéw, to take (from a hook), aor. 1]. 5 210. 

αἰσθάνομαι, pres. Hell. IV τ 20. 

dvadaivopar, imp. Od. το 29. 

ἀνίστημι, to rise, imp. An. IV ὃ 21. 

ἀπέρχομαι, to come back to, aor. An. II 5 27. 

ἀποδίδωμι, aor. Thuc. VI 71 1, An. VII 7 55. 

ἀποθνήσκω, aor. An. IV ὃ at. 

ἀποκτείνω, aor. Hell. II 1 8. 

ἄρχομαι, pres. Hdt. V 89; aor. Thuc. IV go 3. 

ἀφίημι, aor. Hell. I 2 18, 6 15. 

ἀφικνέομαι, pres. Hdt. IV 44, Thuc. I 60 3, VII 82 3, VIII 
23 2, An. IV 7 21, VI 115, VII 8 6; aor. Hdt. I 126, Il 
111, IV 42, V 42, VII 31, IX 86, Thuc. IV 45 2, An. IV 
8 1, Hell. II 1 ro. 

ἀφίστημι, to revolt, aor. Hdt. I 130, VII τ. 

διαφθείρω, to put to death, aor. pass. Hdt. IV 166. 

δίδωμι, aor. Il. 18 84, 22 470, Od. 24 65. 


—117— 


δοκέω, to determine, imp. An. IV 5 1; aor. Hell. II 3 1. 

édw (ἀπελθεῖν), aor. Thuc. VIII 69 2. 

ἐκβάλλω (ἔπος), aor. 1]. 18 324. 

ἐξίημι, to let out, pres. Hdt. II 87. 

ἐμβάλλω, to put into the hands, aor. Il. 21 47, to put into 
the heart, Il. 19 88. 

ἐπέρχομαι, to come upon, aor. Hdt. VIII 22. 

ἐπιβαίνω, to set foot upon, aor. Od. g 83. 

ἐπινεύω, aor. Il. 15 75. 

ἐπιτέλλομαι, imp. Il. 9. 252, 11 765. 

ἔρχομαι, to come, to arrive, fut. Il. 1 425, Od. 2 176; aor. 
Il. τι 708, 13 793, Od. 3 306, 4 82, 16 18, 206, 19 484, 21 
208, 23 102, 170, 24 322, Hdt. ΤΥ 1V 113, VI 69, Thuc. I 
18 2, II] 113 1, IV το 3, VII 28 3, An. I 5 12, Hell. III 2 
JO 5 22 Vi a re V's a: 

εἰσέρχομαι, aor. Thuc. II 2 1. 

εὑρίσκω, aor. Hdt. ΙΧ 83. 

θνήσκω, aor. Od. 5 308. 

ἱκνέομαι, fut. Il. 15 252; aor. Il. 9 363, Od. 5 34, το 81. 

κατακτείνω, aor. 1]. 19 59. 

κατανεύω, aor. 1]. 2 350. 

κελεύω, imp. Hdt. VI 46, An. II 3 1. 

μεταμελέω, aor. Hdt. I 130. 

μεταπέμπομαι, pres. An. VII 2 13; aor. Hell. II στ το. 

otyw, aor. Od. 3 392. 2 

ὁμολογέω, aor. Thuc. I ror 3. 

oppaw, imp. An. II τ 3; aor. Thuc. II 19 1, VI 3 3. 

παραγίγνομαι, to arrive, pres. Thuc. III 75 1, 76 1. 

παραδίδωμι, pres. An. VII 4 21. 

παύω, aor. Hdt. VII 191, Thuc. VIII 68 4; pluperf. Hdt. 
VII 192. 

πελάζω, aor. Od. 7 254, 12 448, 14 315. 

πέμπω, pres. Hdt. VII 210, Thuc. I 30 3, An. II 31; imp. 
Il. 9 438, Od. 5 263; aor. Hell. 16 1. 

πίπτω, aor. Od. 19 202, Hdt. II 141. 

προδίδωμι, pres. Hdt. VI ror. 

προεῖπε, to command (before), Hdt. VI 95. 


—118— 


προτίθημι, to put before one, to propose, pres. Hdt. I 133. 

προσέρχομαι, aor. Hell. VI 3 το. 

πυνθάνομαι, aor. Hdt. IX 9. 

συμβαίνω, to agree, aor. Thuc. I 103 1; to happen, aor. 
(παραστήσασθαι) Thuc. I 29 5; (ἐσβαλεῖν) Thuc. V 75 4, 
(ἀποθανεῖν) Hdt. VII 4. 

συμφέρω, to happen, aor. (γενέσθαι) Hdt. I 19, 74, III 42. 

τυγχάνω (ἀφιγμένος), imp. Hell. V 3 1. 

τελευτάω, to die, fut. Hdt. II 133; aor. VII 80; to end, 
aor. Thuc. III 68 5. 

ὑπάρχω, to begin, pres. Thuc. V 9 9. 

gaivw, pres. Hell. III 2 25; aor. pass. Od. 5 279, Hat. 
IV 14, 95, An. III 4 37. 

χράομαι, to inquire of an oracle, pres. Hdt. I 47. 

As in the case of the preceding class these verbs also are 
not dependent on the temporal phrase for their meaning, 
and it may be inferred from the following illustrations that 
the absence of the temporal phrase from the sentence would 
cause no change in the signification of the verb. 

τῇ δ᾽ ἄλλῃ ἀφικνοῦνται εἰς Σινώπην. An. VI 1. 15. τῇ δ᾽ tore- 
ραίᾳ ἀπέθανε μὲν οὐδεὶς, ἀμφὶ δὲ τὴν αὐτήν πως ὥραν ἀνεφρόνουν " 
τρίτῃ δὲ καὶ τετάρτῃ ἀνίσταντο ὥσπερ ἐκ φαρμακοποσίαὰς. An. IV 
8 21. ἦλθε μαντήιον ἐκ Δελφῶν ἐπισχόντας ἀπὸ τοῦ Αἰγινητέων 
ἀδικίου τριήκοντα ἔτεα τῷ ἑνὶ καὶ τριηκοστῷ Αἰακῷ τέμενος ἀποδέξαντας 
ἄρχεσθαι τοῦ πρὸς Αἰγινήτας πολέμου! Hdt. V 89ς. τούτῳ δὲ τῷ 
ἐνιαυτῷ καὶ Κῦρος ἀπέκτεινεν Αὐτοβοισάκην καὶ Μιτραῖον. Hell. II 


1 8. 
τὰ μὲν ἸΤηλῆι θεοὶ δόσαν ἀγλαὰ δῶρα 
ἤματι τῷ, ὅτε σε βροτοῦ ἀνέρος ἔμβαλον civy.—lIl. 18 84-5. 


ὁ δὲ ᾿Αρυάνδης ἦν οὗτος τῆς Αἰγύπτου ὕπαρχος ὑπὸ Καμβύσεω κατεσ. 
τεώς, ὃς ὑστέρῳ χρόνῳ τούτων παρισούμενος Δαρείῳ διεφθάρη. Hdt. 
IV 166. ἤλυθον εἰκοστῷ ἔτεϊ ἐς πατρίδα γαῖαν. Od. 16 206. 
τῇ δὲ τελευταίῃ ἐξιεῖσι ἐκ τῆς κοιλίης τὴν κεδρίην τὴν ἐσῆκαν πρότερον. 
Hdt. 11 87. Θουκλῆς δὲ καὶ οἱ Χαλκιδῆς ἐκ Νάξου ὁρμηθέντες ἔτει 
πέμπτῳ μετὰ Συρακούσας οἰκισθείσας κκλ. Thuc. VI 3 3. τέσσε- 
pas μὲν δὴ παρῆκε ἡμέρας. .. πέμπτῃ δὲ... πέμπει ἐπ᾽ αὐτοὺς 
Μήδους τε καὶ Κισσίους θυμωθείς. Hdt. VII 210. καὶ τῇ Θέτι 


καὶ τῇσι Νηρηίσι θύοντες (οἱ Μάγοι) ἔπαυσαν (τὸν ἄνεμον) τετάρτῃ 


ἡμέρῃ. Hdt. VII 1091. 


ὀκτωκαιδεκάτῃ δ᾽ ἐφάνη ὄρεα σκιόεντα 

γαίης Φαιήκων. ---()α. 5 279--8ο. 

καὶ δὴ ἐγώ γ᾽ ἐφάμην νέκυας καὶ δῶμ᾽ “Aidao 
ἤματι τῷδ᾽ ἵξεσθαι. ----11, 15 251--2. 

φημὶ γὰρ οὖν κατανεῦσαι ὑπερμενέα Κρονίωνα 


ἤματι τῷ, ὅτε κτλ. ----1]. 2 350-1. 


ὑστέρῳ μέντοι χρόνῳ μετεμέλησέ τέ σφι ταῦτα ποιήσασι καὶ ἀπέστησαν 
Δαρείου. Hdt. I 130. τῇ δὲ ἑβδόμῃ Ἐὐφορβός τε ὃ ᾿Αλκιμάχου καὶ 
Φίλαγρος ὃ Κυνέω ἄνδρες τῶν ἀστῶν δόκιμοι προδιδοῦσι τοῖσι Πέρ- 
σῃσι. Hdt. VI 101. παρεγένοντο δὲ καὶ αἱ ἱππαγωγοὶ νέες, τὰς 
τῷ προτέρῳ ἔτεϊ προεῖπε τοῖσι ἑωυτοῦ δασμοφόροισι Δαρεῖος ἑτοιμά- 
fev. Hdt. ΝῚ 95. οἱ δ᾽ ἐν Ἰθώμῃ δεκάτῳ ἔτει, ὡς οὐκέτι ἐδύναντο 
ἀντέχειν, ξυνέβησαν πρὸς τοὺς Λακεδαιμονίους ἐφ᾽ ᾧ ἐξίασιν ἐκ Πελο- 
ποννήσου ὑπόσπονδοι. Thuc. I 103 1. τῇ δὲ προτεραίᾳ ἡμέρᾳ 
ξυνέβη τῆς μάχης ταύτης καὶ τοὺς ᾿Επιδαυρίους πανδημεὶ ἐσ βαλεῖν ἐς 
τὴν ᾿Αργείν. Thuc. V 75 4. The verb, ξυνέβη, gives evi- 
dence of an effort to present the act as a mere occurrence. 

3. The third and largest class of verbs found with the 
dative phrases comprises those that may be modified by 
expressions denoting the time of duration, so that if the 
list below be compared with those on pp. 56 ff. not a few will 
be found to be in both. These may be broken up into two 
divisions, though by reason of a difference in context some 
may be found in both. 

(a) The first is composed of those that are aided in some 
way or other by the context, which shows that duration is 
not the relation intended. This assistance may come from a 
negative indicating non-occurrence, from the presence of 
some other temporal expression showing that the verb 
occupied only a part of the given time, from the fact that 
the time mentioned is too long a period for the action of 
the verb to continue through, from the presence of two or 
more verbs whose actions, though falling within the given 
period, cannot be contemporaneous, or the general trend 


} 
-τ20--- 


of the thought may be such as to throw the element of 
continuance in the background. 

ἀγγέλλω, pres. Hdt. III 129, Thuc. VIII 79 5. 

ἄγω, pres. An. VII 67; imp. Hell. IV 5 3, 5 10; aor. Il. 
23 86. 

ἀκούω, aor. Hell. II 4 43. 

ἀκροβολίζομαι, aor. Thuc. III 73 1. 

ἀναβαίνω, aor. Od. 14 252. 

ἀναβάλλομαι, to postpone, imp. Hdt. ΙΧ 8. 

ἀνάγομαι, to put to sea, pres. An. VI 21; imp. Thuc. IV 
22 °3, Fee.) Vie ess aor. Thuc, 152 1, IV 31:1, VIII 23 2, 
Hell. I 4 21. 

ἀναμένω, imp. Hdt. VII 54; aor. (ἄρξαι) Hdt. VIII 15. 

dvaxwpew, aor. Thuc. VI 7 2. 

ἀπαγγέλλω, imp. Hell. II 2 22. 

ἄπειμι, pres. An. II 1 3. 

ἀπελαύνω, imp. Hdt. VII 119. 

ἀπέρχομαι, aor. An. III 4 18. 

ἀποχωρέω, aor. Thuc. VII 52 1. 

ἀφιππεύω, pres. An. I 5 12. 

ἀπολογέομαι, imp. Hell. VII 4 39. 

βασιλεύω, pres. Thuc. VIII 58 1. 

γίγνομαι: γένωμαι μήνιμα, 1]. 22 358; ἐγένετο κατάδηλος, Η αἴ. 
III 68; ἐγένετο τέρας, Hdt. III 153; ταῦτα ἐγεγόνεε, Hdt. VI 
40; ἀνάπυστα ἐγένετο, Hdt. VI 66; γενέσθαι ἐν Teyén, Hdt. IX 
373 ἡ ἀνάστασις ἐγίγνετο, Thuc. VII 75 1; ἐγένου, Hell. III 3 
2; (τὰ ἱερὰ) ἐγίγνετο, Hell. II] 1 17; οὐκ ἐγεγένητο τὰ ἱερά, Hell. 
IV 8 36; An. VI 4 25; εὐετηρίας γενομένης, Hell. V 2 4; δῆλον 
ἐγένετο, An. II 2 17. 

δειπνοποιέω, pres. Hell. IV 7 4; aor. Hell. VI 5 15. 

διαμετρέω, aor. An. VII τ 40. 

διαπορεύομαι, aor. Hell. IV 6 6. 

διασκευάζομαι, imp. Thuc. IV 38 4. 

δουλεύω, fut. Hdt. VII 168. 

εἰμί: κῆρα ἔσσεσθαι, 1]. 11 444; μετάνοια ἦν, Thuc. III 36 4. 

εἶπε, An. I 7 18. 

εἰστίθημι, to put on board, aor. Hell. I 6 20. 

ἐκβράσσω, pres. pass. Hdt. VII rgo. 


LZ 


ἐκπλέω, pres. Thuc. VII 52 1; aor. Hell. I 6 20. 

éexpepw, aor. Hdt. Il 151. 

ἐξάγω, pres. An. VII 8 20; aor. Hdt. III 157. 

ἐξελαύνω, aor. Hdt. V 42. 

ἐξέρχομαι, pres. Hdt. V 72; fut. Hdt. VI 106. 

ἐπικαταβαίνω, aor. Thuc. VI 97 5. ‘ 

ἐπιπλέω, imp. Thuc. III 79 3, VIII 107 1; aor. Thuc. I 
62 51) 

ἐπισκευάζω, aor. Thuc. VIII 107 1. 

éxw, aor. Thuc. I 12 3. 

θύω, pres. An. I 7 18, Hell. III 4.15; imp. An. VI 4 20, 
VII 85, Hell. III 1 17, VI 5 18; aor. An. V 4 22, VII 8 
20, Hell. ΤΥ το :7)6, Va 46. 

ἵστημι, τ aor. Thuc. II 22 2, ΙΝ 38 4, VII 45 1, VIII 24 
1; 2 pluperf. An. VII τ 40. 

καλέω, aor. Il. 1 54. 

καλλιερέω, imp. Hdt. ΙΧ 92, An. VII 1 4o. 

κατάγω, aor. Thuc. V τό 3. 

καταπλέω, imp. Thuc. IV 106 3; aor. Hell. I 4 12. 

κηρύσσω, aor. pass. Hell. IV 5 2. 

κομίζομαι, pres. Thuc. II 8 2; aor. Hell. V 4 18. 

λέγω, aor. Hdt. VI 12, ΙΧ 87, 1]. 3 188. 

μαντεύομαι, aor. Od. 23 251. 

μάχομαι, fut. An. I 7 14; aor. An. 17 17. 

μέλλειν προσάξεσθαι, Thuc. IV 115 2. 

ὁράω, imp. Hdt. VIII 55; aor. Od. 17 327, Hdt. I 84, 108, 
III 52, Hell. VII 4 32. 

ὄρνυμι, aor. Il. 8 474. 

ποιεῖσθαι (πορείαν, μάχην), imp. An. I 7 20; fut. Hell. VII 
5 21. 

παραιτέομαι, aor. Hdt. ΙΝ 158. 

παρακαλέω, aor. Hell. II 4 9. 

παραπλέω, imp. Thuc. VII 35 2. 

παρασκευάζομαι, imp. Thuc. VI 67 1. 

παρατάσσω, aor. Thuc. VII 3 4. 

πάρειμι, pres. An. VI 4 15; imp. Hdt. I 82, Thuc. VIII 


PT 2. 


wen er 


πατέομαι, aor. Il. 21 76. 

πειράομαι, imp. Hdt. I 77. 

πλέω, aor. Hell. I 2 7. 

προεκκομίζω, pres. Hdt. II 63. 

προέρχομαι, aor. Thuc. VII 78 4, An. III 4 37, VII8 5, 
-Hell. VI 5 30. 

προσάγω, imp. An. VI 1 14, Hell. III 5 22. 

πρόσειμι, pres. Hell. VII 4 32. 

pew, aor. pass. Thuc. III 116 2. 

σημαίνω, imp. Hdt. VII 192; aor. Hell. II 1 22. 

στρατεύω, aor. Thuc. I 108 2. 

στρατοπεδεύομαι, aor. Thuc. IV 129 5, Hell. VI5 τό. 

συγκαλέω, aor. Hdt. VIII 54, Hell. VII 4 39. 

συγκατοικίζω, aor. Hdt. III 149. 

συλλέγω, imp. Thuc. VIII 93 1; aor. An. V 61. 

συναθροίζω, aor. Hell. I 1 15. 

συνέρχομαι, aor. An. VI 4 το. 

συντάσσω, aor. Thuc. V 66 1. 

τάσσω, imp. Thuc. III 107 3. 

τείνω, Pluperf. pass. Il. 4 545. 

τλάω, aor. Od. 20 18. 

τυγχάνω (δειπνοποιούμενοι, κεκαλλιερηκώς), aor. Hell. I 6 27, 
III x το. 

ὑποτοπέω, aor. Thuc. I 20 2. 

καὶ ταύτῃ μὲν TH ἡμέρᾳ, ἐπεὶ κατεστρατοπεδεύοντο οἱ Ἕλληνες 
κώμαις ἐπιτυχόντες, ἀπῆλθον οἱ βάρβαροι μεῖον ἔχοντες τῇ ἀκροβολί- 
oa. An. III 4 18. The context shows conclusively that 
extent of time is not the relation expressed. For in the first 
place, that which precedes describes what has been tak- 
ing place during the most of the day; and secondly, the 
ἐπεί Clause defines a particular part of the day when the 
barbarians started off.—rj δὲ ὑστεραίῃ ἀνέμενον τὸν ἥλιον ἐθέλον- 
τες ἰδέσθαι ἀνίσχοντα. Hdt. VII 54. The verb of this sen- 
tence is the only one in the long list that is like those that 
give to a temporal expression the meaning of extent. But 
a glance at this sentence shows that the τὸν ἥλιον----ἀνίσχοντα 
gives an entirely different turn to the meaning of τῇ tore- 


—123— 


pain. —évOaira εἰκοστῷ pnvi Ζωπύρῳ τῷ Μεγαβύζου τούτου, ὃς τῶν 
ἑπτὰ ἀνδρῶν ἐγένετο τῶν τὸν μάγον κατελόντων, τούτου τοῦ Μεγα- 
βύζου παιδὶ Ζωπύρῳ ἐγένετο τέρας τόδε - τῶν οἱ σιτοφόρων ἡμιόνων 
μία ἔτεκε. Hdt. II] 153. The colorless ἐγένετο, the τέρας with 
the description following, all go to prove that dating is the 
object in view and that extent is quite out of the question.— 
ἐπεὶ δὲ ἐδόκουν τῷ ᾿Αγησιλάῳ πάνυ ἤδη θαρρεῖν, ἡμέρᾳ πέμπτῃ ἢ ἕκτῃ 
καὶ δεκάτῃ ἀφ᾽ ἧς εἰσέβαλε, θυσάμενος πρῷ διεπορεύθη πρὸ δείλης 
ἑξήκοντα καὶ ἑκατὸν στάδια ἐπὶ τὴν λίμνην περὶ ἣν τὰ βοσκήματα τῶν 
᾿Ακαρνάνων σχεδὸν πάντα ἦν, καὶ ἔλαβε παμπληθῆ καὶ βουκόλια κτλ. 
Hell. IV 6 6. The participle, the πρὸ δείλης, the following 
clause beginning καί ἔλαβε, show that the whole day was 
not spent in marching. 

σοὶ δ᾽ ἐγὼ ἐνθάδε φημὶ φόνον καὶ κῆρα μέλαιναν 

ἤματι τῷδ᾽ ἔσσεθαι.----11. τι 443-4. 


It is the concept of death that forbids any relation but that 
of dating.—7zéurrn δὲ ἡμέρᾳ εἰσθέμενοι σῖτα μέτρια, ἐπειδὴ ἤδη 
μέσον ἡμέρας ἦν καὶ οἱ ἐφορμοῦντες ὀλιγώρως εἶχον καὶ ἔνιοι ἀνε- 
παύοντο, ἐξέπλευσαν ἔξω τοῦ λιμένος. Hell. I 6 20. The tem- 
poral clause defining the time more accurately is indica- 
tion enough that the relation is not the time of duration — 
τῇ δ᾽ ὑστεραίᾳ ἐπὶ μὲν τὴν πόλιν οὐδὲν μᾶλλον ἐπέπλεον, καίπερ ἐν 
πολλῇ ταραχῇ καὶ φόβῳ ὄντας κελ. Thuc. III 79 3. The nega- 
tive gives to the verb the force of non-occurrence. (see 
p. 87).---ἐπολιόρκεον αὐτοὺς ἡμέρας Sto: τῇ δὲ τρίτῃ ὑπόσπονδοι 
ἐξέρχονται ἐκ τῆς χώρης ὅσοι ἦσαν αὑτῶν Λακεδαιμόνιε. Hdt. V 
72. The element of continuance in the verb is wholly in the 
background, as the thought is not that of “going,” but of 
‘ getting out of the country.”’—rq ὑστάτῃ τῆς ὁρτῆς μελλόντων 
κατασπείσειν ὃ ἀρχιερεὺς ἐξήνεικέ σφι φιάλας χρυσέας, τῇσί περ ἐώθεσαν 
σπένδειν, ἁμαρτὼν τοῦ ἀριθμοῦ, ἕνδεκα δυώδεκα ἐοῦσι. Hdt. II 151. 
The action of the verb cannot be thought of as continuing 
throughout the given period.—évredOev δὲ Κῦρος ἐξελαύνει σταθ- 
μὸν ἕνα παρασάγγας τρεῖς συντεταγμένῳ TO στρατεύματι παντὶ Kal TO 


Ἑλληνικῷ καὶ τῷ βαρβαρικῷ. ᾧετο γὰρ ταύτῃ τῇ ἡμέρᾳ μαχεῖσθαι 


μον 


βασιλά. An. 17 14. The first sentence makes it clear that 
the dative phrase does not express duration.—ratry μὲν οὖν 
τῇ ἡμέρᾳ οὐκ ἐμαχέσατο βασιλεύς. An. 1 717. Another exam- 
ple of non-occurrence. 

ἑβδομάτῃ δ᾽ ἀναβάντες ἀπὸ Κρήτης εὐρείης 

ἐπλέομεν Βορέῃ ἀνέμῳ ἀκραέι καλῷ 

ῥηιδίως, ὡς εἴ τε κατὰ poov.—Od. 14 252--4. 


The small number of those who embarked, the simplicity 
of the act, and the close connection with the leading verb 
are evidence that both embarking and sailing took place on 
the same day.—é€vrevOev τῇ ὑστεραίᾳ ἀναγόμενοι πνεύματι ἔπλεον 
καλῷ ἡμέρας δύο παρὰ γῆν. An. VI 2 1. In this sentence 
somewhat the same conditions prevail as in the one just pre- 
ceding, though there is the additional help of ἡμέρας δύο, 
one of which must be the same as “the following day.”— 
οὕτω ὥστε Λακεδαιμονίων πανδημεὶ διζημένων τρίτῃ εὐφρόνῃ (αὐτὸν) 
γενέσθαι ἐν Τεγῃ. Hdt. ΙΧ 37. Because of the colorless 
character of the verb this example has been classed as it is, 
though with the prepositional phrase it does not differ from 
a verb meaning “to arrive.”’—iorépw δὲ χρόνῳ ἀκούσαντες 
ξένους μισθοῦσθαι τοὺς “EXevoin, στρατευσάμενοι πανδημεὶ ἐπ᾽ αὐτοὺς 
τοὺς μὲν στρατηγοὺς αὐτῶν εἰς λόγους ἐλθόντας ἀπέκτειναν. Hell. 
1443. The meaning of the verb, scarcely differing from 
αἰσθάνομαι, together with the peculiar character of the tem- 
poral phrase, gives indication that dating was the end in 
view. The peculiar character of the temporal phrase con- 
sists in the fact that χρόνος modified by ὕστερος without the 
article does not arouse in the mind the thought of duration 
that ὁ ὕστερος χρόνος “the future’? does—the former com- 
bination always in the dative and without the article, the 
latter either with the aforementioned adjective or one of 
like meaning, in the accusative and with the article. 

(b) The second division of the verbs that may be followed 
by phrases denoting the time of duration contains those that 
do not receive any assistance from the context to show that 


ει 


the accusative temporal relation is not meant. Yet it will 
be observed that none of them, as well as none of the 
preceding division, is such as to give to the temporal phrase 
the meaning of extent. They are the same as those which, 
when followed by a demonstrative phrase to which the 
speaker wishes to add the relation of duration, need the aid 
of the case ending that the meaning may be clear. But, as 
has been said, the very nature of the demonstrative modifier 
permits one to get at the meaning in the dative without 
resorting to the ending. The only use to which the ending 
need be put is that of a mark by which to distinguish it 
from the accusative. These verbs are: 

ἀεθλέω, imp. Hdt. VII 212. 

ἀθυμέω, imp. Hell. III 5 21. 

aipéw (δαῖτα), aor. mid. Od. 20 117. 

ἀπάγω, imp. Hell. IV 6 8, VI 5 20; aor. Hell. V 4 54. 

ἀπατάω, aor. Il. 19 97. 

ἄπειμι, imp. An. V 2 28. 

ἀποκομίζομαι, aor. Thuc. ΓΝ 96 9, Hell. V1 5. 

ἀποπλέω, imp. Hdt. VIII 25. 

γίγνομαι: ἐκκλησία ἐγένετο, Thuc. VI 8 3; πόλεμος ἐγένετο, 
ἜΠΗ 9 2; 

δῃόω, imp. Thuc. IV 25 8, 130 2. 

διαβαίνω, pres. Hell. VI 5 15. 

διαπειράομαι, imp. Hdt. ΠῚ 14. 

διατίθημι, imp. Hell. IV 5 8. 

διεξέρχομαι, aor. Hdt. ΓΝ 172. 

εἰμί: δεινότατός ἐστι, Thuc. VII 42 3; ἡ ἡγεμονία Hv, An. IV 
7.8; φίλος ἦν, Hell. II 315; ἦν ὁρᾶν, Hell. VI 4 16. 

ἐμβάλλω, aor. Hell. VII 2 το. 

ἐνοράω, imp. Hdt. VII 212. 

ἐπιγίγνομαι (χιών), pres. Hell. II 4 3. 

ἔχω, imp. Hdt. I 126. 

ἡγέομαι, imp. Hell. IV 7 5, VII 4 30. 

ἡσυχάζω, imp. Thuc. VII 38 2. 

θύω, imp. Hdt. IX 33. 

καίω, pres. Hell. IV 5 4. 


7 ae Spa 


καταβαίνω, pres.An. III 4 31. 

κρατέω, pres. Thuc. VI 23 2. 

λογίζομαι, aor. Hell. VI τ τη. 

ὁράω, fut. An. IIT 2 31. 

παραδαρθάνω, aor. Od. 20 88. 

παρέρχομαι, aor. Hell. II 4 31. 

περιάγω, imp. Hdt. I 30. 

πλέω, imp. Thuc. VI 50 3, Hell. I 1 18; aor. Hell. I 2 4. 

movew, pres. Hdt. VII 7; aor. Hell. V 4 29. 

πολεμίζω, fut. Il. 24 667. 

πορεύομαι, imp. Thuc. VII 78 4, An. I 7 19, III 4 1, 4 18, 
IV 2 24, 5 30, Hell. V 4 49, VI 5 27. 

πράττω, imp. An. II 2 18. 

πρόειμι, imp. Thuc. VII 78 6. 

orn imp. Thuc. VIII 35 4, VII 51 2. 

προσμίσγω, imp. Thuc. VII 39 1. 

mpoxwpew, imp. Thuc. VII 79 5. 

σπέρχω, pres. {l. 13 334. 

στρατηλατέω, imp. Hdt. VII 2ο. 

συγκάθημαι, imp. Hell. II 4 23. 

taviw, aor. 1]. 17 401. 

τειχίζω, imp. Thuc. VI 99 1, tor 1, VIII 64 3; aor. Hell. 
Pigs, 

ὑπολείπω, imp. Od. 16 50. 

brovpyéw, aor. Hell. V 2 26. 

ὑποχωρέω, aor. Thuc. I 54 2. 

φθείρω, imp. Hell. VII 1 20. 

φοβέομαι, imp. Il. 21 4. 

τῇ δ᾽ ὑστεραίᾳ ἀπῆγεν ὃ ᾿Αγησίλαος τὸ στράτευμα. Hell. IV 6 8. 
ταύτῃ μὲν οὖν τῇ ἡμέρᾳ οἱ Θηβαῖοι ἠθύμουν. Hell. II] 5 21. τῇ 
δ᾽ ὑστεραίῃ οἱ βάρβαροι οὐδὲν ἄμεινον ἀέθλεον. Hdt. VII 212. 
τούτου γὰρ ἡγεμονία ἣν τῶν ὀπισθοφυλάκων λοχαγῶν ἐκείνῃ τῇ ἡμέρᾳ. 
An. ΙΝ 7 8. τῷ μὲν οὖν πρώτῳ χρόνῳ ὃ Κριτίας τῷ Θηραμένει 
ὁμογνώμων τε καὶ φίλος ἦν. Hell. II 315 (see p. 40). τῇ δ᾽ tore- 
ραίᾳ οἱ μὲν Συρακόσιοι ἡσύχαζον, οὐδὲν δηλοῦντες ὁποῖόν τι τὸ μέλλον 
ποιήσουσιν. Thuc. VII 38 2. ὥστε τῇ ὑστεραίᾳ Κῦρος ἐπορεύετο 
ἠμελημένως μᾶλλον. An. 1 7 190. This is a good illustration 


of the effect of usage. There seems to be no doubt that 
the whole day is meant, but this phrase is all but formulaic, 
there being but one instance out of one hundred and twenty 
found in any other case (An. III 5 13). And so it is that 
the dative is used, no matter what the strict relation may be. 
In more than one half of the above references the phrase 
iS τῇ ὑστεραίᾳ OF τῇ προτεραίᾳ, which is of the same character. 
- ἐπείτε δὲ ἀπὸ δείπνου ἦσαν, εἴρετό σφεας ὁ Κῦρος κότερα τὰ τῇ 
προτεραίῃ εἶχον, ἢ τὰ παρεόντα σφι εἴη αἱρετώτερα. Hdt. I 126. 
τῇ δ᾽ ὑστεραίᾳ καὶ τῇ τρίτῃ λογισάμενοι τάς τε ἔξω μόρας ὅσαι αὐτοῖς 
εἶεν καὶ τὰς περὶ Λακεδαίμονα xtA. Hell. ΝῚ τ τ7. τῇ δ᾽ ὑστεραίᾳ 
αὖθις προσέβαλλον. Thuc. VIII 35 4. τετάρτῃ δ᾽ ἡμέρᾳ κατα- 
βαίνουσιν εἰς τὸ wediov. An. III 4 31. 

Thus, I think, it has been shown that such phrases are 
differentiated from the same in the accusative. The former 
have been found to be used with verbs expressing accom- 
plishment and momentary or instantaneous action, with 
neither of which the accusative denoting extent of time is 
employed. With the verbs that may be accompanied by a 
phrase indicating the time of duration, it has been seen 
that other elements are often present which forbid the inter- 
pretation of extent of time; and in case there are no such 
factors, the nature of the word of time and the demonstrative 
modifier together, since they have no connotation of dura- 
tion, is sufficient to keep that relation from coming forward, 
though we are doubtless obliged to call on the case ending 
in such instances as a distinguishing mark. In fact it is the 
meaning of the noun and the demonstrative nature of the 
modifier that play an important part in establishing the 
meaning of such phrases under all circumstances, and when 
dependent on a verb of the first two classes mentioned it is 
difficult to see what other relation could be expressed than 
that of the time at which something occurs. When accom- 
panying verbs of the third class, though receiving no 
assistance as in the case of the other two, yet the two 
important factors mentioned above are able to carry the 
meaning with little support from the inflectional ending. 


—128— 


The second division of the dative temporal phrases is 
made up of a few cases only, five in number—supplemented 
by two from Plutarch—in which the modifying word is one 
of measure. It is natural that there should be so few con- 
sidering the fact that this ‘case is so thoroughly preempted, 
so to speak, by the phrases with the demonstrative word. 
The nouns in these instances are ἡμέρα, νύξ and χρόνος limited 
by the numeral εἷς and the adjectives ἥμισυς and ὀλίγος. 
Even these few cases seem to be divided. On the one hand 
are three examples with the numeral having a demonstrative 
force, on the other those examples in which the numeral has 
its accustomed meaning, together with those with the adjec- 
tives above mentioned. 

With regard to the former, what has already been said 
as to the force of the demonstrative may be applied in their 
case also. They are: τοὺς δὲ κριοὺς οὐ θύουσι Θηβαῖοι, ἀλλ᾽ εἰσί 
σφι ἱροὶ διὰ τοῦτο. μιῇ δὲ ἡμέρῃ τοῦ ἐνιαυτοῦ, ἐν ὁρτῇ Διός, κριὸν 
ἕνα κατακόψαντες καὶ ἀποδείραντες κατὰ τὠυτὸ ἐνδύουσι τὥγαλμα τοῦ 
Διὸς xrA. Hdt. Il 42. ὅσα γὰρ Κύψελος ἀπέλιπε κτείνων τε κα 
διώκων, Περίανδρός σφεα ἀπετέλεε, μιῇ δὲ ἡμέρῃ ἀπέδυσε πάσας τὰς 
Κορινθίων γυναῖκας διὰ τὴν ἑωυτοῦ γυναῖκα Μέλισσαν. Hdt. V 92%. 
In both of these passages the temporal phrase is equivalent 
to “one particular day,” and thus similar in meaning to a 
demonstrative. The subject matter in either instance does 
not allow the phrase to mean the time of duration. 


οἱ δέ μοι ἑπτὰ κασίγνητοι ἔσαν ἐν μεγάροισιν, 
οἱ μὲν πάντες ἰῷ κίον ἤματι ἴΑιδος εἴσω. .---Π]. 6 421--2. 


ἰᾷ ἤματι “on one day”’ does not differ in meaning from 
“‘the same day.” (cf. Od. 7 326.) 

The instances making up the other class are the following. 
ἐν δὲ τούτῳ, ὅσοι Ἑρμαῖ ἦσαν λίθινοι ἐν τῇ πόλει τῇ ᾿Αθηναίων (εἰσὶ 
δὲ κατὰ τὸ ἐπιχώριον [ἡ τετράγωνος ἐργασία] πολλοὶ καὶ ἐν ἰδίοις 
προθύροις καὶ ἐν ἱεροῖς) μιᾷ νυκτὶ οἱ πλεῖστοι περιεκόπησαν τὰ πρό- 
σωπα. Thuc. VI 271. In this passage the numeral has 
its ordinary meaning and thus cannot express the time when 
the Hermae were multilated, but rather the length of the 


—129— 


period within which the act was done. This is necessitated 
by the meaning of the numeral. The parenthetical state- 
ment that there were a great many Hermae in the city, 
followed by the one that the most of them were mutilated, 
supports this interpretation, introducing the element of sur- 
prise that such widespread desecration should be accom- 
plished in so short a period.—Kipov δ᾽ ὥσπερ ἀθλητὴς δεινὸς 
ἡμέρᾳ μιᾷ δύο καθῃρηκὼς ἀγωνίσματα, καὶ TO μὲν ἐν Sadapin 
πεζομαχίᾳ, τὸ δ᾽ ἐν Πλαταιαῖς ναυμαχίᾳ, παρεληλυθὼς τρόπαιον κτλ. 
Plut. Kim. 132. This does not differ essentially from the 
preceding, though perhaps the idea of accomplishment in 
the verb is more prominent.—xai πάντες δ᾽ οἱ τῶν βαρβάρων 
ἄρχοντες μέσον ἔχοντες TO αὑτῶν ἡγοῦνται, νομίζοντες οὕτω Kal 
ἐν ἀσφαλεστάτῳ εἶναι, ἢν ἢ ἡ ἰσχὺς αὐτῶν ἑκατέρωθεν, καὶ εἴ τι 
παραγγεῖλαι χρήζοιεν, ἡμίσει ἂν χρόνῳ αἰσθάνεσθαι τὸ στράτευμα. 
An. I ὃ 22. ὡς δὲ κατιδὼν ἐκεῖνος ἐξανέστη καὶ per ὀργῆς 
ἠπείλησεν ὀλίγῳ χρόνῳ τοὺς ἄνδρας ἐπιδείξειν οὐκ εἰς τὴν αὐτοῦ ναῦν 
ἐμβεβληκότας, ἀλλ᾽ εἰς τὰς ἰδίας πατρίδας. Plut. Aristid. 23. 
In these two passages the adjectives of measure limiting 
χῤόνῳ exclude all thought of dating, but together with the 
verbs, which contain an element of accomplishment and play 
an important part in deciding the meaning, they determine 
that meaning to be the length of time within which the 
action is effected. 

The second division that was made of the nouns of time 
found in the dative consisted of those cases in which the 
word was unmodified. These are very few in number, 
eleven in all, and with one exception, νυκτί, Hdt. VII 12, 
are taken from Homer, a pretty clear indication that the 
rule that the dative of a temporal noun was modified, was 
well established. The words so used are νυκτί, χειμῶνι, θέρεϊ, 
ὥρῃ and (νυκτὸς) ἀμολγῷ. These it is noticed are either the 
same or of the same character as those that are employed 
in the genitive unmodified, that is, they signify a time of 
day or a season of the year. All that has been said of that 
construction may also be applied in these cases.* (see p. 


*For illustrations showing that they do not differ in meaning 
from the use of the genitive see p. 36. 


9 


78.) It may be inferred perhaps that they are a remnant 
from the time when both dative and genitive were employed 
to express the vague temporal relation of the time to which 
an action belongs, a condition brought to an end by the 
genitive gaining the upper hand. 
᾿ς μετὰ δὲ εὐφρόνη τε ἐγίνετο καὶ Ἐέρξην ἔκνιζε ἡ ᾿Αρταβάνου γνώμη ° 
νυκτὶ δὲ βουλὴν διδοὺς πάγχυ εὕρισκέ οἱ οὐ πρῆγμα εἶναι στρατεύεσθαι 
ἐπὶ τὴν Ἑλλάδα. Hdt. VII 12. 
ἀλλὰ ἑκὰς νήσων ἀπέχειν εὐεργέα νῆα, 
νυκτὶ δ᾽ ὁμῶς πλείειν.---ΑΟα. 15 33-4. 
νῦν δέ με λευγαλέῳ θανάτῳ εἵμαρτο ἁλῶναι 
ἐρχθέντ᾽ ἐν μεγάλῳ ποταμῷ, ὡς παῖδα συφορβόν, 
ὅν ῥά τ᾽ ἔναυλος ἀποέρσῃ χειμῶνι περῶντα.----1]. 21 281-3. 
θέρεϊ, I]. 22 151, ὥρῃ, Il. 2 468, Od. 9 51, seep. 36. 
οἱ δ᾽, ὥς τ᾽ ἠὲ Body ἀγέλην ἢ πῶυ μέγ᾽ οἰῶν 
θῆρε δύω κλονέωσι μελαίνης νυκτὸς ἀμολγῴῷ.----Ἴ]. 15 323-4. 
οἷος δ᾽ ἀστὴρ εἷσι per ἀστράσι νυκτὸς ἀμολγῷ 
éorepos.—I]. 22 317-8. 
νυκτὸς ἀμολγῷ, Il. 22 28, Od. 4 841. 
φύλλων yap Env χύσις ἤλιθα πολλή, 
ὅσσον T ἠὲ δύω ἠὲ τρεῖς ἄνδρας ἔρυσθαι 
ὥρῃ χειμερίῃ, εἰ καὶ μάλα περ χαλεπαίνοι.----Οα. 5 483-5. 


This last has been included here as well as those of νυκτὸς 
ἀμολγῷ because neither the adjective nor the noun designates 
a particular period as ταύτῃ τῇ ἡμέρᾳ, nor do they serve as a 
word of measure. 

For the second main division and the final section of our 
investigation in the dative case we have to consider the 
words whose primary meaning is not that of time, in the 
study of which, owing to paucity of material, there is a 
difficulty in drawing conclusions. The question to be 
answered is, How is it that such words may have a temporal 
significance ? 

In the first place, though few in number they divide into 
two groups; one includes two or three words which have 


a well established temporal meaning, as γενεά, νουμηνία; the 
other contains words denoting events, like εἰσβολή, μάχη; 
ἑορτή, which happen in and occupy a considerable portion 
of time. The members of the first group without question 
may be employed in the dative construction, those of the 
second are qualified for it because of the temporal element 
inherent in the nouns. 

The following are the sentences that contain the words 
possessing the temporal element to a greater degree. Sev- 
τέρῃ δὲ λέγουσι γενεῇ μετὰ ταῦτα ᾿Αλέξανδρον τὸν Πριάμου ἀκηκοότα 
ταῦτα ἐθελῆσαί οἱ ἐκ τῆς Ἑλλάδος δι᾿ ἁρπαγῆς γενέσθαι γυναῖκα. Ἡ αἱ. 
13. τρίτῃ δὲ γενεῇ μετὰ Μίνων τελευτήσαντα γενέσθαι τὰ Τρωικά. 
Hdt. VII 171. The meaning of the noun and the nature 
of the modifier do not distinguish these from the more usual 
dative phrases already discussed.—rod δ᾽ αὐτοῦ θέρους νουμηνίᾳ 
κατὰ σελήνην . . . ὃ ἥλιος ἐξέλιπε μετὰ μεσημβρίαν καὶ πάλιν ἀνεπλη- 
ρώθη. Thuc. II 28. In this sentence there is seen a reten- 
tion of the use of the dative heretofore referred to as found 
in Homer and Herodotus. There is in this case the same 
indefiniteness as in the genitive forms, which allow the time 
of the verb to be told in a loose way only. ’ 

Considering now the words in which the temporal element 
is more vague, there may be added to what has been said 
above, that some of them are assisted in performing their 
function by the modifying words; these not only are demon- 
strative in character, pointing out a particular event, but are 
of an ordinal nature, and must have reference to time owing 
to the nature of their nouns. The examples are: 

᾿Αθηναῖοι δὲ ἀκούσαντες ἀμφοτέρων, γενομένης καὶ Sis ἐκκλησίας, τῇ 
μὲν προτέρᾳ ovx ἧσσον τῶν Κορινθίων ἀπεδέξαντο τοὺς λόγους, ἐν δὲ 
τῇ ὑστεραίᾳ μετέγνωσαν Κερκυραίοις ξυμμαχίαν μὲν μὴ ποιήσασθαι. 
Thuc. 1 441. τῇ μὲν προτέρᾳ is aided by the genitive abso- 
lute phrase immediately preceding and by the following 
ἐν τῇ ὑστεραίᾳ.---τῇ δ᾽ ὑστεραίᾳ ἐκκλησίᾳ ὃ Νικίας, xairep . . . ὅμως 
τοῖς Λακεδαιμονίοις ἔφη χρῆναι φίλους μᾶλλον γίγνεσθα.. Thuc. V 
46 1. That ἐκκλησία has a temporal force is made very clear 
by its attributive, “ 


“ Ν 


of the following day.’’—kat μάχγ, τῇ μὲν 


-132-- 


πρώτῃ νικᾶται dp ἡμῶν, τῇ δ᾽ ὑστεραίᾳ ἱππεῦσί τε πολλοῖς καὶ ἀκοντι- 
σταῖς βιασθέντες ἀνεχωρήσαμεν ἐς τὰ τείχη. Thuc. VII 11 2. The 
first phrase works together with the second, with which it is 
contrasted, to express the relation of “time when.’ It is 
doubtful whether the second phrase is to be taken in its usual 
meaning or μάχη is to be understood from the preceding. 
I incline to the former view, considering that in I 44 1 (see 
above) the same writer has used ἐν τῇ ὑστεραίᾳ with ἐκκλησίᾳ 
understood, though he had just written τῇ προτέρᾳ (ἐκκλησίᾳ) 
without a preposition.—rj προτέρᾳ παρουσίᾳ, Thuc. I 128 5; 
τῇ ὑστέρῃ ᾿Ολυμπιάδι, Hdt. VI 103; τῇ πρώτῃ κατάστασι, Hdt. 
III 46. 

If there be given a noun with a more or less vague element 
of time, a limiting ordinal adjective emphasizing the tem- 
poral element, a verb similar to those with which the custo- 
mary dative temporal phrases are found, all coupled with a 
strong desire in the speaker to date the act, the analogy 
becomes so strong between such a phrase and the regular 
dative phrase that the inflectional ending is all that is needed 
to complete the chain. While in the above instances, with 
the conditions such as have been described, the case ending 
has to bear but a light burden, in those cases in which a 
pure demonstrative is the modifying word it supports a 
greater burden, because the demonstrative does not contain 
the reference to time that an ordinal adjective contains. In 
the few examples of this sort the verbs do not differ from 
those with the nouns denoting time only. 

γνώμῃ δὲ τοιᾷδε λέγεται τὸν ᾿Αρχίδαμον περί τε τὰς ᾿Αχαρνὰς ὡς és 
μάχην ταξάμενον μεῖναι καὶ ἐς τὸ πεδίον ἐκείνῃ τῇ ἐσ βολῇ οὐ καταβῆναι. 
Thuc. Il 20 1. εἴ τε καὶ μὴ ἐπεξέλθοιεν ἐκείνῃ τῇ ἐσβολῇ οἱ ᾿Αθη- 
ναῖοι κκλ. Thuc. II 20 4. τῇ δὲ ἐσβολῇ ταύτῃ πλεῖστόν τε χρόνον 
ἐνέμειναν. Thuc. II 57 2. Ambiguity is avoided and the 
meaning is more easily gained through the presence of the 
accusative temporal phrase.—ry αὐτῇ ταύτῃ ἐσβολῇ, Hat. 
VI 92.—xal γὰρ ἠπειρῶταί τε ὄντες ἐναυμαχήσαμεν ἐπ᾽ ᾿Αρτεμισίῳ, 
μάχῃ τε τῇ ἐν τῇ ἡμετέρᾳ γῇ γενομένῃ παρεγενόμεθα ὑμῖν τε καὶ 
Παυσανίᾳ. Thuc. I11 54 4. ὅρτῇ ἐναυσίῃ, Hdt. ΓΝ 180. 


In all the instances in which the word indicates an event 
the case ending must necessarily play a more or less import- 
ant role according to the character of the modifier—accord- 
ing as the sentence is long and involved, or short and simple. 
It is only because of the temporal element, never very 
prominent in such words, upon which the powerful force 
of analogy has worked, that they are employed at all to 
express this relation the few times they do so. 

This completes the study of the dative construction of 
words of time and we are ready for a brief summary. In 
this construction we found both words whose primary mean- 
ing was that of time and those in which the temporal element 
was more or less vague. With the former the stem meaning 
naturally was of very great assistance in determining the 
meaning of the construction and the first factor noted. The 
second element of importance in the great majority of cases 
was the modifying word of demonstrative character, which 
together with the meaning of the noun was able to date an 
act or state without resort to the case ending. It was the 
presence of the demonstrative word which differentiated the 
dative phrases from by far the greater part of the genitive 
expressions, and the verb upon which the phrase depended 
was in many instances different from those upon which the 
accusative phrases were dependent, that is to say, it denoted 
completion or momentary action; whereas in case the verbs 
were of the same character, some element in the context 
made the relation of extent of time impossible, or in lack of 
that, the demonstrative modifier which contained no idea of 
measure was able to help that relation from rising in the 
mind, only the inflectional ending being needed to differ- 
entiate it from the accusative. In the few instances in which 
the noun was limited by a word of measure, this second 
element took the phrase out of the dating category, and 
with the assistance of the context, especially the verb, made 
the relation that of the time within which the action was 
performed. The few cases in which the noun was unmodi- 
fied were limited to Homer, with one exception, and by 


—134— 


reason of their lack of some definitive modifier, they were 
like the same or similar words in the genitive unmodified, 
unable to date with precision, giving merely the time of day 
or season of the year, to which the action belonged. Finally, 
in the phrases consisting of a noun not primarily of a 
temporal meaning plus some demonstrative word the case 
ending was the most important factor, though receiving 
support from the fact that the noun either had in one of its 
meanings a well established temporal element, or denoted 
an event with relation to which, since it occupied time, acts 
could be dated. Thus, I hope, it has been shown with refer- 
ence to the dative that there are some other very influential 
factors by means of which the meaning may be ascertained 
besides that of the inflectional ending, though as in the other 
two cases the influence of the ending was certainly present, 
and in this instance must have been greatly augmented by 
the clearly locative character of the case. 


CONCLUSION. 


The results of this study of the case construction of the 
words of time may be briefly summed up. 

In the first place, it has been learned that a formal classi- 
fication according to the inflectional ending, though in great 
part corresponding with one made on a functional basis, does 
not end in functional divisions mutually exclusive. This 
divergence from the well established rules of usage for the 
various cases, which in some instances was well marked, in 
others less so, was made evident in general by the context, 
of which the modifying word of the noun of time was most 
important, the verb upon which the expression depended 
coming next in order of consequence. A second point is 
that the precision in meaning of the case construction is 
neither necessarily nor entirely due to the inflectional ending, 
but is distributed over various elements, of which the tem- 
poral meaning of the noun lies as a foundation for the 
others. Following upon the meaning of the noun with its 
number comes the modifying word, if there is any, next the 
verb,* and finally the remainder of the context, which by 

* The verb exerts an influence through its stem-meaning and its 
tense. How important the former element is has been fully brought 
out, but it is difficult to say of how much consequence the latter is. 
It is evident enough that the tense plays an important part when 
it denotes repeated or customary action, thus assisting in expressing 
the relation of extent of time, and also the relation of the time 
within which something falls, when that is indicated by a genitive 
noun limited by the distributive adjective ἕκαστος, or by the article 
with distributive force. The tenses indicating continuance certainly 
aid in making clear the relation of extent, especially when the 
noun of time is modified by a word which is not one of measure; 
but such a tense is by no means necessary in expressing this relation. 
The extent of the influence of the tense in determining the meaning 
of the ordinary genitive and dative constructions as well as many 
instances of the accusative has not been determined, except in so 


—136— 


some word or phrase, or even by the general trend of the 
thought, is of service in making clear the meaning of the 
construction. And further, the factors just named are in 
many instances able to carry the meaning without calling 
upon the case-ending for assistance. This is especially 
true of the relation of extent of time, which may be expressed 
by a noun denoting time, modified by a word of measure 
and dependent on a verb having a prominent element of con- 
tinuance; it is also true of the relation of the time within 
which an action falls, which may be indicated by an unmodi- 
fied word like ἡμέρας ‘daytime,’ and νυκτός “night-time.’’ 
Thirdly, those nouns whose temporal element is very vague, 
such as words for events and the like, are seldom used in 
temporal constructions) without a preposition. A fourth 
fact learned is, that a comparison of the case constructions 
of words of time with corresponding equivalent prepositional 
phrases shows a great preference for the former, with excep- 
tions in special instances. (See pp. 139 ff.) And finally, 
by way of inference one is justified in saying that the above 
mentioned elements through constant association with the 
cases were powerful factors in attaching to the cases the 
meanings for which they in general stand, so that in the 
absence of any one or more of these elements the case itself 
was capable of carrying the whole burden and adequately 
expressing the relation as conceived in the mind of the 
speaker. With the accusative it was the frequent connection 
with a word of measure and a verb having a strong element 
of duration that placed upon it the function of expressing 
extent of time. It was the indefiniteness and vagueness of 
the words denoting the time of day and season of the year 
when unmodified, and the association of nouns of time modi- 
fied by words of measure with verbs indicating accomplish- 


far as to discover that it was not great—that is, the tense is often 
but a secondary factor. To ascertain exactly the importance of this 
element demands a minute study of the use of the tenses by the 
various writers, not only with temporal expressions but in other 
connections also, and this was beyond the scope of the present work. 


ment or momentary action, that gave to the genitive construc- 
tion the meaning of the time within which an action falls. 
As for the dative, the constant presence of a demonstrative 
word with the noun gave that case the function of dating 
precisely. 

As a last word, the writer wishes to say that he does not 
feel warranted in claiming finality for all these general con- 
clusions, nor for the minor ones in the body of the work, 
because of the relatively small number of instances upon 
which both the whole and the various parts have been based 
as compared with the much larger number still uncollected 
and unexamined. Yet he does think that further investiga- 
tion will prove at least the general conclusions, and many 
of the others. 


APPENDIX.* 


The discussion of the prepositional phrases which fol- 
lowed the temporal case constructions did not lay claim to 
completeness, as it did not contain all the uses of the pre- 
positions in temporal relations with all the various words 
with which they might be found in the sources used. It 
was rather a commentary on what had preceded, a supple- 
ment to the ordinary constructions of nouns of time. For 
this purpose an attempt at completeness was made in the 
collection of cases in which the noun was a word of time; 
so that the incompleteness was on the side of the words not 
indicative primarily of time. This defect was not a grave 
one from the standpoint of results, as the nouns of the latter 
sort were used without a preposition in ‘exceedingly rare 
instances; for by reason of their non-temporal character 
they demanded a separate word to express the temporal rela- 
tion, which otherwise would have been confused with other 
relations connected with them. In addition, the temporal 
force of the preposition, it is natural to suppose, did not 
have its origin with such words, but rather with pure words 
of time, with which the given meaning became crystallized 
so as to be readily transferred to words of a vague temporal 
character. This raised the question of the origin of the 
temporal meaning in prepositions. An enumeration shows 
that they are all intimately connected with the relations of 
space. They are ἀμφί, ἅμα, dvd, ἀπό, διά, εἰς, ἐκ, ἐν, ἐντός, ἐπί, 
κατά, μετά, μέχρι, παρά, περί, πρό, πρός, rd. Excepting ἅμα all 
of them are conceived of as relating to space, and it is 
only by a figure of speech that they refer to time. And since 
the great majority of the uses of these prepositions with a 
temporal signification parallel so closely their meaning in 
spatial relations, it is rational to suppose that the transfer 


* See note, p. 2. 


—I139— 


from the latter to the former was very early, owing to the 
similarity of the conceptions of the two spheres. 

The method of study consisted in examining each preposi- 
tion separately; that is, the phrases containing each pre- 
position were classified according to the different meanings 
of the preposition and the external form of the phrase. 
This done, a comparison was made with phrases or expres- 
sions of like form in simple case constructions of the same 
or nearly similar meaning, to discover if possible any differ- 
ences existing and the reason for the use of the preposition. 
In all cases, whether there was a close parallel or not in the 
case construction, an explanation was sought for the use 
of the preposition. Generally speaking this was due to one 
of two reasons; either the meaning of the case construction 
was so well understood that it was but a step to shift the 
duty of expressing the relation from the various elements 
performing that function to a single word admirably adapted 
for the purpose because of its meaning with words of space, 
whether it did or did not govern the case in which the 
temporal word or phrase was regularly used to express the 
given relation; or the preposition was necessary because 
there was nothing in the temporal noun itself or the context 
able to express the thought. 

By way of conclusion the following observations were 
made. 

First with regard to the use of the case constructions in 
comparison with those prepositional phrases found to be 
practically equivalent to them, it may be said that in general 
all the three temporal relations attached to the genitive, 
dative and accusative cases respectively are expressed more 
often by the case construction than by the various corre- 
sponding prepositional phrases. A rough comparison of the 
number of times the accusative is used to express extent of 
time with that of the equivalent prepositional phrases shows 
that the former is employed in 87 per cent. of the total 
number, and at least 8 per cent. of the prepositional phrases 
have ἐπί, which of all the prepositions is best suited’ for 


—I40— 


the purpose. The dative comes next, being employed 78 
per cent. of the number of times in which the temporal rela- 
tion is that of the time at which something occurs; yet if 
χρόνος, which is seldom found without a preposition, were 
eliminated, the percentage would be raised to 85 per cent. 
The genitive is last of all, with but 62 per cent. of the total 
number in which the relation is that of the time within which 
something falls. But if the simple genitive phrases contain- 
ing a word of measure as a modifier of the noun be placed 
over against the similar phrases with a preposition, it is 
found that the latter are employed more than twice as often 
‘as the former. On the other hand, the simple genitive of 
the noun modified by the article has been preferred nearly 
eight times, and the simple genitive of the noun, unmodified, 
more than three times as often as an equivalent prepositional 
phrase. 

Thus we see that the percentages for the accusative and 
dative are large and practically the same for both, especially 
if χρόνος be eliminated from the calculations for the dative. 
This is as it should be; for with the accusative by far the 
larger number of instances have some word of measure 
expressed or implied, which with the assistance given by 
the verb makes a preposition unnecessary; and the same is 
true of the dative, with which the demonstrative modifying 
word plays the part which the word of measure and the 
verb of continuance do with the accusative. That the geni- 
tive has the smallest percentage of the three is not sur- 
prising, if we take into consideration the fact that when 
the noun is modified by a word of measure the prepositional 
phrase is the predominating mode of expression. That the 
prepositional phrase was partially successful in supplanting 
the case construction was probably due to the fact that such 
a conception as “within so many days” often came in con- 
nection with verbs having an element of duration, so that, 
if the genitive construction should be employed, there might 
be some confusion with the relation of extent of time, and 
besides, the preposition, ἐν, was ready to assist in the 


transfer by being admirably adapted for expressing the 
relation. And further, the prevalence of the simple genitive, 
modified by the article or unmodified, as compared with an 
equivalent prepositional phrase, was due to the entire ade- 
quacy of the elements inherent in the words themselves to 
indicate loosely the time to which some act belonged. 

Finally, it was observed that here and there were certain 
prepositional phrases that had almost entirely, or at least 
in part, taken the place of the case constructions. ἐν with 
a noun modified by a word of measure, just mentioned 
above, is a case in point. Right in line with such phrases 
is the apparently exclusive use of év followed by a plural 
noun modified by a word of demonstrative nature instead 
of a simple genitive plural. Still another is the phrase with 
eis governing a noun limited by an adjective referring to 
the future, which seems to have displaced a simple dative 
when it would depend on a verb referring to the future. 
For Thucydides there was noted the prevalence of κατά 
“distributive” over the simple genitive phrase with the 
distributive adjective, which was the customary mode of 
expression with Herodotus. And again in Thucydides the 
phrases, ἅμα (τῇ) ἕῳ and ἅμα τῷ ἦρι, for which the genitive 
might have been used, though with a looser designation of 
the time, are regularly employed. The unassisted case con- 
struction is never found with the first noun in that writer, 
and but once with the second. 





ve 
eye 
Ἢ 














Sune 
etal Ἂς 4 


‘2 











DON = 


Lei Ou εν" 
Ὁ Ln γὴν, eee 

ΤΩΙ τ λον τ ist pe toh ΡΣ 
A ky, tain ee Ἢ ΠΟ ‘ 
Aa gia γε Οὐ Ν 


ΡΣ 
yo = 








UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA LIBRARY 
BERKELEY 


Return to desk from which borrowed. 
This book is DUE on the last date stamped below. 











LD 21-—95m—11,'50 (2877816) 476 





